369 Man

369 Motor Management Relay
Instruction Manual
369 Revision: 53CMB110.000 Manual P/N: 1601-0077-B3 Copyright 1999 GE Multilin
Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
IS TE R E
Manufactured under an ISO9001 Registered system.
Internet: http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm/
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario,
EG
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 1-1
1.2 ORDERING
1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 ORDERING................................................................................................ 1-2 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................................... 1-2 FIRMWARE HISTORY .............................................................................. 1-3 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY.................................................. 1-3 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY.................................................................. 1-4 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION...................................................................... 1-5
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS

2.1.1 2.1.2 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 2-1 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ........................................................................... 2-2
2.2 FEATURES
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 PROTECTION FEATURES ....................................................................... 2-3 METERED QUANTITIES........................................................................... 2-4 ADDITIONAL FEATURES ......................................................................... 2-4
2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9 INPUTS...................................................................................................... 2-5 OUTPUTS.................................................................................................. 2-6 METERING ................................................................................................ 2-6 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................. 2-6 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 2-7 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 2-9 APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION............................................................... 2-9 TYPE TEST STANDARDS ........................................................................ 2-9 PRODUCTION TESTS ............................................................................ 2-10
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION................................................................. 3-1
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 TERMINAL LIST ........................................................................................ 3-3 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST................................................. 3-5 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST............................................... 3-6 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST .............................................. 3-6 TERMINAL LAYOUT ................................................................................. 3-7
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.3.10 3.3.11 3.3.12 3.3.13 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM.................................................................... 3-8 TYPICAL WIRING...................................................................................... 3-9 CONTROL POWER................................................................................... 3-9 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS.............................................................. 3-9 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS ................................................................ 3-10 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT .................................... 3-11 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS ....................................................... 3-12 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS............................................................... 3-13 RTD INPUTS ........................................................................................... 3-14 DIGITAL INPUTS..................................................................................... 3-14 ANALOG OUTPUTS................................................................................ 3-15 REMOTE DISPLAY ................................................................................. 3-15 OUTPUT RELAYS ................................................................................... 3-16
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................... 3-17
3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION

3.4.1 3.4.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................... 3-19 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................ 3-20
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 PHASE CT INSTALLATION .................................................................... 3-22 5 Amp GROUND CT INSTALLATION ..................................................... 3-23 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION....................................... 3-24 a 3 and 5 WINDOW .................................................................................. 3-24 b 8 WINDOW ............................................................................................. 3-25
4. USER INTERFACES
4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 FACEPLATE .............................................................................................. 4-1 DISPLAY .................................................................................................... 4-1 LED INDICATORS ..................................................................................... 4-2 RS232 PROGRAM PORT ......................................................................... 4-2 KEYPAD .................................................................................................... 4-3 SETPOINT ENTRY .................................................................................... 4-4
4.2 369PC INTERFACE

4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10 4.2.11 4.2.12 4.2.13 4.2.14 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 4-5 INSTALLATION/UPGRADE....................................................................... 4-5 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 4-7 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE ............................................................ 4-8 CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE ...................................................... 4-10 EDITING A SETPOINT FILE ................................................................... 4-11 DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 ................................. 4-12 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION .............................. 4-13 PRINTING ................................................................................................ 4-14 TRENDING .............................................................................................. 4-15 WAVEFORM CAPTURE.......................................................................... 4-17 PHASORS ............................................................................................... 4-19 EVENT RECORDING .............................................................................. 4-21 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................. 4-23
5. SETPOINTS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU ......................................................................... 5-1
5.2 S1 369 SETUP

5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 SETPOINTS PAGE 1 MENU ..................................................................... 5-5 SETPOINT ACCESS ................................................................................. 5-6 DISPLAY PREFERENCES ........................................................................ 5-7 369 COMMUNICATIONS .......................................................................... 5-8 REAL TIME CLOCK................................................................................... 5-9 WAVEFORM CAPTURE.......................................................................... 5-10 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ..................................................................... 5-11 DEFAULT MESSAGES ........................................................................... 5-12 CLEAR/PRESET DATA ........................................................................... 5-13 INSTALLED OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES......................................... 5-14
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP

5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 SETPOINTS PAGE 2 MENU ................................................................... 5-15 CT/VT SETUP.......................................................................................... 5-16 MONITORING SETUP............................................................................. 5-18
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.3.4 5.3.5 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP ........................................................................ 5-21 CONTROL FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 5-22
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION

5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 SETPOINTS PAGE 3 MENU ................................................................... 5-23 THERMAL MODEL .................................................................................. 5-24 OVERLOAD CURVES ............................................................................. 5-25 UNBALANCE BIAS.................................................................................. 5-31 MOTOR COOLING .................................................................................. 5-33 HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO..................................................................... 5-35 RTD BIAS ................................................................................................ 5-36 OVERLOAD ALARM................................................................................ 5-37
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS

5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 SETPOINTS PAGE 4 MENU ................................................................... 5-38 SHORT CIRCUIT..................................................................................... 5-39 MECHANICAL JAM ................................................................................. 5-40 UNDERCURRENT................................................................................... 5-41 CURRENT UNBALANCE ........................................................................ 5-42 GROUND FAULT..................................................................................... 5-44
5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS

5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 SETPOINTS PAGE 5 MENU ................................................................... 5-46 ACCELERATION TRIP............................................................................ 5-47 START INHIBITS ..................................................................................... 5-48 BACKSPIN DETECTION ......................................................................... 5-50
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE

5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 SETPOINTS PAGE 6 MENU ................................................................... 5-51 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION .................................................................... 5-51 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION................................................................. 5-53 OPEN RTD ALARM ................................................................................. 5-56 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM .......................................................... 5-56 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM .......................................................... 5-57
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5 5.8.6 SETPOINTS PAGE 7 MENU ................................................................... 5-58 UNDERVOLTAGE ................................................................................... 5-59 OVERVOLTAGE...................................................................................... 5-60 PHASE REVERSAL................................................................................. 5-61 UNDERFREQUENCY.............................................................................. 5-62 OVERFREQUENCY ................................................................................ 5-63
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS

5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 5.9.5 5.9.6 5.9.7 SETPOINTS PAGE 8 MENU ................................................................... 5-64 LEAD POWER FACTOR ......................................................................... 5-66 LAG POWER FACTOR ........................................................................... 5-67 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER............................................................... 5-68 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ............................................................. 5-69 UNDERPOWER....................................................................................... 5-70 REVERSE POWER ................................................................................. 5-71
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS

5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 5.10.4 5.10.5 5.10.6 5.10.7 a b SETPOINTS PAGE 9 MENU ................................................................... 5-72 SPARE SWITCH...................................................................................... 5-73 EMERGENCY RESTART ........................................................................ 5-73 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ........................................................................ 5-73 SPEED SWITCH...................................................................................... 5-74 REMOTE RESET..................................................................................... 5-74 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS ................................................................. 5-75 GENERAL................................................................................................ 5-75 DIGITAL COUNTER ................................................................................ 5-76
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
c d e f WAVEFORM CAPTURE.......................................................................... 5-76 SIMULATE PRE-FAULT .......................................................................... 5-76 SIMULATE FAULT................................................................................... 5-76 SIMULATE PRE-FAULT to FAULT.......................................................... 5-76
5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS

5.11.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 10 MENU ................................................................. 5-77 5.11.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS ................................................................................ 5-77 5.11.3 ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION ..................................... 5-78
5.12 S11 369 TESTING

5.12.1 5.12.2 5.12.3 5.12.4 5.12.5 5.12.6 SETPOINTS PAGE 11 MENU ................................................................. 5-79 SIMULATION MODE ............................................................................... 5-79 PRE-FAULT SETUP ................................................................................ 5-80 FAULT SETUP......................................................................................... 5-81 FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS ..................................................................... 5-82 FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS .................................................................. 5-83
6. ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ................................................................ 6-1
6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 1 MENU ............................................................ 6-3 MOTOR STATUS ..................................................................................... 6-4 LAST TRIP DATA ...................................................................................... 6-5 ALARM STATUS ....................................................................................... 6-6 START INHIBIT STATUS .......................................................................... 6-6 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS .......................................................................... 6-7 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS ........................................................................ 6-7 REAL TIME CLOCK................................................................................... 6-8
6.3 A2 METERING DATA

6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 2 MENU ............................................................ 6-9 CURRENT METERING ............................................................................. 6-9 VOLTAGE METERING ............................................................................ 6-10 POWER METERING ............................................................................... 6-11 LOCAL RTD............................................................................................. 6-12 REMOTE RTD ......................................................................................... 6-13 DEMAND METERING ............................................................................. 6-14 PHASORS ............................................................................................... 6-15
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA

6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 3 MENU .......................................................... 6-16 MOTOR DATA ......................................................................................... 6-16 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS ........................................................................ 6-18 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS .................................................................... 6-19
6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA

6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 4 MENU .......................................................... 6-20 TRIP COUNTERS.................................................................................... 6-20 MOTOR STATISTICS .............................................................................. 6-22
6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD

6.6.1 6.6.2 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 5 MENU .......................................................... 6-23 EVENT 01 ................................................................................................ 6-23
6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION

6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 6 MENU .......................................................... 6-25 MODEL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 6-25 FIRMWARE VERSION ............................................................................ 6-25
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7. APPLICATIONS
7.1 269-369 COMPARISON

7.1.1 369 AND 269 PLUS COMPARISON ......................................................... 7-1
7.2 369 FAQs

7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)........................................... 7-2
7.3 369 DOs and DONTs

7.3.1 DOs and DONTs ....................................................................................... 7-4 a DOs............................................................................................................ 7-4 b DON'Ts ...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION

7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION.................................................................................. 7-7 a 369 CT Withstand ...................................................................................... 7-7 b CT Size and Saturation.............................................................................. 7-7 7.4.2 CT SELECTION......................................................................................... 7-8
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ................................................................... 7-10
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.5 7.6.6 7.6.7 7.6.8 7.6.9 7.6.10 7.6.11 7.6.12 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION............................................................... 7-16 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS........................................... 7-18 THERMAL MODEL .................................................................................. 7-19 RTD BIAS FEATURE............................................................................... 7-20 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION........................................ 7-21 START INHIBIT ....................................................................................... 7-23 2 CT CONFIGURATION ........................................................................ 7-25 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS ........... 7-27 RTD CIRCUITRY ..................................................................................... 7-29 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION ................................... 7-30 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ............................................. 7-32 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING .......................................... 7-33
8. TESTING
8.1 TEST SETUP

8.1.1 8.1.2 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 8-1 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP ................................................. 8-1
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST..................................................... 8-2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST....................................................... 8-2 GROUND (1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST ...................................................... 8-3 MULTILIN 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST ................................... 8-4 RTD ACCURACY TEST ............................................................................ 8-4 DIGITAL INPUTS AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION .................................. 8-7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................... 8-8 OUTPUT RELAYS ................................................................................... 8-10
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST ..................................................................... 8-11 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST ............................................................ 8-11 UNBALANCE TEST................................................................................. 8-12 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST .................................................... 8-14 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST........................................................................... 8-15
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9. COMMISSIONING
9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS

9.1.1 SETPOINTS TABLE .................................................................................. 9-1
10. COMMUNICATIONS
10.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE

10.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE ..................................................................... 10-1
10.2 PROTOCOL
10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 10.2.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL.................................................................... 10-1 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE ............................................ 10-1 DATA PACKET FORMAT ........................................................................ 10-2 ERROR CHECKING ................................................................................ 10-3 TIMING .................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS

10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS .................................................... 10-5 FUNCTION CODES 03 & 04 - READ SETPOINTS & ACTUAL VALUES10-5 FUNCTION CODE 05 - EXECUTE OPERATION.................................... 10-6 FUNCTION CODE 06 - STORE SINGLE SETPOINT ............................. 10-7 FUNCTION CODE 07 - READ DEVICE STATUS ................................... 10-8 FUNCTION CODE 08 - LOOPBACK TEST ............................................. 10-9 FUNCTION CODE 16 - STORE MULTIPLE SETPOINTS .................... 10-10 FUNCTION CODE 16 - PERFORMING COMMANDS .......................... 10-11
10.4 ERROR RESPONSES

10.4.1 ERROR RESPONSES........................................................................... 10-12
10.5 MEMORY MAP

10.5.1 10.5.2 10.5.3 10.5.4 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION ............................................................ 10-13 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ........................................... 10-13 EVENT RECORDER ............................................................................. 10-14 WAVEFORM CAPTURE........................................................................ 10-14
A. MEMORY MAPPING
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING

A.1.1 A.1.2 MEMORY MAP .......................................................................................... A-1 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ........................................................... A-29
B. REVISIONS
B.1 CHANGE NOTES

B.1.1 B.1.2 REVISION HISTORY .................................................................................B-1 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B3 ............................................................... B-1
C. WARRANTY
C.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION
INDEX
vi
1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1.1INTRODUCTION 1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW
The 369 is a digital relay that provides protection and monitoring for three phase motors and their associated mechanical systems. A unique feature of the 369 is its ability to learn individual motor parameters and to adapt itself to each application. Values such as motor inrush current, cooling rates and acceleration time may be used to improve the 369s protective capabilities. The 369 can offer optimum motor protection where other relays cannot, by using the FlexCurve custom overload curve, or one of the fifteen standard curves. The 369 has one RS232 front panel port, and three RS485 rear ports. Modbus RTU protocol is standard to all ports. Setpoints can be entered via the front keypad or by using the 369PC software and a computer. Status, actual values and troubleshooting information are also available via the front panel display or via communications. A simulation mode and pickup indicator allow testing and verification of correct operation without requiring a relay test set. As an option, the 369 can individually monitor up to 12 RTDs. These can be from the stator, bearings, ambient or driven equipment. The type of RTD used is software selectable. Optionally available as an accessory is the remote RTD module which can be linked to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection. The optional metering package provides VT inputs for voltage and power elements. It also provides metering of V, kW, kvar, kVA, PF, Hz, and MWhrs. Four user configurable analog outputs are included with this option. The Back-Spin Detection (B) option enables the 369 to detect the flow reversal of a pump motor and enable timely and safe motor restarting. 369 options are available when ordering the relay or as upgrades to the relay in the field. Field upgrades are via an option enabling passcode available from GE Multilin, which is unique to each relay and option.
1-1
1.2 ORDERING 1.2 ORDERING
1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1.2.1 ORDERING
To order, select the basic model and the desired features from the selection guide below:
369
369
* HI LO
* Base unit (no RTD) 50-300 VDC / 40-265 VAC control power 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC control power Optional 12 RTD inputs (built-in) No optional RTD inputs Optional metering package Optional backspin detection (incl. metering) No optional metering or backspin detection Optional Fiber Optic Port No optional Fiber Optic Port Optional Profibus protocol interface No optional Profibus protocol interface
R 0 M B 0 F 0 P 0 Notes:
The control power (HI or LO) must be specified with all orders. If a feature is not required, a 0 must be placed in the order code. All order codes have 8 digits. The 369 is available in a non-drawout version only. 369-HI-R-0-0-0 369-LO-0-M-0-0 - 369 with HI voltage control power and 12 RTD inputs - 369 relay with LO voltage control power and metering option
Examples: Location:
GE Power Management 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 1.2.2 ACCESSORIES
369PC Program RRTD
Setup and monitoring software provided free with each relay. Remote RTD Module. Connects to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection. Allows remote metering and programming for up to 12 RTDs. Complete with connecting fibre optic cable. Converts communications between RS232 and RS485/fibre optic. Used to interface a computer to the relay. 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 (1A or 5A secondaries) Ground CTs (50:0.025) used for sensitive earth fault detection on high resistance grounded systems. Blocking and test module. Provides effective trip blocking and relay isolation. Metal carry case in which 369 is mounted. Remote faceplate cable, 15'.
F485 CT HGF 515 DEMO FPC15
1-2
1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING
1.2 ORDERING 1.2.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY
1
FIRMWARE REVISION 53CMA000.000 BOOT CODE REVISION 53BMA000.000 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES Alpha Test Code RELEASE DATE ?, 1998 1.2.4 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY
PC PROGRAM REVISION 000
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES Alpha Test Code
RELEASE DATE ?, 1998
1-3
1.2 ORDERING
1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1.2.5 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY
Figure 11: FRONT AND REAR VIEW
1-4
1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING
1.2 ORDERING 1.2.6 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION
1. The 369 order code at the time of leaving the factory. 2. The serial number of the 369. 3. The firmware that was installed in the 369 when it left the factory. Note that this may no longer be the current firmware in the relay as firmware may upgraded in the field. The current firmware revision may be checked in the Actual Values section of the 369. 4. Specifications for the output relay contacts. 5. Certifications the 369 conforms with or has been approved to. 6. Factory installed options. These are based on the order code. Note that the 369 may have had options upgraded in the field. The Actual Values section of the 369 may be checked to verify this. 7. Control power ratings for the 369 as ordered. Based on the HI/LO rating from the order code. 8. Pollution degree. 9. Overvoltage Category. 10. IP code. 11. Modification number for any factory ordered mods. Note that the 369 may have had modifications added in the field. The Actual Values section of the 369 may be checked to verify this. 12. Insulative voltage rating.
1-5
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS Motor protection and management shall be provided by a digital relay. Protective functions shall include: phase overload standard curves (51) overload by custom programmable curve (51) I2t modeling (49) current unbalance / single phase detection (46) starts per hour and time between starts short circuit (50) ground fault (50G/50N 51G/51N) mechanical jam / stall
2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
Management functions shall include: statistical data pre-trip data (last 40 events) ability to learn, display and integrate critical parameters to maximize motor protection a keypad with 40 character display flash memory
Optional functions shall include: under / overvoltage (27/59) phase reversal (47) underpower (37) power factor (55) stator / bearing overtemperature with 12 independent RTD inputs (49/38) backspin detection
The relay shall be capable of displaying important metering functions, including phase voltages, kilowatts, kilovars, power factor, frequency and MWhr. In addition, undervoltage and low power factor alarm and trip levels shall be field programmable. The communications interface shall include one front RS232 port and three independent rear RS485 ports with supporting PC software, thus allowing easy setpoint programming, local retrieval of information and flexibility in communication with SCADA and engineering workstations.
2-1
2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1.2 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
BACKUP 52 50 50G OPTIONAL METERING (M) BUS V V 27 47 59

METERING V, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz
55
4 ISOLATED ANALOG OUTPUTS
BREAKER OR FUSED CONTACTOR
TRIP
AUXILIARY RELAY
74 52b 3 AMBIENT AIR 50 51 37 66 46

CONTROL ALARM RELAY
METERING A, Celsius
OPTION ( B ) BACKSPIN DETECTION
START
BLOCK START
51G 50G 14 SPEED DEVICE INPUTS

LOAD
14
86
RTDs
MOTOR

87
Comm. to RTD module
SERVICE
87
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY CONTACTS
RS232 RS485 RS485 RS485
BEARING STATOR AMBIENT
OPTIONAL RTD ( R ) 12 RTD INPUTS
49
38
(Fiber Optic) (Option F)
REMOTE RTD MODULE (12 RTD INPUTS)
STATOR BEARING AMBIENT 840701A9.CDR
Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2-2
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 FEATURES
2.2 FEATURES 2.2.1 PROTECTION FEATURES
ANSI/IEEE Device 14 27 37 38 46 47 49 50 50G 51G 51 55 59 66 74 81 86 87
Protection Feature Speed Switch Undervoltage Undercurrent / Underpower Bearing RTD Current Unbalance Voltage Phase Reversal Stator RTD Short Circuit & Backup Instantaneous Ground Overcurrent & Backup Timed Ground Overcurrent Overload Power Factor Overvoltage Starts per Hour/Time Between Starts Alarm Over/Under Frequency Lockout Differential Switch General Switch Reactive Power Thermal Capacity Start Inhibit (thermal capacity available) Restart Block (Backspin Timer) Mechanical Jam Acceleration Timer Ambient RTD Short/Low temp RTD Broken/Open RTD Loss of RRTD Communications Trip Counter Self Test/Service Backspin Detection Current Demand kW Demand kvar Demand kVA Demand Starter Failure Reverse Power
Option
Trip
Alarm
Block Start
M /M R or RRTD M R or RRTD
M M
M M R or RRTD R or RRTD R or RRTD RRTD B M M M M
2-3
2.2 FEATURES
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.2 METERED QUANTITIES
Metered Quantity Phase Currents and Current Demand Motor Load
Units Amps xFLA % Amps Open / Closed (De) Energized C or F Hz Volts Hz lead / lag Watts Vars VA kWhrs +/- kvarhrs
Option
Unbalance Current Ground Current Input Switch Status Relay Output Status RTD Temperature Backspin Frequency Phase/Line Voltages Frequency Power Factor Real Power and Real Power Demand Reactive Power and Reactive Power Demand Apparent Power and Apparent Power Demand Real Power Consumption Reactive Power Consumption/Generation
R B M M M M M M M M 2.2.3 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Feature Modbus RTU Communications Protocol Profibus DP rear communication port User Definable Baud Rate (1200-19200) Flash Memory for easy firmware updates Front RS232 communication port Rear RS485 communication port Rear fiber optic port RTD type is user definable 4 User Definable Analog Outputs (0-1, 0-20, 4-20 mA) Windows based PC program for setting up and monitoring
Option P
F R or RRTD M
2-4
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSpecifications are subject to change without notice. 2.3.1 INPUTS CONTROL POWER Type: LO: GROUND CURRENT INPUT (GF CT) CT Input (rated): 1A/5A secondary and 50:0.025 CT Primary: 1-5000A (1A/5A) Range: 0.1 to 1.0 x CT primary (1A/5A) 0.05 to 16.0A (50:0.025) Full Scale: 1.0 x CT primary (1A/5A) 16A (50:0.025) Frequency: 20-300Hz Conversion: True RMS 1.04ms/sample 1.0% of full scale (1A/5A) Accuracy: 0.07A @ < 1A (50:0.025) 0.20A @ < 16A (50:0.025) GROUND CT BURDEN GROUND INPUT BURDEN CT (A) VA () 1 0.04 0.036 1A 5 0.78 0.031 20 6.79 0.017 5 0.07 0.003 5A 25 1.72 0.003 100 25 0.003 0.025 0.24 384 0.1 2.61 261 50:0.025 0.5 37.5 150 GROUND CT CURRENT WITHSTAND GROUND CT 1A 5A 50:0.025 WITHSTAND TIME 1s 100xCT 100xCT 10A 2s 40xCT 40xCT 5A Continuous 3xCT 3xCT 150mA
DC:20-60VDC AC: 20-48VAC 50/60Hz
HI:
DC:90-300VDC AC:70-265VAC 50/60Hz
Power: Holdup:
nominal: maximum: non-failsafe trip: failsafe trip:
20VA 65VA 200ms 100ms
PHASE CURRENT INPUTS (CT) CT Input (rated): 1A and 5A secondary CT Primary: Range: Full Scale: Frequency: Conversion: Accuracy: 1-5000A 0.05 to 20 x CT primary Amps 20 x CT primary Amps or 65535 Amps maximum 20-300Hz True RMS 1.04ms/sample @ 2 x CT 0.5% of 2 x CT @ >2 x CT 1% of 20 x CT PHASE CT BURDEN PHASE CT INPUT (A) 1 1A 5 20 5 5A 25 100 BURDEN VA 0.03 0.64 11.7 0.07 1.71 31 () 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.003 0.003 0.003
PHASE CT CURRENT WITHSTAND PHASE CT 1A 5A WITHSTAND TIME 1s 100xCT 100xCT 2s 40xCT 40xCT continuous 3xCT 3xCT
DIGITAL / SWITCH INPUTS Inputs: 6 optically isolated Input type: Dry Contact (<800) Function: Programmable
PHASE/LINE VOLTAGE INPUT(VT) (Option M) VT ratio: 1.00-240.00:1 in steps of 0.01 VT Secondary: 240VAC (full scale) Range: 0.05-1.00 x full scale Frequency: 20-120Hz Conversion: True RMS 1.04ms/sample 1.0% of full scale Accuracy: Burden: >200k Max. Continuous: 280VAC
2-5
2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RTD INPUTS (Option R) Wire Type: 3 wire Sensor Type: 100 platinum (DIN 43760) 100 nickel,120 nickel,10 copper RTD Sensing Current:3mA Range: -40 to 200 C or -40 to 392 F Accuracy: 2 C or 4 F
Lead Resistance: Isolation:
25 max. for Pt and Ni type 3 max. for Cu type 36Vpk
BSD INPUTS (Option B) Frequency: 2 - 120 Hz Dynamic BSD Range:2mV - 575V RMS Accuracy: 0.02 Hz 2.3.2 OUTPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUTS (Option M) Programmable Output Max Load Max Output

Accuracy: Isolation:
OUTPUT RELAYS 4-20mA 600 20.2mA

Rated load Carry current Max switching capacity Max switching V Max switching I Operate time Contact material 2000VA 240W 380VAC 8A <10ms (5ms typical) silver alloy Resistive load (pf = 1) 8A @ 250VAC 8A @ 30VDC Inductive load (pf = 0.4)(L/R - 7ms) 3.5A @ 250VAC 3.5A @ 30VDC 8A 875VA 170W 125VDC
0-1 mA 2400 1.01mA
0-20mA 600 20.2mA
1% of full scale 50V isolated active source
2.3.3 METERING POWER METERING (Option M)

Parameter kW kvar kVA kWh kvarh Power Factor Frequency kW Demand kvar Demand kVA Demand Amp Demand Accuracy Resolution (full scale) 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 1% 0.02 Hz 2% 2% 2% 2% 1 kW 1 kvar 1 kVA 0.001 MWh 0.001 Mvarh 0.01 0.01 Hz 1 kW 1 kvar 1 kVA 1A Range 0 50000 32000 0 50000 0-999,999.999 999,999.999 0.00 - 1.00 20.00 - 300.00 0-50000 32000 0-50000 0-65535
EVENT RECORD
Capacity: Triggers: last 40 events trip, inhibit, power fail, alarms, self test
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
Length: Trigger Position: Trigger: 1 of 64 cycles to 16 of 7 cycles 1-100% pre-trip to post-trip trip, manually via communications or digital input
2.3.4 COMMUNICATIONS FRONT PORT

Type: Baud Rate: Protocol: Non-Isolated RS232 1200 to 19200 Modbus RTU
FIBER OPTIC PORT (Option F)

Optional Use: Baud Rate: Proticol Type: Baud Rate: Protocol: RTD remote module hookup 1200 to 19200 Modbus RTU RS232 1200 baud to 12 Mbaud Profibus DP
PROFIBUS PORT (Option P)
BACK PORTS (3) Type: RS485 Baud Rate: 1200 to 19200 Protocol: Modbus RTU 36V Isolation (together)
2-6
2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.3.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
51 OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL
Curve Shape: Curve Biasing: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Backup Delay: Timing Accuracy: 1-15 standard, custom unbalance, temperature, hot/cold ratio, cool time constants 1.01-1.25 x FLA as per phase current inputs 96-98% of pickup 100ms or 2% of total trip time 1-100% TC in steps of 1 2% 96-98% of pickup 100ms 1.01-1.50 x FLA in steps of 0.01 as per phase current inputs 96-98% of pickup 0.1-60.0s in steps of 0.1 100ms or 2% of total trip time 2.0-20.0 x CT in steps of 0.1 as per phase current inputs 96-98% of pickup 0-255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.10-255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s +50ms for delays < 50ms 100ms or 0.5% of total trip time
46 UNBALANCE
Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Backup Delay: Timing Accuracy: 4-30% in steps of 1 2% 1-2% below pickup 1-255 s in steps of 1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 500ms or 0.5% of total time 0.10-1.00 x CT for 1A/5A CT 0.25-25.00 A for 50:0.025 CT as per ground current inputs 96-98% of pickup 0-255.00 s in steps of 0.01s 0.01-255.00 s in steps of 0.01s +50ms for delays < 50ms 100ms or 0.5% of total trip time
50G/51G 50N/51N GROUND FAULT
THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM
OVERLOAD ALARM
ACCELERATION TRIP
Pickup Level: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Pickup Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: motor start condition motor run, trip or stop condition 1.0-250.0 s in steps of 0.1 100ms or 0.5% of total time 1-200 C or 34-392 F 2 C or 4 F 96-98% of pickup <5 s detection of an open RTD >1000 96-98% of pickup <5 s <-40 C or -40 F 2 C or 4 F 96-98% of pickup <5 s no communication 2-5 s seperate level for start conditions +75ms for delays < 50ms 100ms or 0.5% of total trip time 1.01-1.25 x rated in steps of 0.01
50 SHORT CIRCUIT
38/49 RTD and RRTD PROTECTION
OPEN RTD ALARM
MECHANICAL JAM
Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: 1.01-6.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 as per phase current inputs 96-98% of pickup 0.5-125.0 s in steps of 0.5 250ms or 0.5% of total trip time 0.10-0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01 as per phase current inputs 102-104% of pickup 1-255 s in steps of 1 0-15000 s in steps of 1 500ms or 0.5% of total time 0.50-0.99 x rated in steps of 0.01 as per phase voltage inputs 102-104% of pickup 0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
37 UNDERCURRENT
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
27 UNDERVOLTAGE
59 OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup Level:
2-7

Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: as per phase voltage inputs 96-98% of pickup 0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 100ms or 0.5% of total trip time phase reversal detected 500-700ms 20.00-70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 0.02 Hz 0.05 Hz 0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 100ms or 0.5% of total trip time 20.00-70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 0.02 Hz 0.05 Hz 0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 100ms or 0.5% of total trip time 0.99-0.05 in steps of 0.01 0.02 0.01 of pickup 0.1-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 300ms or 0.5% of total trip time 0.99-0.05 in steps of 0.01 0.02 0.01 of pickup 0.1-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 300ms or 0.5% of total trip time Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy:
96-98% of pickup 0.1-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 300ms or 0.5% of total trip time 1-25000 kW in steps of 1 2% 102-104% of pickup 0.1-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-15000 s in steps of 1 300ms or 0.5% of total trip time 1-25000 kW in steps of 1 2% 102-104% of pickup 0.2-30.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-50000 s in steps of 1 300ms or 0.5% of total trip time <200ms 0.5-100.0 s in steps of 0.5 200ms or 0.5% of total trip time 0.1-5000.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 200ms or 0.5% of total trip time on count equaling level <200 ms on count equaling level <200 ms
47 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL
37 UNDERPOWER
Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy:
Time Delay: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy:
81 UNDERFREQUENCY
REVERSE POWER
Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Time Delay: Time Delay: Timing Accuracy: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup: Time Delay:
81 OVERFREQUENCY
87 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH 14 SPEED SWITCH
55 LEAD POWER FACTOR
GENERAL SWITCH
DIGITAL COUNTER
55 LAG POWER FACTOR
TRIP COUNTER
Pickup: Time Delay:
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER

Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Start Delay: Timing Accuracy: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: 1-25000 in steps of 1 2% 96-98% of pickup 0.1-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 0-5000 s in steps of 1 300ms or 0.5% of total trip time 1-25000 kvar in steps of 1 2%
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
2-8
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION STARTER FAILURE

Pickup Level: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Timing Accuracy: Demand Period: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Demand Period: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: motor run condition when tripped motor stopped condition 10-1000 ms in steps of 10 100ms or 0.5% of total trip time 5-90 min in steps of 1 10-100000 A in steps of 1 as per phase current inputs 96-98% of pickup <2 min 5-90 min in steps of 1 1-50000 kW in steps of 1 2% 96-98% of pickup <2 min
2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS kvar DEMAND ALARM

Demand Period: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Demand Period: Pickup Level: Pickup Accuracy: Dropout Level: Time Delay: Min. Voltage: Pickup Level: Dropout Level: Level Accuracy: Time Delay: Timing Accuracy: 5-90 min in steps of 1 1-50000 kvar in steps of 1 2% 96-98% of pickup <2 min 5-90 min in steps of 1 1-50000 kVA in steps of 1 2% 96-98% of pickup <2 min 30-15000 mV 3-300 Hz in steps of 1 2-30 Hz in steps or 1 2 Hz 1-50000s in steps of 1 500ms or 0.5% of total trip time
CURRENT DEMAND ALARM
kVA DEMAND ALARM
kW DEMAND ALARM
BACKSPIN DETECTION
2.3.6 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

Operating Range: Storage Range: -40 C to +60 C -40 C to +80 C
VENTILATION
No special ventilation required as long as ambient temperature remains within specifications. Ventilation may be required in enclosures exposed to direct sunlight.
HUMIDITY
Up to 95% non condensing
OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II CLEANING

May be cleaned with a damp cloth.
DUST/MOISTURE
IP50
NOTE: Relay must be powered up at least once per year to prevent deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.
2.3.7 APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION

ISO: CSA: Designed and manufactured to an ISO9001 registered process. Pending UL: CE: Pending Pending
2.3.8 TYPE TEST STANDARDS SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITY:

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5kV/1MHz) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5kV/10ns) IEC EN61000-4-4, Level 4 IEC 255-6 CSA C22.2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE:
EN61000-4-2, Level 3 IEC 801-2
INSULATION RESISTANCE:
IEC255-5
SURGE IMMUNITY:
EN61000-4-5
IMPULSE TEST:
Per IEC 255-5 Section 8 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH: ANSI/IEEE C37.90
CURRENT WITHSTAND:
ANSI/IEEE C37.90 IEC 255-6
2-9
2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RFI:

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2, 35V/m EN61000-4-3 EN50082-2 @ 10V
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY WITH ACCURACY:

ANSI/IEEE C37.90 IEC 255-6 IEC 68-2-38 Part 2
CONDUCTED/RADIATED EMISSIONS:
EN 55011 (CISPR 11)
VIBRATION:
IEC 255-21-1 Class 2 IEC 255-21-2 Class 2
VOLTAGE DEVIATION:
EN61000-4-11
MAGNETIC FIELD IMMUNITY:

EN61000-4-8
2.3.9 PRODUCTION TESTS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH:

All high voltage inputs at 2kVac for 1 minute
CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONALITY:

100% hardware functionality tested 100% calibration of all metered quantities
BURN IN:
8 hours @ 60 C sampling plan
2-10
3 INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The 369 is contained in a compact plastic housing with the keypad, display, communication port and all indicators/targets on the front panel. The physical dimensions are given in Figure 31: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS. The 369 should be positioned so that the display and keypad are accessible. To mount the relay: a cutout is made, and mounting holes drilled as shown in Figure 31: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS. Mounting hardware consisting of bolts and washers are provided with the relay. Although the 369 is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference the relay should be mounted away from high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic fields.
Inc hes
(m m )
8.07" (2 05)
4.23" (1 07)
6.125" (1 55)
6.85" (174) 6.125" (156)
g
TRIP AL ARM AUX .1 BS D RRTD ME TERING CO M1 CO M2
MX M M O T C R T A IU C NA T A I G N 2 0 A 5 V C 1 0 A RS T E E I V S I 1 H 1 5 A 1 / P 2 V C / H 2 4 2 P 5 V 0 A C
M U L IL I N T
CE
O P T IO NS
MO D E : 3 69- H I - R M- F L 0 S E I A N o : M53 B 90 000 24 R L 9 F I MWA R E 53 A 00C 0 . 00 R : 7 0 I N U T P O WE R P : 90 - 300 V D C 70 - 265 V A C 57 8mA M A . X 50 / 0H z or D C 6 P O LLU T I N D E R E E I P C O D E X O G : 2 : O O V E V O LTA G E C A A O R Y 2 R T G : MO D :
12 R T D s: ME TE R I G N F I E R O P TI C P O R T B
I N U LA TI V E V O LTA G E 2 S : N/ A
11.67" (2 96)
AUX .2 SE RVICE
10.24" (2 60)
10.875" (276)
3 69
M O TO R M A N A GE M E N T R E L AY
CU T-O UT 10.875" (276)

0.218" (6) DIA. (4 PLACES)
8 40 70 3 B5 .D W G
MO UN TING SURFACE
U F R O N T V IEW
USIDE VIEW
6.65" (1 69) UR EAR VIEW
Figure 31: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
10.45" (265)
3-1
3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
Figure 32: SPLIT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
3-2
3 INSTALLATION 3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION Table 31: TERMINAL LIST TERMINAL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3.2.1 TERMINAL LIST Table 31: TERMINAL LIST (Continued) TERMINAL
47 48 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107
WIRING CONNECTION
RTD1 + RTD1 COM RTD1 RTD1 SHIELD RTD2 + RTD2 COM RTD2 RTD2 SHIELD RTD3 + RTD3 COM RTD3 RTD3 SHIELD RTD4 + RTD4 COM RTD4 RTD4 SHIELD RTD5 + RTD5 COM RTD5 RTD5 SHIELD RTD6 + RTD6 COM RTD6 RTD6 SHIELD RTD7 + RTD7 COM RTD7 RTD7 SHIELD RTD8 + RTD8 COM RTD8 RTD8 SHIELD RTD9 + RTD9 COM RTD9 RTD9 SHIELD RTD10 + RTD10 COM RTD10 RTD10 SHIELD RTD11 + RTD11 COM RTD11 RTD11 SHIELD RTD12 + RTD12 COM
WIRING CONNECTION
RTD12 RTD12 SHIELD SPARE SW SPARE SW COM DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COM SPEED SW SPEED SW COM ACCESS SW ACCESS SW COM EMERGENCY RESTART SW EMERGENCY RESTART SW COM EXTERNAL RESET SW EXTERNAL RESET SW COM COMM1 RS485 + COMM1 RS485 COMM1 SHIELD COMM2 RS485 + COMM2 RS485 COMM2 SHIELD COMM3 RS485 + COMM3 RS485 COMM3 SHIELD ANALOG OUT 1 ANALOG OUT 2 ANALOG OUT 3 ANALOG OUT 4 ANALOG COM ANALOG SHIELD BACKSPIN VOLTAGE BACKSPIN NEUTRAL PHASE A CURRENT 5A PHASE A CURRENT 1A PHASE A COM PHASE B CURRENT 5A PHASE B CURRENT 1A PHASE B COM PHASE C CURRENT 5A PHASE C CURRENT 1A PHASE C COM NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A NEUT/GND CURRENT 1A NEUT/GND CURRENT 5A NEUT/GND COM PHASE A VOLTAGE PHASE A NEUT PHASE B VOLTAGE
3-3
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION Table 31: TERMINAL LIST (Continued) TERMINAL

108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126
3 INSTALLATION
WIRING CONNECTION
PHASE B NEUT PHASE C VOLTAGE PHASE C NEUT TRIP NC TRIP COM TRIP NO ALARM NC ALARM COM ALARM NO AUX1 NC AUX1 COM AUX1 NO AUX2 NC AUX2 COM AUX2 NO POWER FILTER GROUND POWER LINE POWER NEUTRAL POWER SAFETY
3-4
3 INSTALLATION
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3.2.2 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
Table 32: 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
Table 32: 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST (Continued)
269
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 44 45 48 49 50
WIRING CONNECTION
RTD1 + RTD1 COM RTD1 RTD1 SHIELD RTD2 + RTD2 COM RTD2 RTD2 SHIELD RTD3 + RTD3 COM RTD3 RTD3 SHIELD RTD4 + RTD4 COM RTD4 RTD4 SHIELD RTD5 + RTD5 COM RTD5 RTD5 SHIELD RTD6 + RTD6 COM RTD6 RTD6 SHIELD RTD7 + RTD7 COM RTD7 RTD7 SHIELD RTD8 + RTD8 COM RTD8 RTD8 SHIELD RTD9 + RTD9 COM RTD9 RTD9 SHIELD RTD10 + RTD10 COM RTD10 RTD10 SHIELD SPARE SW SPARE SW COM DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COM SPEED SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 51 52 53 54 55
369
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 47 46 88 59 58 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 73 72 74 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 42 41 43
269
WIRING CONNECTION
SPEED SW COM ACCESS SW ACCESS SW COM EMERGENCY RESTART SW EMERGENCY RESTART SW COM EXTERNAL RESET SW EXTERNAL RESET SW COM COMM1 RS485 + COMM1 RS485 COMM1 SHIELD ANALOG OUT 1 ANALOG COM PHASE A CURRENT 1A PHASE A COM PHASE A CURRENT 5A PHASE B CURRENT 1A PHASE B COM PHASE B CURRENT 5A PHASE C CURRENT 1A PHASE C COM PHASE C CURRENT 5A NEUT/GND COM NEUT/GND CURRENT 5A NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A TRIP NC TRIP COM TRIP NO ALARM NC ALARM COM ALARM NO AUX1 NC AUX1 COM AUX1 NO AUX2 NC AUX2 COM AUX2 NO POWER FILTER GROUND POWER LINE POWER NEUTRAL Terminals not available on the 369 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 71 72 73 80 88 93 94 92 96 97 95 99
369
100 98 104 103 101 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125
84 85 86 87
MTM B+ MTM ASPARE2 SW SPARE SW COM
N/A N/A N/A N/A
3-5
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3 INSTALLATION 3.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
Table 33: MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
Table 33: MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST (Continued)
MTM
1 2 3 4 5 6
WIRING CONNECTION
POWER FILTER GROUND PHASE A VOLTAGE PHASE B VOLTAGE PHASE B VOLTAGE PHASE C VOLTAGE PHASE A COM PHASE A CURRENT 5A PHASE A CURRENT 1A PHASE B COM PHASE B CURRENT 5A PHASE B CURRENT 1A PHASE C COM PHASE C CURRENT 5A PHASE C CURRENT 1A COMM1 RS485 + COMM1 RS485 COMM1 SHIELD ANALOG OUT 1 ANALOG OUT1 COM
369
123 105 107 107 109 94 92 93 97 95 96 100 98 99 71 72 73 80 84
MTM
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 34 35
WIRING CONNECTION
ANALOG OUT 2 ANALOG OUT 2 COM ANALOG OUT 3 ANALOG OUT 3 COM ANALOG OUT 4 ANALOG OUT 4 COM ANALOG SHIELD ALARM NC ALARM COM ALARM NO SPARE SW SPARE SW COM POWER LINE POWER NEUTRAL Terminals not available on the 369 81 84 82 84 83 84 85
369
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
114 115 116 51 52 124 125
30 33
PULSE OUTPUT (P/O) SW.B
N/A N/A
3.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

Table 34: MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST Table 34: MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST (Continued)
MPM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
WIRING CONNECTION
PHASE A VOLTAGE PHASE B VOLTAGE PHASE C VOLTAGE PHASE NEUT POWER FILTER GROUND POWER SAFETY POWER NEUTRAL POWER LINE PHASE A CURRENT 5A PHASE A CURRENT 1A PHASE A COM PHASE B CURRENT 5A PHASE B CURRENT 1A PHASE B COM PHASE C CURRENT 5A PHASE C CURRENT 1A PHASE C COM
369
105 107 109 108 123 126 125 124 93 91 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
MPM
28 27 26 25 24 21 43 44 45 46 47 48
WIRING CONNECTION
ANALOG OUT 1 ANALOG OUT 2 ANALOG OUT 3 ANALOG OUT 4 ANALOG COM ANALOG SHIELD ALARM NC ALARM COM ALARM NO COMM1 SHIELD COMM1 RS485 COMM1 RS485 + Terminals not available on the 369 80 81 82 83 84 85
369
114 115 116 73 72 71
31 32 33
SWITHCH INPUT 1 SWITCH INPUT 2 SWITCH COM
N/A N/A N/A
3-6
3 INSTALLATION
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT
Figure 33: TERMINAL LAYOUT
3-7
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION 3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Figure 34: TYPICAL WIRING
3-8
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING
The 369 can be connected to cover a broad range of applications and thus wiring will vary dependent upon the users protection scheme. The information contained within this section will cover most of the typical interconnections to the 369. For explanation purposes in this section, the terminals have been logically grouped together. A typical wiring diagram for the 369 is shown in Figure 34: TYPICAL WIRING and the terminal arrangement has been detailed in Figure 33: TERMINAL LAYOUT. For further information on specific wiring applications not covered here, please refer to Chapter 8, Applications, or contact the factory for further information. 3.3.3 CONTROL POWER CAUTION: VERIFY THAT THE CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY IS WITHIN THE RANGE COVERED BY THE ORDERED 369 RELAYS CONTROL POWER. Table 35: 369 POWER SUPPLY RANGES 369 POWER SUPPLY HI LO AC RANGE 60-265 20-48 DC RANGE 60-300 20-60
The power supply built into the 369 is a switchmode supply. It can operate with either AC or DC voltage applied to it. Extensive filtering and transient protection has been incorporated into the 369 to ensure reliable operation in harsh industrial environments. Transient energy is removed from the relay and conducted to ground via the ground terminal. This terminal must be connected to the cubicle ground bus a 10AWG wire or a ground braid. Do not daisy chain grounds with other relays or devices. Each should have its own connection to the ground bus. The internal supply is protected via a 2A slo-blo fuse that is accessible for replacement. If it must be replaced ensure that it is replaced with a fuse of equal ratings and that the cause of failure has been determined and eliminated. 3.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS The 369 requires one CT for each of the three motor phase currents to be input into the relay. There are no internal ground connections for the CT inputs. Refer to the Applications chapter for a note on a 2 CT connection. The phase CTs should be chosen such that the FLA of the motor being protected is no less than 50% of the rated CT primary. Ideally to ensure maximum accuracy and resolution the CTs should be chosen such that the FLA is 100% of CT primary or slightly less. The maximum CT primary is 5000A. The 369 will measure 0.1 to 20x CT primary rated current. The CTs chosen must be capable of driving the 369 burden (see specifications) during normal and fault conditions to ensure correct operation. See the Applications chapter for a note on calculating total burden and CT rating. For the correct operation of many protective elements the phase sequence and CT polarity is critical. Ensure that the convention illustrated in the typical wiring diagram, Figure 34: TYPICAL WIRING, is followed.
3-9
3 INSTALLATION 3.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
The 369 has an isolating transformer with separate 1A, 5A and sensitive HGF (50:0.025) ground terminals. Only one ground terminal type can be used at a time. There are no internal ground connections on the ground current inputs. The maximum ground CT primary for the 1A/5A taps is 5000A. Alternatively the sensitive ground input, 50:0.025, can be used to detect ground current on high resistance grounded systems. The ground CT connection can either be a zero sequence (core balance) installation or a residual connection. Note that only 1A and 5A secondary CTs may be used for the residual connection. A typical residual connection is illustrated in Figure 3.5. The zero sequence connection is shown in the typical wiring diagram. The zero sequence connection is recommended. Unequal saturation of CTs, CT mismatch, size and location of motor, resistance of the power system, motor core saturation density, etc. may cause false readings in the residually connected ground fault circuit.
Figure 35: TYPICAL RESIDUAL CONNECTION
3-10
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT
The exact placement of a zero sequence CT, so that ground fault current will properly be detected, is shown in Figure 36: ZERO SEQUENCE CT. If the CT is placed over a shielded cable, capacitive coupling of phase current into the cable shield during motor starts may be detected as ground current unless the shield wire is also passed through the CT window. Twisted pair cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended.
Figure 36: ZERO SEQUENCE CT
3-11
3 INSTALLATION 3.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS
The 369 has three channels for AC voltage inputs each with an internal isolating transformer. There are no internal fuses or ground connections on these inputs. The maximum VT ratio is 240:1. These inputs are only enabled when the metering option (M) is ordered. The 369 accepts either open delta or wye connected VTs (see Figure 37: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION). The voltage channels are connected wye internally, which means that the jumper shown on the delta connection between the phase B input and the VT neutral terminals must be installed. Polarity and phase sequence for the VTs is critical for correct power and rotation measurement and should be verified before starting the motor. As long as the polarity markings on the primary and secondary windings of the VT are aligned, there is no phase shift. The markings can be aligned on either side of the VT.
VTs are typically mounted upstream of the motor breaker or contactor. On variable speed drives the VTs must be mounted on the output (motor) side of the drive along with the CTs for correct power readings. Typically a 1A fuse is used to protect the voltage inputs.
Figure 37: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION
3-12
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS
These voltage inputs are only enabled if the optional backspin detection (B) feature has been purchased for the relay. These inputs enable the 369 to detect whether the motor is spinning after the primary power has been removed (breaker or contactor opened). These inputs must be supplied by a separate VT mounted downstream (motor side) of the breaker or contactor. The correct wiring is as illustrated in Figure 38: BACKSPIN VOLTAGE WIRING.
Figure 38: BACKSPIN VOLTAGE WIRING
3-13
3 INSTALLATION 3.3.9 RTD INPUTS
The 369 can monitor up to 12 RTD inputs for Stator, Bearing, Ambient, or Other temperature applications. The type of each RTD is field programmable as: 100 Platinum (DIN.43760), 100 Nickel, 120 Nickel, or 10 Copper. RTDs must be the three wire type. There are no provisions for the connection of thermistors. The 369 RTD circuitry compensates for lead resistance, provided that each of the three leads is the same length. Lead resistance should not exceed 25 per lead for platinum and nickel type RTDs or 3 per lead for Copper type RTDs. Shielded cable should be used to prevent noise pickup in industrial environments. RTD cables should be kept close to grounded metal casings and avoid areas of high electromagnetic or radio interference. RTD leads should not be run adjacent to or in the same conduit as high current carrying wires.
The shield connection terminal of the RTD is grounded in the 369 and should not be connected to ground at the motor or anywhere else to prevent noise pickup from circulating currents. If 10 Copper RTDs are used special care should be taken to keep the lead resistance as low as possible to maintain accurate readings.
369 RELAY
SAFETY GROUND
RTD SENSING
MOTOR STARTER
12 4 1 2 3
3 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE
MOTOR
Route cable in separate conduit from current carrying conductors
RTD TERMINALS AT MOTOR RTD IN MOTOR STATOR OR BEARING
Shield
RTD #1
Shield
Hot Compensation Com Return
RTD TERMINALS IN MOTOR STARTER
Maximum total lead resistance 25 ohms (Platinum & Nickel RTDs) 3 ohms (Copper RTDs)
840717A1.CDR
Figure 39: RTD INPUTS 3.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS
CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT LIVE CIRCUITS TO THE 369 DIGITAL INPUTS. THEY ARE DESIGNED FOR DRY CONTACT CONNECTIONS ONLY. Other than the ACCESS switch input the other 5 digital inputs are programmable. These programmable digital inputs have default settings to match the functions of the 269Plus switch inputs (differential, speed, emergency restart, remote reset and spare). However in addition to their default settings they can also be programmed for use as generic inputs to set up trips and alarms or for monitoring purposes based on external contact inputs. A twisted pair of wires should be used for digital input connections.
3-14
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS
The 369 provides 4 analog current output channels with the metering option (M). These outputs are field programmable to a full-scale range of either 0-1 mA (into a maximum 10 k impedance) and 4-20 or 0-20mA (into a maximum 600 impedance). As shown in the typical wiring diagram (Figure 34: TYPICAL WIRING), these outputs share one common return. Polarity of these outputs must be observed for proper operation. Shielded cable should be used for connections, with only one end of the shield grounded, to minimize noise effects. The analog output circuitry is isolated. Transorbs limit this isolation to 36 volts with respect to the 369 safety ground. If an analog voltage output is required, a burden resistor must be connected at the input of the SCADA or measuring device. See Figure 310: ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION. Ignoring the input impedance of the input, RLOAD = VFULL SCALE / IMAX. For 0-1 mA, for example, if 5 V full scale is required to correspond to 1 mA, RLOAD = 5 / 0.001 = 5000 ohms. For 4-20 mA, this resistor would be RLOAD = 5 V / 0.020 = 250 ohms.
Figure 310: ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION 3.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY The 369 display can be seperated and mounted remotely up to 15 away from the main relay. No seperate source of control power is required for the display module. A 15 standard shielded network cable is used to make the connection between the display module and the main relay. A recommended and tested cable is available from GE Multilin. The cable should be wired as far away as possible from high current or voltage carrying cables or other sources of electrical noise. In addition the display module must be grounded if mounted remotely. A ground screw is provided on the back of the display module to facilitate this. A 12AWG wire is recommended and should be connected to the same ground bus as the main relay unit. The 369 relay will still function and protect the motor without the display connected.
3-15
3 INSTALLATION 3.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS
The 369 provides four form C output relays. They have been labeled Trip, Aux 1, Aux 2 and Alarm. Each relay has normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts and can switch up to 8 amps at either 250 VAC or 30 VDC with a resistive load. The NO or NC state is determined by the no power state of the relay outputs. All four output relays may be programmed for fail-safe or non-fail-safe operation. When in fail-safe mode, output relay activation or a loss of control power will cause the contacts to go to their power down state. For example: A fail-safe NO contact will close when the 369 is powered up (if no prior unreset trip conditions) and will open when activated (tripped) or when the 369 loses control power.
A non-fail-safe NO contact will remain open when the 369 is powered up (unless a prior unreset trip condition) and will close only when activated (tripped). If control power is lost while the output relay is activated (NO contacts closed) the NO contacts will open. Thus, in order to cause a trip on loss of control power to the 369, the Trip relay should be programmed as failsafe. See Figure 311: HOOKUP / FAIL & NON-FAILSAFE MODES, for typical wiring of contactors and breakers for fail-safe and non-fail-safe operation. Output relays will remain latched after activation if the fault condition persists or the protection element has been programmed as latched. This means that once this relay has been activated it will remain in the active state until the 369 is manually reset. The Trip relay cannot be reset if a timed lockout is in effect. Lockout time will be adhered to regardless of whether control power is present or not. The relay contacts may be reset if motor conditions allow, by pressing the RESET key, using the REMOTE RESET switch or via communications. The Emergency Restart feature overrides all features to reset the 369. NOTE: The rear of the 369 relay shows output relay contacts in their power down state. In locations where system voltage disturbances can cause voltage levels to dip below the control power range listed in specifications, any relay contact programmed as fail-safe may change state. Therefore, in any application where the process is more critical than the motor, it is recommended that the trip relay contacts be programmed as non-fail-safe. WARNING If, however, the motor is more critical than the process then the trip contacts should be programmed as fail-safe.
3-16
3 INSTALLATION
Figure 311: HOOKUP / FAIL & NON-FAILSAFE MODES 3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS Three independent two-wire RS485 ports are provided. If option (F), the fiber optic port, is installed and used the Comm 3, RS485 port, may not be used. The RS485 ports are isolated as a group. Up to 32 369's (or other devices) can be daisy-chained together on a single serial communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeaters may also be used to increase the number of relays on a single channel to a maximum of 254. Note that there may only be one master device per serial communication link. Connections should be made using shielded twisted pair cables (typically 24AWG). Suitable cables should have a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (e.g. Belden #9841) and total wire length should not exceed 4000 ft. Commercially available repeaters can be used to extend transmission distances. Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. Internally, an isolated power supply with an opto-coupled data interface is used to prevent noise coupling. The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices installed, either internally or externally, to ensure maximum reliability.
CAUTION: To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded in one location only, at the master. Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed communications.
3-17
3 INSTALLATION
Correct polarity is also essential. 369's must be wired with all + terminals connected together, and all terminals connected together. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configurations. The last device at each end of the daisy chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm 1/4 watt resistor in series with a 1nF capacitor across the + and terminals. Observing these guidelines will result in a reliable communication system that is immune to system transients.
Figure 312: RS485 WIRING
3-18
3 INSTALLATION 3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION
3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION 3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The optional remote RTD module has been designed such that it can be mounted near the motor. This eliminates the need for multiple RTD cables to be run back from the motor which may be in a remote location to the switchgear. Although the module is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference it should be mounted away from high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic fields. The remote RTD module physical dimensions and mounting (drill diagram) are shown in Figure 313: RTD DIMENSIONS. Mounting hardware (bolts and washers) and instructions are provided with the module.
Figure 313: RTD DIMENSIONS
3-19
3 INSTALLATION 3.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
STATOR WINDING 1
Com shld. Com shld. Com shld. Com shld.
RTD2
CONTROL POWER
STATOR WINDING 2
STATOR WINDING 3
STATOR WINDING 4
3
STATOR WINDING 5 STATOR WINDING 6
MOTOR BEARING 1
MOTOR BEARING 2
PUMP BEARING 1
PUMP BEARING 2
PUMP CASE
AMBIENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Com shld.
RTD1
GROUND BUS
FILTER GROUND LINE + NEUTRAL SAFTY GROUND 123 124 125 126
HI 90 - 300VDC 70 - 265V:50/60Hz L N
RTD3
RTD4
g
WITH RTD OPTION (R)
Remote RTD Module
RTD5
Com shld. Com shld. Com shld. Com shld. Com shld. Com shld. Com shld.
RTD6
RTD7
RTD8
RTD9
RTD10
RTD11
CHANNEL 1 RS485
SHLD
CHANNEL 2 RS485
SHLD
CHANNEL 3 RS485
WITH OPTION (F)
369 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY
g
Tx
FIBER
Rx
FIBER
Rx
RTD12
SHLD Tx
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
840711A5.CDR
SCADA
Figure 314: REMOTE RTD MODULE
3-20
3 INSTALLATION
Figure 315: REMOTE RTD MODULE REAR VIEW
3-21
3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION 3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION
Figure 316: PHASE CT INSTALLATION
3-22
3 INSTALLATION
3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3.5.2 5 Amp GROUND CT INSTALLATION
Figure 317: 5A GROUND CT INSTALLATION
3-23
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION 3.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION
a) 3 and 5 WINDOW
Figure 318: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION - 3" AND 5" WINDOW
3-24
3 INSTALLATION b) 8 WINDOW
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
Figure 319: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION - 8" WINDOW
3-25
4 USER INTERFACES 4 USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.1.1 FACEPLATE
Figure 41: 369 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY FACEPLATE There are two possible ways to interface with the 369 Motor Management Relay. The user may access the relay locally through the keypad and display on the relay faceplate, or remotely through a PC that is linked to the relay via RS232, RS485 or Fibre Optic link (optional). 4.1.2 DISPLAY
Figure 42: EXAMPLE 369 DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 40 character LCD display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions and from various viewing angles. Messages are displayed in plain English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user defined status messages. Any trip, alarm, or start inhibit will automatically override the default messages and appear on the display. Contrast Adjustment and Lamp Test: Press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds to initiate lamp test. The contrast can also be adjusted now as required. Use the [VALUE] up and down keys to adjust the contrast. Press the [ENTER] key to save the adjustment when completed.
4-1
4 USER INTERFACES 4.1.3 LED INDICATORS
TRIP ALARM AUX 1 AUX 2 SERVICE

There are ten LED indicators, as follows: LED INDICATORS TRIP ALARM AUX 1 AUX 2 SERVICE BSD RRTD METERING COM 1 COM 2
BSD RRTD METERING COM 1 COM 2
Figure 43: 369 LED INDICATORS
Trip relay has operated (energized) Alarm relay has operated (energized) Auxiliary relay has operated (energized) Auxiliary relay has operated (energized) Relay in need of technical service. Relay has detected a backspin condition on a stopped motor RRTD module communication indication 369 has option M or B installed Channel 1 RS485 communication indication Channel 2 RS485 communication indication 4.1.4 RS232 PROGRAM PORT
This port is intended for connection to a portable PC. Setpoint files may be created at any location and downloaded through this port using the 369PC program. Local interrogation of Setpoints and Actual Values is also possible. New firmware may be downloaded to the 369 flash memory through this port. Upgrading of the relay firmware does not require a hardware EPROM change.
Figure 44: RS232 PROGRAM PORT
4-2
4 USER INTERFACES
4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.1.5 KEYPAD
ACTUAL VALUES
SET POINTS
HELP
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
The 369 messages are organized into pages under the main headings, Setpoints and Actual Values. The [SETPOINTS] key is used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. The [ACTUAL VALUES] key is used to navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters. Each page is broken down further into logical subgroups of messages. The [PAGE] up and down keys may be used to navigate through the subgroups. [SETPOINTS]: This key may be used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. Alternately, one can press this key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
RESET
CLEAR
ENTER
Keypad1.cdr
P/O 840707B2.CDR
Figure 45: 369 KEYPAD [ACTUAL VALUES]: This key is used to navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters. Alternately, one can scroll through the pages by pressing the Actual Values key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys. [PAGE]: The Page Up/ Page Down keys may be used to scroll through page headers for both Setpoints and Actual Values. [LINE]: Once the required page is found, the Line Up/ Line Down keys may be used to scroll through the subheadings. [VALUE]: The Value Up and Value Down keys are used to scroll through variables in the Setpoint programming mode. It will increment and decrement numerical Setpoint values. [RESET]: The reset key may be used to reset a trip or latched alarm, provided it has been activated by selecting the local reset. [ENTER] The key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the subgroups or store altered setpoint values. [CLEAR] The key is also dual purpose. It may be used to exit the subgroups or to return an altered setpoint to its original value before it has been stored. [HELP]: The help key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages; such as the Setpoint range, etc. To enter setpoints, select the desired page header. Then press the [LINE UP] / [ LINE DOWN] keys to scroll through the page and find the desired subgroup. Once the desired subgroup is found, press the [VALUE UP] / [VALUE DOWN] keys to adjust the setpoints. Press the [ENTER] key to save the setpoint or the [CLEAR] key to revert back to the old setpoint.
4-3
4 USER INTERFACES 4.1.6 SETPOINT ENTRY
In order to store any setpoints, terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) must be shorted. (A key switch may be used for security). There is also a Setpoint Passcode feature that may be enabled to restrict access to setpoints. The passcode must be entered to allow the changing of setpoint values. A passcode of 0 effectively turns off the passcode feature and only the access jumper is required for changing setpoints. If no key is pressed for 30 minutes, access to setpoint values will be restricted until the passcode is entered again. To prevent setpoint access before the 30 minutes expires, the unit may be turned off and back on, the access jumper may be removed, or the SETPOINT ACCESS: Permitted setpoint may be changed to Restricted. The passcode cannot be entered until terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) are shorted. Setpoint changes take effect immediately, even when motor is running. It is not recommended, however, to change setpoints while the motor is running as any mistake could cause a nuisance trip. Refer to section SETPOINT ACCESS for a more detailed description of the setpoint access procedure.
4-4
4 USER INTERFACES 4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.1 INTRODUCTION
This document provides all the necessary information to install and/or upgrade a previous installation of the 369PC Program, upgrade the relay firmware, and write/edit setpoint files. The following sections are included in this document: System requirements 369PC program version for previous installation check 369PC program installation/upgrade procedure 369PC program system configuration Relay firmware upgrade procedure Creating/Editing/Upgrading/Downloading Setpoint Files Printing Setpoints and Actual Values Using Trending and Waveform Capture Viewing Phasors and Event Record Troubleshooting 4.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPGRADE The following minimum requirements must be met for the 369PC Program to properly operate on a computer. Processor: Memory: Hard Drive: O/S: Minimum 486, Pentium recommended. Minimum 4 Mb, 16 Mb recommended. Minimum 540 K of conventional memory. 20 Mb free space required before installation of PC program. Minimum Windows 3.1 or Windows 3.11 for Workgroup, Windows NT or Windows 95 (recommended). Windows 3.1 Users must ensure that SHARE.EXE is installed.
If a version of the 369PC Program is currently installed, note the path and directory name as this information will be needed when upgrading. HOW TO CHECK IF A CURRENTLY INSTALLED VERSION OF 369PC PROGRAM NEEDS UPGRADING: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run 369PC program. Select Help. Select About 369PC. Compare version number located here with one on installation disks. If number here is lower, program needs upgrading.
Figure 46: 369PC PROGRAM HELP
4-5
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES
Figure 47: CHECKING PROGRAM VERSION
INSTALLING/UPGRADING THE 369PC PROGRAM: Installation of the 369PC Program is Accomplished as follows:
1. Start the Windows program 2. Insert the GEw Multilin Products CD into the appropriate drive
3. Select Install PS Software 4. Select 369PC 5. Follow the onscreen instructions
4-6
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.3 CONFIGURATION 1. Connect the computer running the 369PC program to the relay via one of the RS485 ports or directly via the RS232 faceplate port. 2. Select 369PC under the GEPM group.
Once the 369PC program starts to operate, it will not automatically communicate with the relay unless that function is enabled (see startup mode below). The LED status and display message shown will match actual relay state if communications is established. 3. To setup communications, select Computer from the Communication menu.
4. Set Slave Address to match that programmed into relay. 5. Set Communication Port# to the computer port connected to the relay. 6. Set Baud Rate and Parity to match that programmed into relay. 7. Set Control Type to type used. 8. Set Startup Mode to the desired startup (communicate or file) 9. Select ON to enable communications with new settings.
4-7
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES 4.2.4 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE 1. To upgrade the relay firmware, connect a computer to the 369 via the front RS232 port. Then run the 369PC program and establish communications with the relay. 2. Select Upgrade Firmware from the Communication menu.
3. Select Yes to proceed or No to abort.
Remember, all previously programmed setpoints will be erased.
4. Locate the firmware file to load into the relay. 5. Select OK to proceed or Cancel to abort.
6. Select Yes to proceed, No to load a different file, or Cancel to abort the process.
7. The program will automatically put the relay into upload mode and then begin loading the file selected. When loading is complete, the relay will not be in service and will require programming.
4-8
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 8. To communicate with the relay via the RS485 ports, Slave Address, Baud Rate and Parity may have to be manually programmed.
4-9
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES 4.2.5 CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE 1. To create a new Setpoint file, run the 369PC Program. It is not necessary to have a 369 Relay connected to the computer. The 369PC status bar will indicate that the program is in Polling Relay mode and Not Communicating. 2. Select Setpoints from the menu and choose the appropriate section of setpoints to program, e.g. System Setup / Output Relay Setup and enter the new setpoints. When you are finished programming a page, select OK and store the information to the computers scratchpad memory (note: this action does store the information as a file on a disk). 3. Repeat step 2. until all the desired setpoints are programmed.
4. Select File, Save As to store this file to disk. Enter the location and file name of the setpoint file with a file extension of .369 and select OK. The file is now saved to disk. See section DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369.
4-10
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.6 EDITING A SETPOINT FILE 1. To create a new Setpoint file, run the 369PC Program. It is not necessary to have a 369 Relay connected to the computer. The 369PC status bar will indicate that the program is in Polling Relay mode and Not Communicating. 2. If the 369PC program is communicating, select Communication, Computer from the menu, and select Communicate: Off and OK to turn off computer communications with the relay and place the PC program in Editing File mode.
3. Select Setpoints from the menu and choose the appropriate section of setpoints to program, e.g. System Setup / Output Relay Setup and enter the new setpoints. When you are finished programming a page, select OK and store the information to the computers scratchpad memory (note: this action does store the information as a file on a disk). 4. Repeat step 3. until all the desired setpoints are programmed.
5. Select File, Save As to store this file to disk. Enter the location and file name of the setpoint file with a file extension of .369. The file is now saved to disk. See section DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369.
4-11
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES 4.2.7 DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 1. To download a preprogrammed setpoint file to the 369 Relay, run the 369PC program and establish communications with the connected relay via the faceplate RS232 port or through the RS485 connector. 2. Select File, Open from the menu on the 369PC program. 3. Locate the setpoint file to be loaded into the relay, and select OK. When the file is completely loaded from disk, the PC program will break communications with the connected relay and change the Status bar to say Editing File , Not Communicating.
4. Select File, Send Setpoint To Relay, to download the setpoint file to the connected relay.
When the file is completely downloaded, the status bar will revert back to Communicating. The relay now contains all the setpoints as programmed in the setpoint file.
NOTE: This message will appear when attempting to download a setpoint file with a revision number that does not match the revision of the relay firmware. See section UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION.
4-12
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.8 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION It may be necessary to upgrade the revision code for a previously saved Setpoint file when the firmware of the 369 Relay is upgraded. 1. To upgrade the revision of a previously saved Setpoint file, run the 369PC program and establish communications with the 369 through the front RS232 port or through the RS485 connector. 2. Select Actual, Product Information from the menu and record the Main Revision number of the relays firmware, e.g. 30D251A8.000, where 251 is the Main Revision identifier.
3. Select File, Open from the menu and enter the location and file name of the saved Setpoint File to be downloaded to the connected relay. When the file is open, the 369PC program will be in File Editing mode and Not Communicating.
4. Select File, Properties from the menu and note the version code of the setpoint file. If the Main Revision code of the Setpoint File (e.g. 23X) is different than the Main Revision code of the Firmware (as noted in step 2, as 251), use the pull-down tab to expose the available revision codes and select the one which matches the Firmware. e.g. Firmware revision: 53BMAXXX.000 current setpoint file revision: 23X
change Setpoint file revision to 25X 5. Select File, Save to save the Setpoint file to Disk. 6. See section DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369.
4-13
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES 4.2.9 PRINTING 1. To print the Relay Setpoints, run the 369PC program; it is not necessary to establish communications with a connected 369. 2. Select File, Open to open a previously saved Setpoint File or 3. Establish communications with a 369 connected to the computer to print the current Setpoints. 4. Select File, Print Setup and highlight one of the Setpoints bubbles. Select OK.
5. Select File, Print and OK to send the Setpoint file to the connected printer.
1. To print the Relay Actual Values, run the 369PC program and establish communications with a connected 369. 2. Select File, Page Setup and highlight the Actual Values bubble. 3. Under Print Setup, ensure that your specific printer is setup to Print True Types as Graphics. 4. Select OK to close this window.
5. Select File, Print and OK to send the Setpoint file to the connected printer.
4-14
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.10 TRENDING
Trending from the 369 can be accomplished via the 369PC program. Many different parameters can be trended and graphed at sampling periods ranging from 1 second up to 1 hour. The parameters which can be Trended by the 369PC program are: Currents/Voltages Phase Currents A,B,C Ground Current Power Power Factor Positive Watthours Temperature Hottest Stator RTD Other Thermal Capacity Used
Avg. Phase Current Motor Load Voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca Van, Vbn & Vcn
Current Unbalance
Real Power (kW) Positive Varhours
Reactive Power (kvar) Negative Varhours
Apparent Power (kVA)
RTDs 1 through 12
RRTDs 1 through 12
4
System Frequency 1. To use the Trending function, run the 369PC program and establish communications with a connected 369 relay. 2. Select Actual, Trending from the main menu to open the Trending window.
3. Press the Setup button to enter the Graph Attribute page. 4. Program the Graphs which are to be displayed by selecting the pull down menu beside each Graph Description. Change the Color, Style, Width, Group #, and Spline selection as desired. 5. Select the same Group # for all parameters to be scaled together. 6. Select Save to store these Graph Attributes, and OK to close this window. 7. Use the pulldown menu to select the Sample Rate, click the checkboxes of the Graphs to be displayed, and select RUN to begin the trending sampling. 8. Print will copy the window to the system printer. More information for navigating through Trending can be found under Help.
4-15
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES 9. The Trending File Setup button can be used to write the graph data to a file in a standard spreadsheet format. Ensure that the Write Trended Data to File box is checked, and that the Sample Rate is at a minimum of 5 seconds. Set the file capacity limit to the amount of memory available for trended data.
Figure 48: TRENDING VIEW
4-16
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.11 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
The 369PC program can be used to capture waveforms from the 369 Relay at the instant of a trip. Maximum of 64 cycles can be captured and the trigger point can be adjusted to anywhere within the set cycles. Maximum of 16 waveforms can be buffered (stored) with the buffer/cycle turned off. The waveforms captured are: Phase Currents A, B & C Ground Current Voltages AN, BN, CN if Wye connected or AB, BC, CA if open delta connected. 1. To use the Waveform Capture function, run the 369PC program and establish communications with a connected 369 Relay. 2. Select Actual, Waveform Capture from the main menu to open the Waveform Capture Window. What will appear is the waveform of Phase A current of the last trip of the 369. The date and time of this trip is displayed on the top of the window. The RED vertical line indicates the trigger point of the relay.
3. Press the Setup button to enter the Graph Attribute page. 4. Program the Graphs which are to be displayed by selecting the pull down menu beside each Graph Description. Change the Color, Style, Width, Group #, and Spline selection as desired. Select the same Group # for all parameters to be scaled together. 5. Select Save to store these Graph Attributes, and OK to close this window. 6. Click the checkboxes of the Graphs to be displayed, 7. The Save button can be used to store the current image on the screen, and Open can be used to recall a saved image. Print will copy the window to the system printer. More information for navigating through Waveform Capture can be found under Help.
4-17
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES
Figure 49: WAVEFORM CAPTURE VIEW
4-18
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.12 PHASORS
The 369PC program can be used to view the phasor diagram of three phase currents and voltages. The phasors are for: Phase Voltages A, B & C Phase Currents A, B & C 1. To use the Phasor Metering function, run the 369PC program and establish communications with a connected 369 Relay. 2. Select Actual, Metering Data from the main menu, then click on the Phasors tab on the Metering Data Window. The phasor diagram and the values of voltage phasors, and current phasors are displayed. 3. Note: Longer arrows are the voltage phasors, shorter arrows are the current phasors. Va and Ia are the references (i.e. zero degree phase). Lagging angle is clockwise. 4. More information for Phasors can be found under Help.
4-19
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES
Figure 410: PHASOR DATA VIEW
4-20
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.13 EVENT RECORDING
The 369PC program can be used to view the 369 Event Recorder. The Event Recorder stores motor and system information each time an event occurs (i.e. motor trip). The Event Recorder stores up to 40 events, where EVENT01 is the oldest event. EVENT01 is overwritten when the number of events exceeds 40.. 1. To use the Event Recording function, run the 369PC program and establish communications with a connected 369 Relay. 2. Select Actual, Event Recording from the main menu to open the Event Recording Window. The Event Recording Window displays the list of events with the most current event displayed on top.
3. Press the View Data button to view the details of selected events. The Event Record Selector at the top of the View Data Window allows the user to scroll through different events. 4. Select Save to store the details of the selected events to a file. 5. Select Print to send the events to the system printer, and OK to close the window. 6. More information for Event Recording can be found under Help.
4-21
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES
Figure 411: EVENT RECORDER VIEW
4-22
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.14 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section provides some procedures for troubleshooting the 369PC when troubles are encountered within the WindowsTM Environment, e.g. General Protection Fault (GPF), Missing Window, Problems in Opening/Saving Files, and Application Error. If the 369 program causes WindowsTM system errors: Make sure the PC computer program is installed and meets the minimum requirements. Make sure only one copy of the PC program is running at a given time - the PC program cannot multi-task.
4-23
5 SETPOINTS 5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
S1 SETPOINTS 369 SETUP
SETPOINT ACCESS DISPLAY PREFERENCES 369 COMMUNICATIONS REAL TIME CLOCK WAVEFORM CAPTURE MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD DEFAULT MESSAGES CLEAR\PRESET DATA
5
INSTALLED OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
S2 SETPOINTS SYSTEM SETUP
CT/VT SETUP MONITORING SETUP OUTPUT RELAY SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS
S3 SETPOINTS OVERLOAD PROTECTION
THERMAL MODEL OVERLOAD CURVES OVERLOAD ALARM
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETPOINTS
S4 SETPOINTS CURRENT ELEMENTS
SHORT CIRCUIT MECHANICAL JAM UNDERCURRENT CURRENT UNBALANCE GROUND FAULT
S5 SETPOINTS MOTOR START/INHIBITS
ACCELERATION TRIP START INHIBIT
BACKSPIN DETECTION
S6 SETPOINTS RTD TEMPERATURE
LOCAL RTD PROTECTION REMOTE RTD PROTECTION OPEN RTD ALARM SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
5-2
5 SETPOINTS S7 SETPOINTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS UNDERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL UNDERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY
5.1 OVERVIEW
S8 SETPOINTS POWER ELEMENTS
LEAD POWER FACTOR LAG POWER FACTOR POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER (kvar) NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER (kvar) UNDERPOWER REVERSE POWER
S9 SETPOINTS DIGITAL INPUTS
SPARE SWITCH EMERGENCY RESTART DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH SPEED SWITCH REMOTE RESET
S10 SETPOINTS ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
5-3
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETPOINTS
ANALOG OUTPUT 2 ANALOG OUTPUT 3 ANALOG OUTPUT 4
S11 SETPOINTS 369 TESTING
SIMULATION MODE PRE-FAULT SETUP FAULT SETUP FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS
5-4
5 SETPOINTS 5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5.2.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 1 MENU
S1 SETPOINTS 369 SETUP
SETPOINT ACCESS DISPLAY PREFERENCES 369 COMMUNICATIONS REAL TIME CLOCK WAVEFORM CAPTURE MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD DEFAULT MESSAGES CLEAR\PRESET DATA INSTALLED OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
These setpoints deal with the non-protective setup and operation of the 369.
5-5
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.2.2 SETPOINT ACCESS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
SETPOINT ACCESS
SETPOINT ACCESS
FRONT PANEL ACCESS: Read & Write COMM ACCESS Read & Write ENCRYPTED COMM PASSCODE: AIKFBAIK
Range: Read Only, Read & Write
Range: Read Only, Read & Write
Range: 8 Alphabetic characters
There are three levels of access security in the: Read Only, Read/Write and Factory Service. Read Only: Read/Write: Factory Service: Setpoints and Actual Values may be viewed but, not changed. Permits viewing of Actual Values as well as changing and storing of Setpoints For factory use only (enables a new Factory Service Menu)
Note: The access terminals (terminals 57 & 58) must be shorted to gain Read/Write access, regardless of the RESTRICT WRITE ACCESS setting. When a 369 is shipped from the factory, the access password is defaulted to 0. When the password is 0, the access level is Read/Write.
To restrict write access to the 369 enter Yes at the Restrict Write Access message. A non-zero password must be programmed if one has not been previously entered. The access level then becomes Read Only. The password must then be entered via the keypad (faceplate) or one of the communication ports to gain Read/Write access from that specific location. In order to gain Read/Write access when the access level is Read Only: Enter the correct access password. If the password is correctly entered, the access level will be changed from Read Only to Read/Write. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or if control power is cycled, access will automatically revert to Read Only. In addition access through the front keypad is also restricted via the Access digital input. Even if the access password is 0 the access level will be Read Only (keypad only) unless the Access input is shorted. To change access level security from Read Only back to Read/Write permanently: Enter the password as above and then enter Yes for Change Access Password. Enter the new password as 0. The access level will then be Read/Write permanently. Note: Access digital input still affects keypad access. If the access level is Read/Write, write access to setpoints is automatic and a 0 password need not be entered. If the programmed password is not known, consult the factory service department with the encrypted access password and they can decode it.
5-6
5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5.2.3 DISPLAY PREFERENCES
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
DEFAULT MESSAGE CYCLE TIME: 20 s DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 5-100 s in steps of 1
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT: Range: 0-255 Note: Display darkens as number is increased. 145 FLASH MESSAGE DURATION: 2s
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY: Range: Celsius, Fahrenheit Shown if option R installed or RRTD added Celsius Some of the message characteristics can be modified to suit different situations preferences setpoints. If no keys are pressed for a period of time longer than the default message timeout, then the 369 will automatically display a series of default messages. This time can be modified to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. Each default message will remain on the screen for the default message cycle time. The contrast of the LCD display can be changed here to alter the display to suit all lighting conditions. If the display is unreadable (dark or light) press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds. This will put the relay in manual contrast adjustment mode. Use the value up or down keys to adjust the contrast level. Press the [ENTER] key when complete. The display update interval controls how often the display is updated. If the displayed readings are bouncing, the time may be increased to smooth out the readings. Temperatures and RTD setpoints may be displayed and programmed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees.
5-7
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.2.4 369 COMMUNICATIONS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
369 COMMUNICATIONS
369 COMMUNICATIONS
SLAVE ADDRESS: 254 COMPUTER RS232 BAUD RATE: 19200 COMPUTER RS232 PARITY: None CHANNEL 1 RS485 BAUD RATE: 19200 CHANNEL 1 RS485 PARITY: None CHANNEL 2: RS485 BAUD RATE: 19200 CHANNEL 2: RS485 PARITY: None
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
Range: None, Odd, Even
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
CHANNEL 3 CONNECTION: RS485 CHANNEL 3 RS485 BAUD RATE: 19200 CHANNEL 3 RS485 PARITY: None
Range: RS485, Fiber
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
The 369 is equipped with four independent serial ports. The RS232 on the faceplate is intended for local use and will respond regardless of the slave address programmed. The rear RS485 communication ports are addressed. Option F, a fiber optic port, may be ordered for channel 3. If the channel 3 fiber optic port is used, the channel 3 RS485 connection is disabled. The RS232 port may be connected to a personal computer running the PC software. This may be used for downloading and uploading setpoints files, viewing actual values, and upgrading the 369 to the latest revision. RS485 communications support a subset of RTU protocol. Each must have a unique address from 1-254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all relays listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally each added to the link will use the next higher address starting at 1. A maximum of 32 devices can be daisy chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. A repeater may be used to increase the number of relays on a single link to greater than 32.
5-8
5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5.2.5 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK
SET MONTH: 01 SET DAY: 01 SET YEAR: 1999 SET HOUR: 00 SET MINUTE: 00 SET SECOND: 00
The time/date stamp is used to track events for diagnostic purposes. The date and time are preset but, may be entered manually. A battery backed internal clock runs continuously even when power is off. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch approximately +/- 1 minute per month. It may be periodically corrected either manually through the /keypad or via the clock update command over the serial link using the PC program. Enter the current date using two digits for the month, two digits for the day, and four digits for the year. For example, July 15, 1999 would be entered as 07 15 1999. If entered from the keypad, the new date will take effect the moment the [ENTER] key is pressed. Enter the current time, by using two digits for the hour in 24 hour time, two digits for the minutes, and two digits for the seconds. If entered from the keypad, the new time will take effect the moment the [ENTER] key is pressed. If the serial communication link is used, then all the relays can keep time in synchronization with each other. A new clock time is pre-loaded into the memory map via the communications port by a remote computer to each relay connected on the communications channel. The computer broadcasts (address 0) a set clock command to all relays. Then all relays in the system begin timing at the exact same instant. There can be up to 100ms of delay in receiving serial commands so the clock time in each relay is +/- 100ms, +/- absolute clock accuracy in the PLC or PC. (See the Communications chapter for information on programming the time and synchronizing commands.)
5-9
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.2.6 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
PATH: S1 PRODUCT SETUP
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
NUMBER OF RECORDS: 4 X 16 Cycles
Range: 1 x 64, 2 x 32, 4 x 16, 8 x 8
TRIGGER POSITION: 50 %
Range: 0 to 100%in Steps of 1
Waveform capture records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as context information at the point of trigger. These records are triggered by trip functions, digital input set to capture or via the PC program. Multiple waveforms are captured simultaneously for each record Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Va, Vb, and Vc. The number of records vs. the number of cycles of each record can be configured as per the following chart: Number of Records 8 4 2 1 Length of Record (cycles/channel) 8 16 32 64
CAUTION: When number of records is altered, all waveform capture records will be cleared. The trigger position is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). The trigger position determines of the number of pre and post fault cycles the record will be divided into. The relay sampling rate is 16 samples per cycle.
5-10
5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
Text 1 Text 2 Text 3 Text 4 Text 5
Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric
5 different 40 character message screens can be programmed. These messages may be notes that pertain to the installation of the UNIT. This can be useful for reminding operators to perform certain tasks. The messages may be entered from the keypad or any of the communications ports. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. To enter a 40 character message via the keypad: Select the user text message to be edited. Press the CLEAR button to enter text edit mode. Use the LINE up or down keys to move the cursor to the character location you wish to change. Use the VALUE key to scroll through and select the alphanumeric characters. Press the LINE up or down key to move the cursor to the next position. Repeat steps 4 and 5 and continue entering characters until the desired message is displayed. Press the ENTER key to store the message.
The PC program can also be used to enter these messages.
5-11
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
DEFAULT MESSAGES
DEFAULT MESSAGES
DEFAULT TO CURRENT METERING: No DEFAULT TO MOTOR LOAD: No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No DEFAULT TO DELTA VOLTAGE METERING: No
DEFAULT TO POWER FACTOR: No DEFAULT TO POSITIVE WATTHOURS: No DEFAULT TO REAL POWER: No DEFAULT TO REACTIVE POWER: No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO HOTTEST STATOR RTD: No DEFAULT TO TEXT MESSAGE 1: No DEFAULT TO TEXT MESSAGE 2: No DEFAULT TO TEXT MESSAGE 3: No DEFAULT TO TEXT MESSAGE 4: No DEFAULT TO TEXT MESSAGE 5: No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
The 369 can display a series of default messages. These default messages will appear after the set value for the Default Message Cycle Time expires and there are no active trips, alarms or start inhibits. See setpoints page 1, display properties section, for details on time delays and message durations. The default messages can be selected from the list above including the five user definable messages from the message scratchpad.
5-12
5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
CLEAR/PRESET DATA
CLEAR/PRESET DATA
CLEAR ALL DATA: No CLEAR LAST TRIP DATA: No CLEAR TRIP COUNTERS: No CLEAR EVENT RECORD: No CLEAR RTD MAXIMUMS: No CLEAR PEAK DEMAND DATA: No CLEAR MOTOR DATA: No PRESET MWh: 0 PRESET Mvarh: 0 PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER: 0
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes Clears all 40 events Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes Range: No, Yes. Clears learned acceleration time,
starting current, thermal capacity, and statistics.
Range: 0.000-999999.999 MWh in steps of 0.001, can be preset or cleared by storing 0 Range: 0.000-999999.999 Mvarh in steps of 0.001, can be preset or cleared by storing 0 Range: 0-65535 in steps of 1 Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
These commands may be used to clear various historical data. This is useful on new installations or to preset information on existing installations where new equipment has been installed. The PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER message will only be seen if one of the digital inputs has been configured as a digital input counter.
5-13
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.2.10 INSTALLED OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
PATH: S1 369 SETUP
ENABLE RTD: No ENABLE METERING OR BACKSPIN: No ENABLE FIBER OPTIC PORT: No ENABLE PROFIBUS INTERFACE: No ENTER PASSCODE: 0 ENABLE RRTD MODULE: No
Range: No = Option not enabled. Yes = Optional 12 RTD inputs enabled. Range: No = Option not enabled. Options: Metering or Backspin enabled. Range: No = Option not enabled. Yes = Fiber Optic Port enabled. Range: No = Option not enabled. Yes = Optional Profibus Protocol enabled. Range: 0-999999999 in steps of 1
Range: No, Yes
The 369 options listed in the order code can be ordered and installed in the field. To enable an option select the option to be enabled and enter the passcode for that option for that relay.
NOTE: Passcodes are obtained from the factory. There will be a charge for each option dependent upon the option to be installed. Options F and P also have hardware cards associated with them which can be installed in the field. To order an option call the factory with the serial number of the unit to be upgraded and a P.O. number. A passcode will then be issued for the options desired and hardware shipped if required. The RRTD module uses either Com3 or the fiber optic output. By enabling the RRTD module, these ports cannot be used for other communication purposes.
5-14
5 SETPOINTS 5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 2 MENU
S2 SETPOINTS SYSTEM SETUP
CT/VT SETUP MONITORING SETUP OUTPUT RELAY SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS
These setpoints are critical to the operation of the 369 protective and metering features and elements. Most protective elements are based on the information input for the CT/VT SETUP and OUTPUT RELAY SETUP. Additional monitoring alarms and control functions of the relay are also set here.
5-15
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.3.2 CT/VT SETUP
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CT/VT SETUP
CT/VT SETUP
PHASE CT PRIMARY: 500 MOTOR FLA: 10 GROUND CT TYPE: 5 GROUND CT PRIMARY: 100:5 VT CONNECTION TYPE: None VT RATIO: 35:1
Range: 1-5000 in steps of 1
Range: None, 5A secondary, 1A secondary, 50:0.025 Range: 1-5000 in steps of 1 Only shown for 5A and 1A secondary CT Range: None, Open Delta, Wye Only shown if option M installed Range: 1.00:1 to 240.00:1 Only shown if option M installed
MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE: Range: 100-20000 in steps of 1. Only shown if option M installed 4160
ENABLE SINGLE VT OPERATION: Off NOMINAL FREQUENCY: 60 Hz SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE: ABC Phase CT:
Range: AB, CB, AN, BN, CN, Off Only shown if option M installed Range: 50, 60, Variable
Range: ABC, ACB Only shown if option M installed
Enter the phase CT primary here. The phase CT secondary (1A or 5A) is determined by terminal connection to the 369. The phase CT should be chosen such that the motor FLA is between 50% and 100% of the phase CT primary. Ideally the motors FLA should be as close to 100% of phase CT primary as possible, never more. The phase CT class or type should also be chosen such that the CT can handle the maximum potential fault current with the attached burden without having its output saturate. Information on how to determine this if required is available in the application section of the 369 manual. The motor FLA (full load amps or full load current) must be entered. This value may be taken from the motor nameplate or motor data sheets. Ground CT: The ground CT type and primary (if 5A or 1A secondary) must be entered here. For high resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly or low resistance grounded systems where fault current can be quite high, a 1A or 5A CT should be used for either zero sequence (core balance) or residual ground sensing. If a residual connection is used with the phase CTs, the phase CT primary must also be entered for the ground CT primary. As with the phase CTs the type of ground CT should be chosen to handle all potential fault levels without saturating. Phase VT: All voltage related setpoints are visible only if the 369 has metering installed.
5-16
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
The manner in which the voltage transformers are connected must be entered here or none if VTs are not used. If a single VT is to be used its connection must also be entered. Note that for single VT operation the phase reversal feature is disabled as all voltages are assumed to be balanced. The VT turns ratio must be chosen such that the secondary voltage of the VTs is between 40 and 240V when the primary is at motor nameplate voltage. All voltage protection features are programmed as a percent of motor nameplate or rated voltage which represents the rated motor design voltage line to line. Example: Motor nameplate voltage is 4160V VTs are 4160/120 open delta Program: VT Connection Type: Open Delta VT Ratio: 34.67:1 Motor Rated Voltage: 4160
System: Enter the nominal system frequency here. This setpoint allows the 369 to determine the internal sampling rate for maximum accuracy. The 369 may be used on variable speed drives if the frequency is entered as variable. Voltage and power elements will work properly as long as the voltage waveform is approximately sinusoidal. Frequency is normally determined from the Va voltage input. If however this voltage drops below the minimum voltage threshold the Ia current input will be used. If the phase sequence for a given system is ACB rather than the standard ABC the phase sequence may be changed. This setpoint allows the 369 to properly calculate phase reversal and power quantities and is only visible if the 369 has metering installed.
5-17
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.3.3 MONITORING SETUP
MONITORING SETUP
MONITORING SETUP
TRIP COUNTER TRIP COUNTER ALARM: Off ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Alarm
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
ALARM PICKUP LEVEL: Range: 1 - 50000 in steps of 1 25 Trips TRIP COUNTER ALARM EVENTS: Off STARTER FAILURE STARTER FAILER ALARM: Off STARTER TYPE: Breaker ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Alarm STARTER FAILURE DELAY:100 ms STARTER FAILURE ALARM EVENTS: CURRENT DEMAND CURRENT DEMAND PERIOD: 15 min CURRENT DEMAND ALARM: Off ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Alarm CURRENT DEMAND ALARM LEVEL: 100 A CURRENT DEMAND ALARM EVENTS: Off kW DEMAND kW DEMAND PERIOD: 15 min
Range: 5 - 90 min in steps of 1 Range: 5 - 90 min in steps of 1 Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched Range: On, Off
Range: Breaker, Contactor
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 10 - 1000 ms in steps of 10 Range: ON, OFF
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 10 - 65535 A in steps of 1 Range: On, Off
5-18
5 SETPOINTS kW DEMAND ALARM: Off ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Alarm kW DEMAND ALARM LEVEL: 100 kW kW DEMAND ALARM EVENTS: Off kvar DEMAND kvar DEMAND PERIOD: 15 min kvar DEMAND ALARM: Off ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Alarm kvar DEMAND ALARM LEVEL: 100 kvar kvar DEMAND ALARM EVENTS: Off kVA DEMAND kVA DEMAND PERIOD: 15 min kVA DEMAND ALARM: Off ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Alarm kVA DEMAND ALARM LEVEL: 100 kVA kVA DEMAND ALARM EVENTS: Off TRIP COUNTER:
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 1 - 50000 kW in steps of 1 Range: On, Off
Range: 5 - 90 min in steps of 1
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: -32000 to +32000 in steps of 1 Range: On, Off
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 1 - 50000 in steps of 1 Range: On, Off
When the Trip Counter is enabled and the alarm pickup level is reached, an alarm will occur. To reset the alarm the trip counter must be cleared (see S1 Clear/Preset Data) or the pickup level increased and the reset key pressed (if a latched alarm). The trip counter alarm can be used to monitor and alarm when a predefined number of trips occur. This would then prompt the operator or supervisor to investigate the causes of the trips that have occurred. Details of individual trip counters can be found in A4, Statistical Data.
5-19
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP STARTER FAILURE:
5 SETPOINTS
If the Starter Failure alarm feature is enabled, any time the 369 initiates a trip, the 369 will monitor the Starter Status input (if assigned to Spare Switch in S9, Digital Inputs) and the motor current. If the starter status contacts do not change state or motor current does not drop to zero after the programmed time delay, an alarm will occur. The time delay should be slightly longer than the breaker or contactor operating time. In the event that an alarm does occur, if Breaker was chosen as the starter type, the alarm will be Breaker Failure. If on the other hand, Contactor was chosen for starter type, the alarm will be Welded Contactor. DEMAND: The 369 can measure the demand of the motor for several parameters (current, kW, kvar, kVA). The demand values of motors may be of interest for energy management programs where processes may be altered or scheduled to reduce overall demand on a feeder. An alarm will occur if the limit of any of the enabled demand elements is reached. Demand is calculated in the following manner. Every minute, an average magnitude is calculated for current, +kW, +kvar, and kVA based on samples taken every 5 seconds. These values are stored in a FIFO (First In, First Out buffer).The size of the buffer is dictated by the period that is selected for the setpoint. The average value of the buffer contents is calculated and stored as the new demand value every minute. Demand for real and reactive power is only positive quantities (+kW and +kvar).
DEMAND =
1 N Averagen N n=1
where: N= programmed Demand Period in minutes, n= time in minutes
5
160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 t=0 t+10
ROLLING DEMAND (15 min. window)
t+20
t+30
t+40
t+50 TIME
t+60
t+70
t+80
t+90
t+100
5-20
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.4 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
OUTPUT RELAY RESET MODE: All Resets TRIP RELAY OPERATION: FS AUX1 RELAY OPERATION: NFS AUX2 RELAY OPERATION: NFS ALARM RELAY OPERATION: NFS
Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)
Range: FS (failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)
RESET: A latched relay (caused by a protective elements alarm or trip) may be reset at any time, providing that the condition that caused the relay operation is no longer present. Unlatched elements will automatically reset when the condition that caused them has cleared. Reset location is defined in the following table. RESET MODE All Resets Remote Only Local Only OPERATION: These setpoints allow the choice of relay output operation to fail-safe or non-failsafe. Relay latchcode however, is defined individually for each protective element. Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized in its normal state and de-energized when activated by a protection element. A failsafe relay will also change state (if not already activated by a protection element) when control power is removed from the 369. Conversely a non-failsafe relay is de-energized in its normal nonactivated state and will not change state when control power is removed from the 369 (if not already activated by a protection element). The choice of failsafe or non-failsafe operation is usually determined by the motors application. In situations where the process is more critical than the motor, non-failsafe operation is typically programmed. In situations where the motor is more critical than the process, failsafe operation is programmed. RESET PERFORMED VIA keypad, digital input, communications digital input, communications keypad
5-21
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS 5.3.5 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL SERIAL COMMUNICATION Range: On, Off CONTROL: Off
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or ASSIGN START combinations of them CONTROL RELAYS: Aux1
SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL: If enabled the motor may be remotely started and stopped via Modbus communications to the 369. Refer to the communication section for details on how to send commands (Function code 5). When a Stop command is sent the Trip relay will activate for 1 second to complete the trip coil circuit for a breaker application or break the coil circuit for a contactor application. When a Start command is issued the relay assigned for starting control will activate for 1 second to complete the close coil circuit for a breaker application or complete the coil circuit for a contactor application.
5-22
5 SETPOINTS 5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION S3 SETPOINTS OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL OVERLOAD CURVES OVERLOAD ALARM
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 3 MENU
One of the principle enemies of motor life is heat. When a motor is specified, the purchaser communicates to the manufacturer what the loading conditions, duty cycle, environment and pertinent information about the driven load such as starting torque. The manufacturer then provides a stock motor or builds a motor that should have a reasonable life under those conditions. The purchaser should request all safe stall, acceleration and running thermal limits for all motors they receive in order to effectively program the 369. Motor thermal limits are dictated by the design of both the stator and the rotor. Motors have three modes of operation: locked rotor or stall (when the rotor is not turning), acceleration (when the rotor is coming up to speed), and running (when the rotor turns at near synchronous speed). Heating occurs in the motor during each of these conditions in very distinct ways. Typically, during motor starting, locked rotor and acceleration conditions, the motor is rotor limited. That is to say that the rotor will approach its thermal limit before the stator. Under locked rotor conditions, voltage is induced in the rotor at line frequency, 50 or 60 Hz. This voltage causes a current to flow in the rotor, also at line frequency, and the heat generated (I2R) is a function of the effective rotor resistance. At 50 or 60 Hz, the reactance of the rotor cage causes the current to flow at the outer edges of the rotor bars. The effective resistance of the rotor is therefore at a maximum during a locked rotor condition as is rotor heating. When the motor is running at rated speed, the voltage induced in the rotor is at a low frequency (approx. 1 Hz) and therefore, the effective resistance of the rotor is reduced quite dramatically. During running overloads, the motor thermal limit is typically dictated by stator parameters. Some special motors might be all stator or all rotor limited. During acceleration, the dynamic nature of the motor slip dictates that rotor impedance is also dynamic, and a third overload thermal limit characteristic is necessary. Figure 51: TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES (ANSI/IEEE C37.96), illustrates typical thermal limit curves. The motor starting characteristic is shown for a high inertia load @ 80% voltage. If the motor started quicker, the distinct characteristics of the thermal limit curves would not be required and the running overload curve would be joined with locked rotor safe stall times to produce a single overload curve.
Figure 51: TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES (ANSI/IEEE C37.96)
5-23
5 SETPOINTS 5.4.2 THERMAL MODEL
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
THERMAL MODEL
THERMAL MODEL
OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL: 1.01 x FLA THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM: Off ASSIGN TC ALARM RELAYS: Alarm TC ALARM LEVEL: 75 % Used THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM EVENTS: No ASSIGN TC TRIP RELAYS: Trip ENABLE UNBALANCE BIAS OF TC: No UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR: Learned
Range: 1.01-1.25 in steps of 0.01 Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 1-100% in steps of 1 Range: No, Yes Range: None,Trip,Aux1, Aux2 or combination of them (TC trip is always on and latched) Range: No, Yes Range: Learned , 1-29 in steps of 1 Only shown if Unbalance Bias is enabled Range: 0.01-1.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: No, Yes Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1 Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1 Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled Range: No, Yes Range: 1to RTD BIAS MID POINT Only shown if RTD biasing is enabled Range: RTD BIAS MINIMUM to MAXIMUM Only shown if RTD biasing is enabled Range: RTD BIAS MID POINT to 200 Only shown if RTD biasing is enabled
HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO: 1 ENABLE LEARNED COOL TIME: No RUNNING COOL TIME CONSTANT: 15 min. STOPPED COOL TIME CONSTANT: 30 min. ENABLE RTD BIASING: No RTD BIAS MINIMUM: 40 C RTD BIAS MID POINT: 120 C RTD BIAS MAXIMUM: 155 C
The primary protective function of the 369 is the thermal model. It consists of five key elements: the overload curve and pickup level, unbalance biasing, motor cooling time constants, and temperature biasing based on Hot/Cold motor information and measured stator RTD temperature. The 369 integrates both stator and rotor heating into one model. Motor heating is reflected in a register called Thermal Capacity Used. If the motor has been stopped for a long period of time, it will be at ambient temperature and thermal capacity used should be zero. If the motor is in overload, once the thermal capacity used reaches 100%, a trip will occur. When a motors thermal limit is exceeded the insulation does not immediately melt. Rather the rate of insulation degradation has reached a point where the motor life will be significantly reduced if the condition persists. The thermal capacity used alarm may be used as a warning indication of an impending overload trip.
5-24
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
OVERLOAD CURVES
OVERLOAD CURVE
SELECT CURVE STYLE: Standard STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE NUMBER: 4 TIME TO TRIP AT 1.01xFLA: 17415s TIME TO TRIP AT 1.05xFLA: 3415 s TIME TO TRIP AT 1.10xFLA: 1667 s TIME TO TRIP AT 1.20xFLA: 795 s TIME TO TRIP AT 1.30xFLA: 507 s TIME TO TRIP AT 1.40xFLA: 365 s TIME TO TRIP AT 1.50xFLA: 280 s TIME TO TRIP AT 1.75xFLA: 170 s TIME TO TRIP AT 2.00xFLA: 117 s TIME TO TRIP AT 2.25xFLA: 86 s TIME TO TRIP AT 2.50xFLA: 67 s TIME TO TRIP AT 2.75xFLA: 53 s TIME TO TRIP AT 3.00xFLA: 44 s TIME TO TRIP AT 3.25xFLA: 37 s TIME TO TRIP AT 3.50xFLA: 31 s TIME TO TRIP AT 3.75xFLA: 27 s
Range: Standard, Custom
Range: 1-15 in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is selected as Standard Range: 0 - 32767s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom
5-25
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION TIME TO TRIP AT 4.00xFLA: 23 s TIME TO TRIP AT 4.25xFLA: 21 s TIME TO TRIP AT 4.50xFLA: 18 s TIME TO TRIP AT 4.75xFLA: 16 s TIME TO TRIP AT 5.00xFLA: 15 s TIME TO TRIP AT 5.50xFLA: 12 s TIME TO TRIP AT 6.00xFLA: 10 s TIME TO TRIP AT 6.50xFLA: 9 s TIME TO TRIP AT 7.00xFLA: 7 s TIME TO TRIP AT 7.50xFLA: 6 s TIME TO TRIP AT 8.00xFLA: 6 S TIME TO TRIP AT 10.0xFLA: 6 s TIME TO TRIP AT 15.0xFLA: 6 s TIME TO TRIP AT 20.0xFLA: 6 s
5 SETPOINTS
Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1 Only seen if curve style is Custom
The overload curve accounts for motor heating during stall, acceleration, and running in both the stator and the rotor. The Overload Pickup setpoint dictates where the running overload curve begins as the motor enters an overload condition. This is useful for service factor motors as it allows the pickup level to be defined. The curve is effectively cut off at current values below this pickup. Motor thermal limits consist of three distinct parts based on the three conditions of operation, locked rotor or stall, acceleration, and running overload. Each of these curves may be provided for both a hot motor and a cold motor. A hot motor is defined as one that has been running for a period of time at full load such that the stator and rotor temperatures have settled at their rated temperature. A cold motor is defined as a motor that has been stopped for a period of time such that the stator and rotor temperatures have settled at ambient temperature. For most motors, the distinct characteristics of the motor thermal limits are formed into one smooth homogeneous curve. Sometimes only a safe stall time is provided. This is acceptable if the motor has been designed conservatively and can easily perform its required duty without infringing on the thermal limit. In this case, the protection can be conservative and process integrity is not compromised. If a motor has been designed very close to its thermal limits when operated as required, then the distinct characteristics of the thermal limits become important.
5-26
5 SETPOINTS
The 369 overload curve can take one of two formats, Standard or Custom Curve. Regardless of which curve style is selected, the 369 will retain thermal memory in the form of a register called Thermal Capacity Used. This register is updated every 100ms using the following equation:
100ms TC used t = TC used t 100ms + ---------------------------- 100 % time_to_trip

where: time_to_trip = time taken from the overload curve @ Ieq as a function of FLA The overload protection curve should always be set slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer. This will ensure that the motor is tripped before the thermal limit is reached. If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times, it is recommended that the 369 Standard Overload Curve be used. The standard overload curves are a series of 15 curves with a common curve shape based on typical motor thermal limit curves (see Figure 52:, 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES, on page 28 and Table 52:, 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES, on page 28).
5-27

100000
5 SETPOINTS
10000
TIME IN SECONDS
1000
100
x15
10
x1
1.00 0.10
1.00
10
100
1000
840719A1.CDR
MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD AMPS

Figure 52: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES
5-28
5 SETPOINTS Table 51: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES

PICKUP LEVEL (x FLA) 1.01 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 10.00 15.00 20.00
STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS x1 4353.6 853.71 416.68 198.86 126.80 91.14 69.99 42.41 29.16 21.53 16.66 13.33 10.93 9.15 7.77 6.69 5.83 5.12 4.54 4.06 3.64 2.99 2.50 2.12 1.82 1.58 1.39 1.39 1.39 1.39 x2 8707.2 1707.4 833.36 397.72 253.61 182.27 139.98 84.83 58.32 43.06 33.32 26.65 21.86 18.29 15.55 13.39 11.66 10.25 9.08 8.11 7.29 5.98 5.00 4.24 3.64 3.16 2.78 2.78 2.78 2.78 x3 13061 2561.1 1250.0 596.58 380.41 273.41 209.97 127.24 87.47 64.59 49.98 39.98 32.80 27.44 23.32 20.08 17.49 15.37 13.63 12.17 10.93 8.97 7.49 6.36 5.46 4.75 4.16 4.16 4.16 4.16 x4 17414 3414.9 1666.7 795.44 507.22 364.55 279.96 169.66 116.63 86.12 66.64 53.31 43.73 36.58 31.09 26.78 23.32 20.50 18.17 16.22 14.57 11.96 9.99 8.48 7.29 6.33 5.55 5.55 5.55 5.55 x5 21768 4268.6 2083.4 994.30 634.02 455.68 349.95 212.07 145.79 107.65 83.30 66.64 54.66 45.73 38.87 33.47 29.15 25.62 22.71 20.28 18.22 14.95 12.49 10.60 9.11 7.91 6.94 6.94 6.94 6.94 x6 26122 5122.3 2500.1 1193.2 760.82 546.82 419.94 254.49 174.95 129.18 99.96 79.96 65.59 54.87 46.64 40.17 34.98 30.75 27.25 24.33 21.86 17.94 14.99 12.72 10.93 9.49 8.33 8.33 8.33 8.33 x7 30475 5976.0 2916.8 1392.0 887.63 637.96 489.93 296.90 204.11 150.72 116.62 93.29 76.52 64.02 54.41 46.86 40.81 35.87 31.80 28.39 25.50 20.93 17.49 14.84 12.75 11.08 9.71 9.71 9.71 9.71 x8 34829 6829.7 3333.5 1590.9 1014.4 729.09 559.92 339.32 233.26 172.25 133.28 106.62 87.46 73.16 62.19 53.56 46.64 41.00 36.34 32.44 29.15 23.91 19.99 16.96 14.57 12.66 11.10 11.10 11.10 11.10 x9 39183 7683.4 3750.1 1789.7 1141.2 820.23 629.91 381.73 262.42 193.78 149.94 119.95 98.39 82.31 69.96 60.25 52.47 46.12 40.88 36.50 32.79 26.90 22.48 19.08 16.39 14.24 12.49 12.49 12.49 12.49 x 10 43536 8537.1 4166.8 1988.6 1268.0 911.37 699.90 392.15 291.58 215.31 166.60 133.27 109.32 91.46 77.73 66.95 58.30 51.25 45.42 40.55 36.43 29.89 24.98 21.20 18.21 15.82 13.88 13.88 13.88 13.88 x 11 47890 9390.8 4583.5 2187.5 1394.8 1002.5 769.89 466.56 320.74 236.84 183.26 146.60 120.25 100.60 85.51 73.64 64.13 56.37 49.97 44.61 40.08 32.88 27.48 23.32 20.04 17.41 15.27 15.27 15.27 15.27 x 12 52243 10245 5000.2 2386.3 1521.6 1093.6 839.88 508.98 349.90 258.37 199.92 159.93 131.19 109.75 93.28 80.34 69.96 61.50 54.51 48.66 43.72 35.87 29.98 25.44 21.86 18.99 16.65 16.65 16.65 16.65 x 13 56597 11098 5416.9 2585.2 1648.5 1184.8 909.87 551.39 379.05 279.90 216.58 173.25 142.12 118.89 101.05 87.03 75.79 66.62 59.05 52.72 47.36 38.86 32.48 27.55 23.68 20.57 18.04 18.04 18.04 18.04 x 14 60951 11952 5833.6 2784.1 1775.3 1275.9 979.86 593.81 408.21 301.43 233.24 186.58 153.05 128.04 108.83 93.73 81.62 71.75 63.59 56.77 51.01 41.85 34.97 29.67 25.50 22.15 19.43 19.43 19.43 19.43 x 15 65304 12806 6250.2 2982.9 1902.1 1367.0 1049.9 636.22 437.37 322.96 249.90 199.91 163.98 137.18 116.60 100.42 87.45 76.87 68.14 60.83 54.65 44.84 37.47 31.79 27.32 23.74 20.82 20.82 20.82 20.82
NOTE: Above 8.0 x Pickup, the trip time for 8.0 is used. This prevents the overload curve from acting as an instantaneous element Standard Overload Curves Equation: Time_ To_ Trip =
Curve_ Multiplier 2.2116623 0.025303373 (Pickup 1)2 + 0.050547581 (Pickup 1)
5-29
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE
5 SETPOINTS
If the motor starting current does begin to infringe on the thermal damage curves, it may become necessary to use a custom curve to tailor the protection to the motor so that successful starting may be possible without compromising motor protection. Furthermore, the characteristics of the starting thermal damage curve (locked rotor and acceleration) and the running thermal damage curves may not fit together very smoothly. In this instance, it may become necessary to use a custom curve to tailor the motor protection to the motor thermal limits such that the motor may be started successfully and the motor may be utilized to its full potential without compromising protection. The distinct parts of the thermal limit curves now become more critical. For these conditions, it is recommended that the 369 custom curve thermal model be used. The custom overload curve of the 369 allows the user to program his own curve by entering trip times for 30 pre-determined current levels. The 369 will smooth the areas between these points to make the protection curve. It can be seen in Figure 5-3 that if the running overload thermal limit curve were smoothed into one curve with the locked rotor overload curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve is required.
Figure 53: CUSTOM CURVE EXAMPLE Note: During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nuisance tripping during motor starts.
5-30
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.4 UNBALANCE BIAS
Unbalanced phase currents cause additional rotor heating that will not be accounted for by electromechanical relays and may not be accounted for in some electronic protective relays. When the motor is running, the rotor will rotate in the direction of the positive sequence current at near synchronous speed. Negative sequence current, which has a phase rotation that is opposite to the positive sequence current, and hence, opposite to the rotor rotation, will generate a rotor voltage that will produce a substantial rotor current. This induced current will have a frequency that is approximately 2 times the line frequency, 100 Hz for a 50 Ieq = Equivalent unbalance biased heating current Hz system or 120 Hz for a 60 Hz system. Skin effect in the rotor bars at this fre- Iavg = Average RMS phase current measured quency will cause a significant increase UB % = Unbalance percentage measured (100% = 1, 50% = 0.5 etc...) in rotor resistance and therefore, a sig= Unbalance bias k factor nificant increase in rotor heating. This k extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves supplied by the motor manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and motor design. The 369 measures the percentage unbalance for the phase currents. The thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current, present during an unbalance when the motor is running. This biasing is done by creating an equivalent motor heating current that takes into account the unbalanced current effect along with the average phase current. This equivalent current is calculated using the equation shown below.
Ieq = Equivalent unbalance biased heating current
I avg 1 + k ( UB% ) I eq = ----------------------------------------------FLA
Iavg = Average RMS phase current measured UB% = Unbalance percentage measured (100%=1, 50%=0.5 etc...) k = Unbalance bias k factor
Figure 5-4 shows recommended motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by the American organization NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association). Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 x FLA and a negative sequence impedance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of 1,2,3,4,5% equals current unbalances of 6,12,18,24,30% respectively. Based on this assumption, Figure 5-5 illustrates the amount of motor derating for different values of k entered for the setpoint Unbalance Bias k Factor. Note that the curve created when k=8 is almost identical to the NEMA derating curve.
1.05
1.05
DERATING FACTOR
DERATING FACTOR
1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0 1 2 3 4 5
1.00 0.95
k=2
0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0 1 2 3 4 5

k=4 k=6 k=8 k=10
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
Figure 54: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR Figure 55: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE (NEMA) DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE (MULTILIN)
5-31
5 SETPOINTS
If a k value of 0 is entered, the unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against the measured per unit motor current. k may be calculated as:
175 k = --------2 I LR
(typical estimate)
230 k = --------2 I LR
(conservative estimate) Where ILR is the per unit locked rotor current (ILR/FLA). The 369 also has the ability to learn the unbalance bias k factor. It is recommended that the learned k factor not be enabled until the motor has had at least five successful starts. The calculation of the learned k factor is as follows:
175 k = -----------------I LSC 2 ---------- FLA

Where:
ILSC = Learned starting current FLA = Full load amps setpoint
5-32
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.5 MOTOR COOLING
The thermal capacity used quantity is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor is stopped or current is below the overload pickup setpoint. This reduction simulates motor cooling. The motor cooling time constants should be entered for both the stopped and running cases. A stopped motor will normally cool significantly slower than a running motor. Note that the cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100% thermal capacity used down to 0% thermal capacity used. The 369 has the ability to learn and estimate the stopped and running cool time constants for a motor. Calculation of a cool time constant is performed whenever the motor state transitions from starting to running or from running to stopped. The learned cool times are based on the cooling rate of the hottest stator RTD, the hot/cold ratio, the ambient temperature (40 if no ambient RTD), the measured motor load and the programmed service factor or overload pickup. Learned values should only be enabled for motors that have been started, stopped and run at least five times. It should be noted that any learned cool time constants are mainly based on stator RTD information. Cool time, for starting, is typically a rotor limit. The use of stator RTDs can only render an approximation. The learned values should only be used if the real values are not available from the motor manufacturer. Motor cooling is calculated using the following formulas:
TC used
--- = ( TC used_start TC used_end ) e + TC used_end
hotTC used_end = I eq 1 ---------- 100% cold

where: TCused TCused_start TCused_end = thermal capacity used = TC used value caused by overload condition = TC used value dictated by the hot/cold curve ratio when the motor is running, '0' when the motor is stopped. t = time in minutes = Cool Time Constant (running or stopped) Ieq = equivalent motor heating current overload_pickup = overload pickup setpoint as a multiple of FLA hot/cold = hot/cold curve ratio
5-33
5 SETPOINTS
100
100
Thermal Capacity Used
50
Cool Time Constant= 15 min TCused_start= 85% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Ieq/Overload Pickup= 80%
75
75 Cool Time Constant= 15 min TCused_start= 85% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Ieq/Overload Pickup= 100%
50
25
25
0 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 Tim e in Minutes
0 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 Tim e in Minutes
Figure 56: THERMAL MODEL COOLING 80% LOAD
Figure 57: THERMAL MODEL COOLING 100% LOAD

100
5
100
50
Cool Time Constant= 30 min TCused_start= 85% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Motor Stopped after running Rated Load TCused_end= 0%
75
75
50
Cool Time Constant= 30 min TCused_start= 100% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Motor Stopped after Overload Trip TCused_end= 0%
25
25
0 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 Tim e in Minutes
0 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 Tim e in Minutes
Figure 58: THERMAL MODEL COOLING MOTOR Figure 59: THERMAL MODEL COOLING MOTOR TRIPPED STOPPED
5-34
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.6 HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO
The motor manufacturer will sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/cold motor. The 369 thermal model will adapt for these conditions if the Hot/Cold Curve Ratio is programmed. The value entered for this setpoint dictates the level of thermal capacity used that the relay will settle at for levels of current that are below the Overload Pickup Level. When the motor is running at a level that is below the Overload Pickup Level, the thermal capacity used will rise or fall to a value based on the average phase current and the entered Hot/Cold Curve Ratio. Thermal capacity used will either rise at a fixed rate of 5% per minute or fall as dictated by the running cool time constant.
hotTC used_end = I eq 1 ---------- 100% cold

Where: TCused_end Ieq Hot/Cold = Thermal Capacity Used if Iper_unit remains steady state = equivalent motor heating current = Hot/Cold Curve Ratio Setpoint
The hot/cold curve ratio may be determined from the thermal limit curves if provided or the hot and cold safe stall times. Simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. If hot and cold times are not provided, there can be no differentiation and the hot/cold curve ratio should be entered as 1.00.
5-35
5 SETPOINTS 5.4.7 RTD BIAS
The 369 thermal replica created by the features described in the sections above operates as a complete and independent model. The thermal overload curves however, are based solely on measured current, assuming a normal 40 C ambient and normal motor cooling. If there is an unusually high ambient temperature, or if motor cooling is blocked, motor temperature will increase. If the motor stator has embedded RTDs, the 369 RTD bias feature should be used to correct the thermal model. The RTD bias feature is a two part curve, constructed using 3 points. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below the RTD Bias Minimum setpoint (typically 40 C), no biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the RTD Bias Maximum setpoint (typically at the stator insulation rating or slightly higher), then the thermal memory is fully biased and thermal capacity is forced to 100% used. At values in between, the present thermal capacity used created by the overload curve and other elements of the thermal model, is compared to the RTD Bias thermal capacity used from the RTD Bias curve. If the RTD Bias thermal capacity used value is higher, then that value is used from that point onward. The RTD Bias Center point should be set at the rated running temperature of the motor. The 369 will automatically determine the thermal capacity used value for the center point using the Hot/Cold Safe stall ratio setpoint.
hotTC used @RTD_Bias_Center = 1 ---------- 100% cold

At < RTD_Bias_Center temperature,
Temp actual Temp min RTD_Bias_TC used = ------------------------------------------------------- TC used @RTD_Bias_Center Temp center Temp min
At > RTD_Bias_Center temperature,
Temp actual Tempcenter RTD_Bias_TC used = -------------------------------------------------------------- ( 100 TC used @RTD_Bias_Center ) + TC used @RTD_Bias_Center Tempmax Temp center
Where:
RTD_Bias_TCUSED = TC used due to hottest stator RTD TempACTUAL = Current temperature of hottest stator RTD TempMIN = RTD Bias minimum setpoint (ambient temperature) TempCENTER = RTD Bias center setpoint (motor running temperature) TempMAX = RTD Bias max setpoint (winding insulation rating temperature) TCUSED@RTD_Bias_Center = TC used defined by HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setpoint
In simple terms, the RTD bias feature is real feedback of measured stator temperature. This feedback acts as correction of the thermal model for unforeseen situations. Since RTDs are relatively slow to respond, RTD biasing is good for correction and slow motor heating. The rest of the thermal model is required during starting and heavy overload conditions when motor heating is relatively fast. It should be noted that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. If the RTD bias feature forces the thermal capacity used to 100%, the motor current must be above the overload pickup before an overload trip occurs. Presumably, the motor would trip on stator RTD temperature at that time.
5-36
5 SETPOINTS

RTD Bias Maximum 120 Hot/ 100 Cold = 0.85 Rated Temperature=130 C Insulation Rating=155 C 80
60
40
20 RTD Bias Minimum 0 -100 0 100
RTD Bias Center Point
200
300
Maxim um Stator RTD Tem perature
Figure 510: RTD BIAS CURVE 5.4.8 OVERLOAD ALARM

PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD ALARM
5
OVERLOAD ALARM
OVERLOAD ALARM: Off OVERLOAD ALARM LEVEL: 1.01 x FLA ASSIGN O/L ALARM RELAYS: Alarm OVERLOAD ALARM DELAY: 1 s OVERLOAD ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: 1.01 - 1.50 in steps of 0.01
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 0.1-60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: On, Off
An overload alarm will occur only when the motor is running and the current rises above the programmed FLA of the motor. The overload alarm is disabled during a start. An application of an unlatched overload alarm is to signal a PLC that controls the load on the motor, whenever the motor is too heavily loaded.
5-37
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS 5.5.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 4 MENU
S4 SETPOINTS CURRENT ELEMENTS
SHORT CIRCUIT MECHANICAL JAM UNDERCURRENT CURRENT UNBALANCE GROUND FAULT
These elements deal with functions that are based on the current reading of the 369 from the external phase and/or ground CTs. All models of the 369 include these features.
5-38
5 SETPOINTS
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
SHORT CIRCUIT
SHORT CIRCUIT
SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP LEVEL: 10.0 x CT ADD S/C TRIP DELAY: 0.00 s SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP BACKUP: Off
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 2.0 - 20.0 in steps of 0.1
Range: 0 - 255.00 s in steps of 0.01s 0 = Instantaneous Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN BACKUP RELAY: Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Aux1 ADD S/C BACKUP TRIP DELAY: 0.20 s
Range: 0 - 255.00 s in steps of 0.01s
Note: Care must be taken when turning on this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) is not rated to break the fault current, this feature should be disabled. Alternatively, this feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current. FUNCTION: Once the magnitude of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Pickup Level Phase CT Primary for a period of time specified by the delay, a trip will occur. Note the delay is in addition to the 45 ms instantaneous operate time. There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. The backup delay should be greater than the short circuit delay plus the breaker clearing time. If a short circuit trip occurs with the backup on, and the phase current to the motor persists for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second backup trip will occur. It is intended that this second trip be assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay. Various situations (e.g. charging a long line to the motor or power factor correction capacitors) may cause transient inrush currents during motor starting that may exceed the Short Circuit Pickup level for a very short period of time. The Short Circuit time delay is adjustable in 10 ms increments. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still responds very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Phase Short Circuit time delay will be set as quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs. When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. This asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. If the short circuit level was set at 1.25 times the symmetrical starting current, it is probable that there would be nuisance trips during motor starting. As a rule of thumb the short circuit protection is typically set to at least 1.6 times the symmetrical starting current value. This allows the motor to start without nuisance tripping. NOTE: Both the main Short Circuit delay and the backup delay start timing when the current exceeds the Short Circuit Pickup level.
5-39
5 SETPOINTS 5.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM
MECHANICAL JAM
MECHANICAL JAM
MECHANICAL JAM ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Alarm MECHANICAL JAM ALARM Range: 1.01 to 6.00 in steps of 0.01 LEVEL: 1.50 x FLA MECHANICAL JAM ALARM Range: 0.5-125.0 s in steps of 0.5 DELAY: 1.0 s MECHANICAL JAM ALARM Range: On, Off EVENTS: Off MECHANICAL JAM TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 1.01 to 6.00 in steps of 0.01
5
FUNCTION:
MECHANICAL JAM TRIP LEVEL: 1.50 x FLA MECHANICAL JAM TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5-125.0 s in steps of 0.5
After a motor start, once the magnitude of any one of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Pickup Level FLA for a period of time specified by the Delay, a Trip will occur. This feature may be used to indicate a stall condition when running. Not only does it protect the motor by taking it off-line quicker than the thermal model (overload curve), it may also prevent or limit damage to the driven equipment that may occur if motor starting torque persists on jammed or broken equipment. The pickup level for the Mechanical Jam Trip should be set higher than motor loading during normal operations, but lower than the motor stall level. Normally the delay would be set to the minimum time delay, or set such that no nuisance trips occur due to momentary load fluctuations.
5-40
5 SETPOINTS
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5.5.4 UNDERCURRENT
UNDERCURRENT
UNDERCURRENT
BLOCK UNDERCURRENT FROM START: 0 s UNDERCURRENT ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Alarm UNDERCURRENT ALARM LEVEL: 0.70 x FLA UNDERCURRENT ALARM DELAY: 1 s UNDERCURRENT ALARM EVENTS: Off UNDERCURRENT TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip UNDERCURRENT TRIP LEVEL: 0.70 x FLA UNDERCURRENT TRIP DELAY: 1 s FUNCTION: If enabled, once the magnitude of either phase A, B or C falls below the pickup level FLA for a period of time specified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur. The undercurrent element is an indication of loss of load to the motor. Thus the pickup level should be set lower than motor loading levels during normal operations. The undercurrent element is active when the motor is starting or running. The undercurrent element can be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by the U/C Block From Start setpoint (e.g. this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips). A value of 0 means undercurrent protection is immediately enabled upon motor starting (no block). If a value other than 0 is entered, the feature will be disabled from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires. APPLICATION EXAMPLE: If a pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps, loss of load may cause the pump to overheat. Undercurrent protection should thus be enabled. If the motor loading should never fall below 0.75 FLA, even for short durations, the Undercurrent Trip pickup could be set to 0.70 and the Undercurrent Alarm to 0.75. If the pump is always started loaded, the block from start feature should be disabled (programmed as 0). Time delay is typically set as quick as possible, 1 s.
Range: 0.10 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
Range: 1 - 255 s in steps of 1
Range: On, Off
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 0.10 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
5-41
5 SETPOINTS 5.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE
CURRENT UNBALANCE
CURRENT UNBALANCE
BLOCK UNBALANCE FROM Range: 0-5000 s in steps of 1 START: 0 s CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Alarm UNBALANCE ALARM LEVEL: 15 % UNBALANCE ALARM DELAY: 1 s UNBALANCE ALARM EVENTS: Off CURRENT UNBALANCE TRIP: Off
Range: 4 - 30% in steps of 1
Range: On, Off
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip UNBALANCE TRIP LEVEL: 20 % UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY: 1 s
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 4 - 30% in steps of 1
Unbalanced three phase supply voltages are a major cause of induction motor thermal damage. Causes of unbalance can include: increased resistance in one phase due to a pitted or faulty contactor, loose connections, unequal tap settings in a transformer, non-uniformly distributed three phase loads or varying single phase loads within a plant. The most serious case of unbalance is single phasing which is the complete loss of one phase. This can be caused by a utility supply problem or by a blown fuse in one phase and can seriously damage a three phase motor. A single phase trip will occur in 2 seconds if the Unbalance trip is on and the level exceeds 40%. A Single Phase trip will also activate if the Motor Load is above 30% and at least one of the phase currents is zero. Single phasing protection is disabled if the Unbalance Trip feature is turned Off. During balanced conditions in the stator current in each motor phase is equal and the rotor current is just sufficient to provide the turning torque. When the stator currents are unbalanced, a much higher current is induced into the rotor due to its lower impedance to the negative sequence current component present. This current is at twice the power supply frequency and produces a torque in the opposite direction to the desired motor output. Usually the increase in stator current is small and timed overcurrent protection takes a long time to trip. However the much higher induced rotor current can cause extensive rotor damage in a short period of time. Motors can tolerate different levels of current unbalance depending on the rotor design and heat dissipation characteristics.
5-42
5 SETPOINTS
To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damage the rotor, the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30% of the full load current (IFLC) setting. Unbalance is calculated as: If IAVG IFLA
Unbalance = IMAX IAVG x100 IAVG
If IAVG< IFLA Unbalance = IMAX IAVG x100

IFLA
IAVG = average phase current, IMAX = current in a phase with maximum deviation from IAVG, IFLA = motor full load amps setting
Unbalance protection is recommended at all times. When setting the unbalance pickup level, it should be noted that a 1% voltage unbalance typically translates into a 6% current unbalance. Therefore, in order to prevent nuisance trips or alarms, the pickup level should not be set too low. Also, since short term unbalances are common, a reasonable delay should be set to avoid nuisance trips or alarms. It is recommended that the unbalance thermal bias feature be used to bias the Thermal Model to account for rotor heating that may be caused by cyclic short term unbalances.
5-43
5 SETPOINTS 5.5.6 GROUND FAULT
GROUND FAULT
GROUND FAULT
GROUND FAULT ALARM: Off ASSIGN G/F ALARM RELAYS: Alarm GROUND FAULT ALARM LEVEL: 0.10 x CT GROUND FAULT ALARM LEVEL: 0.25 A GROUND FAULT ALARM DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND FAULT ALARM EVENTS: Off GROUND FAULT TRIP: Off
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 0.10-1.00 in steps of 0.01 for 1A/5A Only shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A Range: 0.25-25.00A in steps of 0.01 for 50:0.025 Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025 Range: 0.00 - 255.00s in steps of 0.01s
Range: On, Off
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip GROUND FAULT TRIP LEVEL: 0.20 x CT GROUND FAULT TRIP LEVEL: 0.25 A GROUND FAULT TRIP DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND FAULT TRIP BACKUP: Off ASSIGN G/F BACKUP RELAYS: Aux2 G/F TRIP BACKUP DELAY: 0.20 s FUNCTION:
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 0.10-1.00 in steps of 0.01 for 1A/5A Only shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A Range: 0.25-25.00A in steps of 0.01 for 50:0.025 Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025 Range: 0 - 255.00s in steps of 0.01s
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 0.01 - 255.00s in steps of 0.01s
Once the magnitude of ground current exceeds the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the Delay, a trip and/or alarm will occur. There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. If the backup is On, and a Ground Fault trip has initiated, and the ground current persists for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second backup trip will occur. It is intended that this second trip be assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay. The Ground Fault Trip Backup delay must be set to a time longer than the breaker clearing time. Note: Care must be taken when turning On this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) is not rated to break ground fault current (low resistance or solidly grounded systems),
5-44
5 SETPOINTS
the feature should be disabled. Alternately, the feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current. Various situations (e.g. contactor bounce) may cause transient ground currents during motor starting that may exceed the Ground Fault Pickup levels for a very short period of time. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still responds very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Ground Fault time delays will be set as quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs. Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired to the phase CTs in a residual connection. When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. This asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. This momentary DC component will cause each of the phase CTs to react differently and the net current into the ground input of the 369 will not be negligible. A 20 ms block of the ground fault elements when the motor starts enables the 369 to ride through this momentary ground current signal. NOTE: Both the main Ground Fault delay and the backup delay start timing when the Ground Fault current exceeds the pickup level.
5-45
5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS 5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS
S5 SETPOINTS MOTOR START/INHIBITS
ACCELERATION TRIP START INHIBITS BACKSPIN DETECTION
Only shown if option B installed
These setpoints deal with those functions that prevent the motor from restarting once stopped until a set condition clears and/or a set time expires. None of these functions will trip a motor that is already running.
5-46
5 SETPOINTS
5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS 5.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP
PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS
ACCELERATION TRIP
ACCELERATION TRIP
ACCELERATION TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip ACCELERATION TIME FROM START: 10.0 s
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them Range: 1.0-250.0 s in steps of 0.1
FUNCTION: The 369 Thermal Model is designed to protect the motor under both starting and overload conditions. The Acceleration Timer trip feature may be used in addition to that protection. If for example, the motor should always start in 2 seconds, but the safe stall time is 8 seconds, there is no point letting the motor remain in a stall condition for 7 or 8 seconds when the thermal model would take it off line. Furthermore, the starting torque applied to the driven equipment for that period of time could cause severe damage. If enabled, the Acceleration Timer trip element will function as follows: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. Typically current will rise quickly to a value in excess of FLA (e.g. 6 x FLA). At this point, the Acceleration Timer will be initialized with the entered value in seconds. If the current does not fall below the overload curve pickup level before the timer expires, an acceleration trip will occur. If the acceleration time of the motor is variable, this feature should be set just beyond the longest acceleration time. Note: Some motor softstarters may allow current to ramp up slowly while others may limit current to less than Full Load Amps throughout the start. In these cases, as a generic relay that must protect all motors, the 369 cannot differentiate between a motor that has a slow ramp up time and one that has completed a start and gone into an overload condition. Therefore, if the motor current does not rise to greater than full load within 1 second on start, the acceleration timer feature is ignored. In any case, the motor is still protected by the overload curve.
5-47
5 SETPOINTS 5.6.3 START INHIBITS
START INHIBITS
START INHIBITS
ENABLE SINGLE SHOT RESTART: No ENABLE START INHIBIT: No MAX STARTS/HOUR PERMISSIBLE: Off TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE: Off RESTART BLOCK: Off ASSIGN BLOCK RELAY AUX2
Range: No, Yes Range: No, Yes Range: Off(0), 1-5 in steps of 1 Range: Off(0), 1-500 min in steps of 1 Range: Off(0), 1-50000 s in steps of 1 Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
Function: Single Shot Restart: Enabling this feature will allow the motor to be restarted immediately after an overload trip has occurred. To accomplish this a reset will cause the 369 to decrease the accumulated thermal capacity to zero. However if a second overload trip occurs within one hour of the first another immediate restart will not be permitted. The displayed lockout time must then be allowed to expire before the motor can be started.
Start Inhibit: The Start Inhibit feature is intended to help prevent tripping of the motor during start if there is insufficient thermal capacity for a start. The average value of thermal capacity used from the last five successful starts is multiplied by 1.25 and stored as thermal capacity used on start. This 25% margin is used to ensure that a motor start will be successful. If the number is greater than 100%, 100% is stored as thermal capacity used on start. A successful motor start is one in which phase current rises from 0 to greater than overload pickup and then, after acceleration, falls below the overload curve pickup level. If the Start Inhibit feature is enabled, each time the motor is stopped, the amount of thermal capacity available (100% - Thermal Capacity Used) is compared to the Thermal Capacity Used On Start. If the thermal capacity available does not exceed the Thermal Capacity Used On Start, or is not equal to 100%, the Start Inhibit will become active until there is sufficient thermal capacity. When a inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time required for the motor to cool to an acceptable temperature for a start. This time will be a function of the Cool Time Constant Stopped programmed. If this feature is turned Off, thermal capacity used must reduce to 15% before an overload lockout resets. This feature should be turned off if the load varies for different starts. Max Starts/Hour Permissible: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, one of the STARTS/HOUR timers is loaded with 60 minutes. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, the number of starts within the past hour is compared to the number of starts allowable. If the two are the same, a inhibit will occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to one hour less the longest time elapsed since a start within the past hour. An Emergency restart will clear the oldest start time remaining. Time Between Starts: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, the Time Between Starts timer is loaded with the entered time. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, if the time elapsed since the most recent start is less than the Time Between Starts setpoint, an inhibit will occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time elapsed since the most recent start subtracted from the Time Between Starts setpoint.
5-48
5 SETPOINTS
Restart Block: The Restart Block feature may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between stopping a motor and restarting that motor. This timer feature may be very useful for some process applications or motor considerations. If a motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin the rotor backwards. It would be very undesirable to start the motor at this time. In another scenario, a motor may be driving a very high inertia load. Once the supply to the motor is disconnected, the rotor may continue to turn for a long period of time as it decelerates. The motor has now become a generator and applying supply voltage out of phase may result in catastrophic failure. Assign Inhibit Relay: The relay(s) assigned here will be used for all blocking/inhibit elements in this section. The assigned relay will activate only when the motor is stopped. When a block/inhibit condition times out or is cleared the assigned relay will automatically reset itself. Notes for all Inhibits and Blocks: 1. In the event of control power loss all lockout times will be saved. Elapsed time will be recorded and decremented from the inhibit times whether control power is applied or not. Upon control power being re-established to the 369 all remaining inhibits (have not time out) will be re-activated. 2. If the motor is started while an inhibit is active and event titled Start while Blocked will be recorded.
5-49
5 SETPOINTS 5.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION
BACKSPIN DETECTION
BACKSPIN DETECTION
ENABLE BACKSPIN START INHIBIT: No LOW FREQUENCY START LEVEL: 2 Hz ASSIGN BSD RELAY: Aux2 NUMBER OF MOTOR POLES: 2
Range: No, Yes
Range: 2 - 30 Hz in steps of 0.01 Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations Shown only if backspin is enabled Range: 2 - 16 in steps of 2 Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
Range: No_BSD_Running, Just_Stopped, SlowBACKSPIN DETECTION STATE:No_BSD_Running down, Acceleration, BSD_Slowdown, Prediction, Exit Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
BACKSPIN PREDICTION TIMER:30 s Function:
Range: 0 - 50000 s in steps of 1 Shown only if backspin is enabled
Immediately after the motor is stopped, backspin detection commences and a backspin start inhibit is activated to prevent the motor from being restarted. The BSD voltage inputs are monitored for voltage level and frequency. Frequency is measured as the motor decelerates and again as it accelerates and then decelerates in the reverse direction. This measured frequency is compared to the Low Frequency Start Level and the number of Samples Before Start Permissive. If the measured frequency is below the programmed start level for the number of samples programmed then the backspin start inhibit will be removed. If during any sample the Minimum Operating Voltage is not reached then the backspin start inhibit is removed. For this reason the Backspin Inhibit Timer is used to guarantee a minimum time off if the BSD signal is lost. Application: Backspin protection is typically used on down hole pump motors which can be located several kilometers underground. Check valves are often used to prevent flow reversal when the pump stops. Very often however, the flow reverses due to faulty or non existent check valves, causing the pump impeller to rotate the motor in the reverse direction. Starting the motor during this period of reverse rotation (back-spinning) may result in motor damage. Backspin detection ensures that the motor can only be started when the motor has slowed to within acceptable limits. Without backspin detection a long time delay had to be used as a start permissive to ensure the motor had slowed to a safe speed. Note: These setpoints are only visible when option B has been installed.
5-50
5 SETPOINTS 5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5.7.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 6 MENU
S6 SETPOINTS RTD TEMPERATURE
LOCAL RTD PROTECTION REMOTE RTD PROTECTION OPEN RTD ALARM SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
These setpoints deal with the RTD overtemperature elements of the 369. The Local RTD Protection setpoints will only be seen if the 369 has option R installed. The Remote RTD Protection setpoints will only be seen if the 369 has the RRTD accessory enabled. Both can be enabled and used at the same time and have the same functionality. 5.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE LOCAL RTD PROTECTION
5
Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel,
120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Platinum; only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.
LOCAL RTD PROTECTION
LOCAL RTD 1 RTD 1 APPLICATION: None RTD 1 TYPE: 100 Ohm Platinum RTD 1 NAME: RTD 1 RTD 1 ALARM: Off RTD 1 ALARM RELAYS: Alarm RTD 1 ALARM LEVEL: 130 C RTD 1 HI ALARM: Off RTD 1 HI ALARM RELAYS: Aux1
Range: 8 character alphanumeric;

only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched;

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations;

Range: 1-200C in steps of 1 34-392F in steps of 1;



5-51
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE RTD 1 HI ALARM LEVEL: 130 C RECORD RTD 1 ALARMS AS EVENTS: No RTD 1 TRIP: Off RTD 1 TRIP RELAYS: Trip RTD 1 TRIP LEVEL: 130 C ENABLE RTD 1 TRIP VOTING: Off LOCAL RTD 2
5 SETPOINTS
Range: No, Yes;


Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations;


Range: Off, RTD 1-12, All Stator;

LOCAL RTD 12
5-52
5 SETPOINTS
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
REMOTE RTD PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD 1 RRTD 1 APPLICATION: None RRTD 1 TYPE: 100 Ohm Platinum RRTD 1 NAME: RRTD1 RRTD 1 ALARM: Off
Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel,
120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Platinum; only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
Range: 8 character alphanumeric;

only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations; Alarm
RRTD 1 ALARM LEVEL: 130 C RRTD 1 HI ALARM: Off RRTD1 HI ALARM RELAY: Aux1 RRTD 1 HI ALARM LEVEL: 130 C




RECORD RRTD 1 ALARMS Range: No, Yes; only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None AS EVENTS: No RRTD 1 TRIP: Off RRTD 1 TRIP RELAYS: Trip RRTD 1 TRIP LEVEL: 130 C ENABLE RRTD 1 TRIP VOTING: Off REMOTE RTD 2
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations;


Range: Off, RRTD 1-12, All Stator;

5-53
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE REMOTE RTD 12
5 SETPOINTS
5-54
5 SETPOINTS Local / Remote RTD Operation:
Application: Each individual RTD may be assigned an application. A setting of None effectively turns that individual RTD off. Only RTDs with the application set to Stator are used for RTD biasing of the thermal model. If an RTDs application is set to Ambient this RTD temperature will be used in calculating the learned cool time of the motor. Type: Each RTD is individually assigned the type of RTD that is connected to it. Multiple types may be used with a single 369. Name: Each RTD may have up to an 8 character name assigned to it. This name will be used in alarm and trip messages. Alarm/Hi Alarm/Trip: Each RTD can be programmed for separate Alarm, Hi Alarm and Trip levels and relays. Trips are automatically stored as events. Alarms and Hi Alarms are stored as events only if the Record Alarms as Events setpoint for that RTD is set to Yes. Trip Voting: This feature has been included for added RTD trip reliability in situations where RTD malfunction and nuisance tripping is common. If enabled that RTD will only trip if the RTD or RTDs listed to be voted with are also above their trip level. For example if RTD 1 is set to vote with All Stator RTDs, it will only trip if RTD 1 is above its trip level and any one of the other stator RTDs is also above its own trip level. RTD voting is typically only used on Stator RTDs and typically done between adjacent RTDs to detect hot spots. Stator RTDs can detect heating due to non overload (current) conditions such as blocked or inadequate cooling and ventilation or high ambient temperature as well as heating due to overload conditions. Bearing or other RTDs can detect overheating of bearings or auxiliary equipment. Table 52: RTD RESISTANCE TO TEMPERATURE TEMP Celsius -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 TEMP Fahrenheit -40 -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 140 158 176 194 212 230 248 266 284 302 320 338 356 374 392 100 OHM Pt (DIN 43760) 84.27 88.22 92.16 96.09 100.00 103.90 107.79 111.67 115.54 119.39 123.24 127.07 130.89 134.70 138.50 142.29 146.06 149.82 153.58 157.32 161.04 164.76 168.47 172.46 175.84 120 OHM Ni 92.76 99.41 106.15 113.00 120.00 127.17 134.52 142.06 149.79 157.74 165.90 174.25 182.84 191.64 200.64 209.85 219.29 228.96 238.85 248.95 259.30 269.91 280.77 291.96 303.46 100 OHM Ni 79.13 84.15 89.23 94.58 100.0 105.6 111.2 117.1 123.0 129.1 135.3 141.7 148.3 154.9 161.8 168.8 176.0 183.3 190.9 198.7 206.6 214.8 223.2 231.6 240.0 10 OHM Cu 7.49 7.88 8.26 8.65 9.04 9.42 9.81 10.19 10.58 10.97 11.35 11.74 12.12 12.51 12.90 13.28 13.67 14.06 14.44 14.83 15.22 15.61 16.00 16.39 16.78
5-55
5 SETPOINTS 5.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM
OPEN RTD ALARM
OPEN RTD ALARM
OPEN RTD ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations Alarm OPEN RTD ALARM EVENTS: Off FUNCTION: The 369 has an Open RTD Sensor Alarm. This alarm will look at all RTDs that have been assigned an application other than None and determine if an RTD connection has been broken. When a broken sensor is detected, the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that is broken. It is recommended that if this feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken. 5.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
Range: Off, On
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations Alarm SHORT/LOW TEMP ALARM Range: Off, On EVENTS: Off FUNCTION: The 369 has an RTD Short/Low Temperature alarm. This alarm will look at all RTDs that have an application other than None and determine if an RTD has either a short or a very low temperature (less than -40 C). When a short/low temperature is detected, the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that caused the alarm. It is recommended that if this feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken.
5-56
5 SETPOINTS
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM: OFF
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations Alarm LOSS OF RRTD COMMS EVENTS: Off FUNCTION: The 369, if connected to a RRTD module, will monitor communications between them. If for some reason communications is lost or interrupted the 369 can issue an alarm indicating the failure. This feature is useful to ensure that the remote RTDs are continuously being monitored.
Range: Off, On
5-57
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
S7 SETPOINTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
UNDERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL UNDERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY
These elements are only seen if the 369 has option M or B installed.
5-58
5 SETPOINTS
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
UNDERVOLTAGE
UNDERVOLTAGE
U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR STOPPED: No UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM: Off
Range: No, Yes Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm STARTING U/V ALARM PICKUP: 0.85xRATED RUNNING U/V ALARM PICKUP: 0.85xRATED UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM DELAY: 3.0 S UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM EVENTS: Off UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip STARTING U/V TRIP PICKUP: 0.80xRATED RUNNING U/V TRIP PICKUP: 0.80xRATED UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP DELAY: 1.0s FUNCTION: If the undervoltage alarm or trip feature is enabled, once the magnitude of either Va, Vb, or Vc falls below the running pickup level while running or the starting pickup level while starting, for a period of time specified by the alarm or trip delay, a trip or alarm will occur. (Pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage). An undervoltage on a running motor with a constant load will result in increased current. The relay thermal model will typically pickup this condition and provide adequate protection. This setpoint may however, be used in conjunction with the time delay to provide additional protection that may be programmed for advance warning by tripping. The U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR STOPPED setpoint may be used to prevent nuisance alarms or trips when the motor is stopped. If No is programmed the undervoltage element will be blocked from operating whenever the motor is stopped (no phase current and starter status indicates breaker or contactor open). If the load is high inertia, it may be desirable to ensure that the motor is tripped off line or prevented from starting in the event of a total loss or decrease in line voltage. Programming Yes for the block setpoint will ensure that the motor is tripped and may be restarted only after the bus is re-energized. APPLICATION: An undervoltage of significant proportions that persists while starting a synchronous motor may prevent the motor from coming up to rated speed within the rated time. An undervoltage may be an indication of a system fault. To protect a synchronous motor from being restarted while out of step it may be necessary to use undervoltage to take the motor offline before a reclose is attempted.
Range: 0.50 - 0.99 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.50 - 0.99 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1 Range: Off, On Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Range: 0.50 - 0.99 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.50 - 0.99 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.0 - 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
5-59
5 SETPOINTS 5.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE
OVERVOLTAGE
OVERVOLTAGE
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm OVERVOLTAGE ALARM PICKUP: 1.05xRATED OVERVOLTAGE ALARM DELAY: 3.0s OVERVOLTAGE ALARM EVENTS: Off OVERVOLTAGE TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip
Range: 0.0 - 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: Off, On
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
5
FUNCTION:
OVERVOLTAGE TRIP PICKUP: 1.10xRATED OVERVOLTAGE TRIP DELAY: 1.0s
If enabled, once the magnitude of either Va, Vb, or Vc rises above the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the Delay, a trip or alarm will occur. (Pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage). An overvoltage on running motor with a constant load will result in decreased current. However, iron and copper losses increase, causing an increase in motor temperature. The current overload relay will not pickup this condition and provide adequate protection. Therefore, the overvoltage element may be useful for protecting the motor in the event of a sustained overvoltage condition.
5-60
5 SETPOINTS
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL
PHASE REVERSAL
PHASE REVERSAL
PHASE REVERSAL TRIP: Off
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip FUNCTION:
The 369 can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltage. If the phase reversal feature is turned on when all 3 phase voltages are greater than 50% motor nameplate voltage and the phase rotation of the three phase voltages is not the same as the setpoint, a trip and block start will occur in 500ms to 700ms. NOTE: This feature does not work when single VT operation is enabled.
5-61
5 SETPOINTS 5.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY
UNDERFREQUENCY
UNDERFREQUENCY
BLOCK UNDERFREQUENCY Range: 0 - 5000 s in steps of 1 FROM START: UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM:

ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01 LEVEL: 59.50 Hz UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: 0.0 - 255.0 s in steps of 0.1 DELAY: 1.0s UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: Off, On EVENTS: Off UNDERFREQUENCY TRIP: Off
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip UNDERFREQUENCY TRIP LEVEL: 59.50 Hz UNDERFREQUENCY TRIP DELAY: 1.0s FUNCTION:
Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01
Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) falls below the underfrequency pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur. APPLICATION: This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entire feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker. Underfrequency can also be used to detect loss of power to a synchronous motor. The voltage may remain long enough (due to motor generation) that to quickly detect the loss of system power, the decaying frequency of the generated voltage as the motor slows can be used. The Underfrequency element is only active when the motor is running.
5-62
5 SETPOINTS
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQUENCY
BLOCK OVERFREQUENCY FROM START: OVERFREQUENCY ALARM:
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm OVERFREQUENCY ALARM LEVEL: 60.50 Hz OVERFREQUENCY ALARM DELAY: 1.0s OVERFREQUENCY ALARM EVENTS: Off OVERFREQUENCY TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip OVERFREQUENCY TRIP LEVEL: 60.50 Hz OVERFREQUENCY TRIP DELAY: 1.0s FUNCTION: Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) rises above the overfrequency pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur. APPLICATION: This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entire feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker. The Overfrequency element is only active when the motor is running.
Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01
Range: Off, On
Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01
5-63
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
S8 SETPOINTS POWER ELEMENTS
LEAD POWER FACTOR LAG POWER FACTOR POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER (kvar) NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER (kvar) UNDERPOWER REVERSE POWER
These protective elements rely on CTs and VTs being installed and setpoints programmed. The power elements are only shown if the 369 has option M or B installed.
By convention, an induction motor consumes Watts and vars. This condition is displayed on the 369 as +Watts and +vars. A synchronous motor can consume Watts and vars or consume Watts and generate vars. These conditions are displayed on the 369 as +Watts, +vars, and +Watts, -vars respectively.
5-64
5 SETPOINTS
5-65
5 SETPOINTS 5.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS
LEAD POWER FACTOR
LEAD POWER FACTOR
BLOCK LEAD PF FROM START: 1 s LEAD POWER FACTOR ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm LEAD POWER FACTOR ALARM LEVEL: 0.30 LEAD POWER FACTOR ALARM DELAY: 1.0s LEAD POWER FACTOR ALARM EVENTS: Off LEAD POWER FACTOR TRIP: Off
Range: 0.99-0.05 in steps of 0.01
Range: Off, On
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip LEAD POWER FACTOR TRIP LEVEL: 0.30 LEAD POWER FACTOR TRIP DELAY: 1.0s FUNCTION:
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has been applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lead level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a lead condition. APPLICATION: The lead power factor alarm can be used to detect over-excitation or loss of load.
5-66
5 SETPOINTS
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR
LAG POWER FACTOR
LAG POWER FACTOR
BLOCK LAG PF FROM START: 1 s LAG POWER FACTOR ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations Alarm LAG POWER FACTOR ALARM LEVEL: 0.85 LAG POWER FACTOR ALARM DELAY: 1.0s LAG POWER FACTOR ALARM EVENTS: Off LAG POWER FACTOR TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip LAG POWER FACTOR TRIP LEVEL: 0.80 LAG POWER FACTOR TRIP DELAY: 1.0s FUNCTION: If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has been applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lag level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating lag condition. APPLICATION: The power factor alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step for a synchronous motor.
Range: Off, On
5-67
5 SETPOINTS 5.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER (kvar)
BLOCK +kvar ELEMENT FROM START: 1 s POSITIVE kvar ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm POSITIVE kvar ALARM LEVEL: 10 kvar POSITIVE kvar ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s POSITIVE kvar ALARM EVENTS: Off POSITIVE kvar TRIP:
Range: 1 - 25000 kvar in steps of 1
Range: Off, On
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip POSITIVE kvar TRIP LEVEL: 25 kvar POSITIVE kvar TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s FUNCTION:
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward, the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the positive level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a positive kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step.
5-68
5 SETPOINTS
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER (kvar)
BLOCK -kvar ELEMENT FROM START: 1s NEGATIVE kvar ALARM:
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm NEGATIVE kvar ALARM LEVEL: 10 kvar NEGATIVE kvar ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s NEGATIVE kvar ALARM EVENTS: Off NEGATIVE kvar TRIP: ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip NEGATIVE kvar TRIP LEVEL: 25 kvar NEGATIVE kvar TRIP DELAY: 1.0s FUNCTION: If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward, the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the negative level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a negative kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect over-excitation or loss of load.
Range: Off, On
5-69
5 SETPOINTS 5.9.6 UNDERPOWER
UNDERPOWER
UNDERPOWER
BLOCK UNDERPOWER FROM START: 1s UNDERPOWER ALARM:
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Alarm UNDERPOWER ALARM LEVEL: 2 kW UNDERPOWER ALARM DELAY: 1 s UNDERPOWER ALARM EVENTS: Off UNDERPOWER TRIP: Off
Range: 1 - 25000 kW in steps of 1
Range: Off, On
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip UNDERPOWER TRIP LEVEL: 1 kW UNDERPOWER TRIP DELAY: 1 s FUNCTION:
If enabled, once the magnitude of 3 total real power falls below the pickup level for a period of time specified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur. The underpower element is active only when the motor is running and will be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time defined by the block underpower from start setpoint (e.g. this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the underpower element trips or alarms). A value of 0 means the feature is not blocked from start. If a value other than 0 is entered, the feature will be disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires. The pickup level should be set lower than motor loading during normal operations. APPLICATION: Underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions. Loss of load conditions will not always cause a significant loss of current. Power is a more accurate representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive detection of load loss or pump cavitation. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.
5-70
5 SETPOINTS
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5.9.7 REVERSE POWER
REVERSE POWER
REVERSE POWER
BLOCK REVERSE POWER FROM START: 1 s REVERSE POWER ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combination Alarm REVERSE POWER ALARM LEVEL: 1 kW REVERSE POWER ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s REVERSE POWER ALARM EVENTS: Off REVERSE POWER TRIP: ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip REVERSE POWER TRIP LEVEL: 1 kW REVERSE POWER TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: Off, On
Range: 1-25000 kW in steps of 1
Range: 0.5 - 30 s in steps of 0.5
If enabled, once the magnitude of 3 total power exceeds the pickup level in the reverse direction (negative kW) for a period of time specified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur. NOTE: The minimum magnitude of power measurement is determined by the phase CT minimum of 5% rated CT primary. If the level for reverse power is set below that level, a trip or alarm will only occur once the phase current exceeds the 5% cutoff.
5-71
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
S9 SETPOINTS DIGITAL INPUTS
SPARE SWITCH EMERGENCY RESTART DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH SPEED SWITCH REMOTE RESET
Note: The Access switch is predefined and is non programmable.
5-72
5 SETPOINTS
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5.10.2 SPARE SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
SPARE SWITCH
SPARE SWITCH
SPARE SW FUNCTION: Off
Range: Off, Starter Status, General, Digital Counter, Waveform Capture, Simulate PreFault, Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
STARTER AUX CONTACT TYPE: 52a
Range: 52a, 52b Only seen if function is Starter Status
In addition to the normal selections, the Spare Switch may be used as a starter status contact input. An auxiliary a type contact follows the state of the main contactor or breaker and an auxiliary b type contact is in the opposite state. This feature is recommended for use on all motors. It is essential for proper operation of start inhibits, especially when the motor may be run lightly or unloaded. The CTs may not be able to pick up the reduced current levels. This is more common on synchronous motor applications. 5.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS EMERGENCY RESTART
EMERGENCY RESTART
EMERGENCY FUNCTION: Emergency Restart
Range: Off, Emergency Restart, General, Digital Counter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault, Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
In addition to the normal selections, the Emergency Restart Switch may be used as a emergency restart input to the 369 to override protection for the motor. When the emergency restart switch is closed all trip and alarm functions are reset. Thermal capacity used is set to zero and all protective elements are disabled until the switch is opened. Starts per hour are also reduced by one each time the switch is closed. The display will state Emergency Restart Override while this switch is closed if assigned to Emergency Restart. 5.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
DIFF SW FUNCTION: Differential Switch
Range: Off, Differential Switch, General, Digital Counter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault, Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
ASSIGN DIFF RELAY: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Only seen if function is Differential Switch
In addition to the normal selections, the Differential Switch may be used as a contact input for a separate external 86 (differential trip) relay. Contact closure will cause the 369 relay to issue a differential trip.
5-73
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5 SETPOINTS 5.10.5 SPEED SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
SPEED SWITCH
SPEED SWITCH
SPEED SW FUNCTION: Speed Switch
Range: Off, Speed Switch, General, Digital Counter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault, Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
SPEED SW TRIP RELAY: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations Only seen if function is Speed Switch Trip SPEED SWITCH TIME DELAY: 2.0s
Range: 0.5 - 100.0s in steps of 0.5 Only seen if function is Speed Switch
In addition to the normal selections, the Speed Switch may be used as an input for an external speed switch. This allows the 369 to utilize a speed device for locked rotor protection. During a motor start, if no contact closure occurs within the programmed time delay, a trip will occur. The speed input must be opened for a speed switch trip to be reset. 5.10.6 REMOTE RESET
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS REMOTE RESET
REMOTE RESET
REMOTE SW FUNCTION: Remote Reset
Range: Off, Remote Reset, General, Digital Counter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault, Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
In addition to the normal selections, the Remote Reset may be used as a contact input to reset the relay.
5-74
5 SETPOINTS
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5.10.7 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS
a) GENERAL xxxxx SW FUNCTION: General GENERAL SWITCH NAME: General GENERAL SWITCH TYPE: NO BLOCK INPUT FROM START: 0 s GENERAL SWITCH ALARM: Off
Range: 12 character alphanumeric Only seen if function is selected as General Range: NO (normally open), NC (normally closed) Only seen if function is selected as General Range: 0 - 5000 s in steps of 1 Only seen if function is selected as General Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched Only seen if function is selected as General
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them. Only seen if function is selected as General Alarm GENERAL SWITCH ALARM DELAY: 5.0 s RECORD ALARMS AS EVENTS: No GENERAL SWITCH TRIP: Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip GENERAL SWITCH TRIP DELAY: 5.0 s
Range: 0.1 - 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1 Only seen if function is selected as General Range: No, Yes Only seen if function is selected as General Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched Only seen if function is selected as General Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them. Only seen if function is selected as General Range: 0.1 - 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1 Only seen if function is selected as General
Any of the programmable digital inputs may be selected and programmed as a separate General Switch Input.
5-75
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS b) DIGITAL COUNTER DIGITAL COUNTER COUNTER NAME: Counter COUNTER UNITS: Units COUNTER TYPE: Increment DIGITAL COUNTER ALARM: Off
5 SETPOINTS
Range: 8 character alphanumeric Only seen if function is Digital Counter Range: 6 character alphanumeric Only seen if function is Digital Counter Range: Increment, Decrement Only seen if function is Digital Counter Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched Only seen if function is Digital Counter
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None,Alarm,Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Only seen if function is Digital Counter Alarm COUNTER ALARM LEVEL: Range: 0 - 65535 in steps of 1 Only seen if function is Digital Counter 100 RECORD ALARMS AS EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes Only seen if function is Digital Counter
Only one digital input may be selected as a digital counter at a time. User defined units and counter name may be defined and these will appear on all counter related actual value and alarm messages. To clear a digital counter alarm, the alarm level must be increased or the counter must be cleared or preset to a lower value. c) WAVEFORM CAPTURE The Waveform Capture setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to capture a waveform upon command (contact closure). The captured waveforms can then be displayed via the 369PC program. d) SIMULATE PRE-FAULT The Simulate Pre-Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the pre-fault settings as programmed. This is typically used for relay or system testing. e) SIMULATE FAULT The Simulate Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the fault settings as programmed. This is typically used for relay or system testing. f) SIMULATE PRE-FAULT to FAULT The Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the pre-fault to fault settings as programmed. This is typically used for relay or system testing.
5-76
5 SETPOINTS 5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5.11.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 10 MENU
S10 SETPOINTS ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 2 ANALOG OUTPUT 3 ANALOG OUTPUT 4
5.11.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS

PATH: S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1,2,3,4
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
ANALOG OUTPUT 1: DISABLED ANALOG OUTPUT 1 RANGE: 0-1 mA ANALOG OUTOUT 1 Phase A Current ANALOG OUTOUT 1 MIN: 0 A ANALOG OUTOUT 1 MAX: 100 A
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: 0 - 1mA, 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA.
Range: See Analog Output selection table
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
See Analog Output 1 for details
ANALOG OUTPUT 3
ANALOG OUTPUT 4
5-77
5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
5 SETPOINTS 5.11.3 ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION
Table 53: ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS

PARAMETER NAME Phase A Current Phase B Current Phase C Current Avg. Phase Current AB Line Voltage BC Line Voltage CA Line Voltage Avg. Line Voltage Phase AN Voltage Phase BN Voltage Phase CN Voltage Avg. Phase Voltage Hottest Stator RTD RTD #1 - 12 Remote RTD #1 - 12 RANGE /UNITS 0-65535 AMPS 0-65535 AMPS 0-65535 AMPS 0-65535 AMPS 50-20000 VOLTS 50-20000 VOLTS 50-20000 VOLTS 50-20000 VOLTS 50-20000 VOLTS 50-20000 VOLTS 50-20000 VOLTS 50-20000 VOLTS -40 to +200oC or -40 to +392oF -40 to +200oC +200oC or -40 to +392oF +392oF Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.001 0 0 0 0 3200 3200 3200 3200 1900 1900 1900 1900 0 -40 -40 0.8 lag 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.00 50.000 DEFAULT Minimum Maximum 100 100 100 100 4500 4500 4500 4500 2500 2500 2500 2500 200 200 200 0.8lead 750 1000 1250 100 150 700 1000 1250 1500 1.25 100.000
Power Factor Reactive Power Real Power Apparent Power Thermal Capacity Used Relay Lockout Time Current Demand kvar Demand kW Demand kVA Demand Motor Load MWhrs
-40 to or -40 to 0.01 to 1.00 lead/lag -30000 to 30000 kvar -30000 to 30000 kW 0 to 50000 kVA 0-100% 0-500 MINUTES 0-65535 AMPS 0 -50000 kvar 0 -50000 kW 0 -50000 kVA 0.00 - 20.00 x FLA
0.000 to 999999.999 MWhrs
5-78
5 SETPOINTS 5.12 S11 369 TESTING
5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5.12.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 11 MENU
S11 SETPOINTS 369 TESTING
SIMULATION MODE PRE-FAULT SETUP FAULT SETUP FORCE OUPUT RELAYS FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS
5.12.2 SIMULATION MODE

PATH: S11 369 TESTING SIMULATION MODE
SIMULATION MODE
SIMULATION MODE: Off
Range: Off, Pre-Fault, Fault, Pre-Fault to Fault
5
PRE-FAULT TO FAULT TIME DELAY: 10 s
Range: 0 - 300 s in steps of 1 Only shown if in Pre-Fault to Fault mode
The 369 may be placed in several simulation modes. This simulation may be useful for several purposes. First, it may be used to understand the operation of the 369 for learning or training purposes. Second, simulation may be used during startup to verify that control circuitry operates as it should in the event of a trip, alarm, or block start. In addition, simulation may be used to verify that setpoints had been set properly in the event of fault conditions. Simulation mode may be entered only if the motor is stopped and there are no trips, alarms, or block starts active. The values entered as Pre-Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in the 369 when the simulation mode is 'Simulate Pre-Fault'. The values entered as Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in the 369 when the simulation mode is 'Simulate Fault'. If the simulation mode: Pre-Fault to Fault is selected, the Pre-Fault values will be substituted for the period of time specified by the delay, followed by the Fault values. If a trip occurs, simulation mode will revert to Off. Selecting 'Off' for the simulation mode will also place the 369 back in service. If the 369 measures phase current or control power is cycled, simulation mode will automatically revert to Off.
5-79
5 SETPOINTS 5.12.3 PRE-FAULT SETUP
PATH: S11 369 TESTING
PRE-FAULT SETUP
PRE-FAULT SETUP:
PRE-FAULT CURRENT PHASE A: 0.00x CT PRE-FAULT CURRENT PHASE B: 0.00x CT PRE-FAULT CURRENT PHASE C: 0.00x CT PRE-FAULT CURRENT GROUND: 0.0 A
Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.0 - 5000.0 A in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A), 0.00 - 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 for 50: 0.025 CT
PRE-FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 - 1.10 in steps of 0.01 PHASE A: 0.00x RATED PRE-FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 - 1.10 in steps of 0.01 PHASE B: 0.00x RATED PRE-FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 - 1.10 in steps of 0.01 PHASE C: 0.00x RATED
PRE-FAULT CURRENT LAGS VOLTAGE: 0 PRE-FAULT SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 60.0 Hz
Range: 0 - 359 in steps of 1
Range: 25.0 - 70.0 Hz in steps of 0.1
PRE-FAULT STATOR RTD Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1 TEMPERATURE: 40 PRE-FAULT BEARING RTD TEMP: 40 PRE-FAULT OTHER RTD TEMPERATURE: 40 PRE-FAULT AMBIENT RTD TEMP: 40
Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1 Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1 Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1
The values entered under Pre-Fault Setup will be substituted for the real metred values when the simulation mode is in Pre-Fault mode.
5-80
5 SETPOINTS
5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5.12.4 FAULT SETUP
FAULT SETUP
FAULT SETUP:
FAULT CURRENT PHASE A: 0.00x CT FAULT CURRENT PHASE B: 0.00x CT FAULT CURRENT PHASE C: 0.00x CT FAULT CURRENT GROUND: 0.0 A
Range: 0.0-5000.0 A in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A), 0.00 - 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 for 50: 0.025 CT
FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 -1.10 in steps of 0.01 PHASE A: 0.00x RATED FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 - 1.10 in steps of 0.01 PHASE B: 0.00x RATED FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 - 1.10 in steps of 0.01 PHASE C: 0.00x RATED FAULT CURRENT LAGS VOLTAGE: 0 FAULT SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 60.0 Hz FAULT STATOR RTD TEMPERATURE: 40 FAULT BEARING RTD TEMPERATURE: 40 FAULT OTHER RTD TEMPERATURE: 40 FAULT AMBIENT RTD TEMPERATURE: 40
Range: 0 - 359 o in steps of 1
Range: 25.0 - 70.0 Hz in steps of 0.1
Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1 Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1 Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1 Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1
The values entered under Fault Setup will be substituted for the real metered values when the simulation mode is in Fault mode.
5-81
5 SETPOINTS 5.12.5 FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
FORCE TRIP RELAY: Disabled FORCE TRIP RELAY DURATION: Static FORCE AUX1 RELAY: Disabled FORCE AUX1 RELAY DURATION: Static FORCE AUX2 RELAY: Disabled FORCE AUX2 RELAY: DURATION: Static FORCE ALARM RELAY: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized
Range: Static, 1-300 s in steps of 1
FORCE ALARM RELAY DURATION: Static
The Test Output Relay feature provides a method of performing checks on all relay contact outputs. The feature can also be used for control purposes while the motor is running. The forced state overrides the normal operation of the relay output. The forced state if enabled (energized or de-energized) will force the selected relay into the programmed state for as long as the programmed duration. After the programmed duration expires the forced state will return to disabled and relay operation will return to normal. If the duration is programmed as Static the forced state will remain in effect until changed or disabled. If control power to the 369 is interrupted, any forced relay condition will be removed.
5-82
5 SETPOINTS
5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5.12.6 FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS
FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS
FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS
FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: Off FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 2: Off FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 3: Off FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 4: Off
Range: Off, 1 - 100% in steps of 1%
In addition to the simulation modes, the Force Analog Output setpoints may be used during startup or testing to verify that the analog outputs are functioning correctly. It may also be used when the motor is running to give manual or communication control of an analog output. Forcing an analog output overrides its normal functionality. When the Force Analog Outputs Function is enabled, the output will reflect the forced value as a percentage of the range 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, or 0-1 mA. Selecting Off will place the analog output channels back in service, reflecting the parameters programmed to each.
5-83
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
A1 ACTUAL VALUES STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
LAST TRIP DATA
ALARM STATUS START INHIBIT STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
REAL TIME CLOCK
A2 ACTUAL VALUES METERING DATA
CURRENT METERING
VOLTAGE METERING
POWER METERING LOCAL RTD REMOTE RTD DEMAND METERING
PHASORS
A3 ACTUAL VALUES LEARNED DATA
MOTOR DATA
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW A4 ACTUAL VALUES STATISTICAL DATA TRIP COUNTERS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MOTOR STATISTICS
A5 ACTUAL VALUES EVENT RECORD
EVENT: 40
EVENT: 39
EVENT: 2
EVENT: 1
A6 ACTUAL VALUES RELAY INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
FIRMWARE VERSION
6-2
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2 A1 STATUS 6.2.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 1 MENU
A1 ACTUAL VALUES STATUS
MOTOR STATUS LAST TRIP DATA ALARM STATUS START INHIBIT STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS OUTPUT RELAY STATUS REAL TIME CLOCK
6-3
6.2 A1 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.2 MOTOR STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
MOTOR STATUS: Stopped MOTOR THERMAL CAPACITY USED: 0% ESTIMATED TRIP TIME ON OVERLOAD: Never
Range: Stopped, Starting, Running, Overload, Tripped Range: 0-100% in steps of 1%
Range: Never, 0-65500s in steps of 1
These messages describe the status of the motor at the current point in time. The Motor Status message indicates the current state of the motor.
Motor State Stopped Starting Running Overload Tripped
Definition phase current = 0 Amps and starter status input = breaker/contactor closed motor previously stopped and phase current has gone from 0 to >FLA phase current >0 and <FLA or starter status input = breaker/contactor closed and motor was previouly running motor previously running and phase current now > FLA a trip has been issued and not cleared
The Motor Thermal Capacity Used message indicates the current level which is used by the overload and cooling algorithms. The Estimated Trip Time On Overload is only active for the Overload motor status.
6-4
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 A1 STATUS 6.2.3 LAST TRIP DATA
PATH: A1 STATUS
LAST TRIP DATA
LAST TRIP DATA
CAUSE OF LAST TRIP: No Trip to date TIME OF LAST TRIP: 00:00:00 DATE OF LAST TRIP: Jan 01 1999 A: 0 C: 0
A: 0 : 0
Range: No Trip to Date, cause of trip
Range: hour : min : seconds
Range: month day year
B: 0 A Pretrip
Range: 0-100000 A in steps of 1
MOTOR LOAD Pretrip 0.00 x FLA CURRENT UNBALANCE Pretrip: 0% GROUND CURRENT Pretrip: 0.00 Amps HOTTEST STATOR RTD RTD#1 0C Pretrip Vab: 0 Vbc: 0 Vca: 0 V Pretrip Van: 0 Vbn: 0 Vcn: 0 V Pretrip SYSTEM FREQUENCY Pretrip: 0.00 Hz 0 kW 0 kVA 0 kvar Pretrip POWER FACTOR Pretrip: 1.00
Range: 0-100 % in steps of 1 %
Range: 0.0-5000.0 in steps of 0.1 for 1A/5A CT, 0.00 - 25.00 in steps of 0.01 for 50 : 0.025 A CT Range: -40 to +200 in steps of 1 Only shown if a stator RTD is programmed Range: 0-20000 in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection is programmed Range: 0-20000 in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection is Wye Range: 0.00, 15.00-120.00 in steps of 0.01 Only shown if VT connection is programmed Range: -50000 to +50000 in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection is programmed Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 lead Only shown if VT connection is programmed
Immediately prior to a trip, the 369 takes a snapshot of the metered parameters along with the cause of trip and the date and time and stores this as pre-trip values. This allows for ease of troubleshooting when a trip occurs. Instantaneous trips on starting (<50ms) may not allow all values to be captured. These values are overwritten when the next trip occurs. The event record shows details of the last 40 events including trips.
6-5
6.2 A1 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.4 ALARM STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS
ALARM STATUS
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
No Trips or Alarms are Active
Range: No Trips or Alarms are Active, active alarm name and level, active trip name
Any active trips or alarms may be viewed here. If there is more than one active trip or alarm, using the Line Up and Down keys will cycle through all the active alarm messages. If the Line Up and Down keys are not pressed, the active messages will automatically cycle. The current level causing the alarm is displayed along with the alarm name.
6.2.5 START INHIBIT STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS START INHIBIT STATUS
START INHIBIT STATUS
NO START INHIBITS ACTIVE OVERLOAD LOCKOUT TIMER: 0 min START INHIBIT TIMER: 0 min STARTS/HOUR TIMERS: 0 0 0 0 0 min
Range: n/a Only shown when all inhibits are inactive Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1 Only shown after an overload trip Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1 Only shown if START INHIBIT enabled Range: 1-60 min in steps of 1 Only shown if STARTS PER HOUR enabled Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1 Only shown if TIME BETWEEN STARTS Range: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1 Only shown if RESTART BLOCK enabled Range: 1 - 255 min steps of 1 Only shown if BSD enabled
TIME BETWEEN STARTS TIMER: 0 min RESTART BLOCK TIMER: 0 s BACKSPIN TIMER: 20 min
Overload Lockout Timer: Determined from the thermal model, this is the remaining amount of time left before the thermal capacity available will be sufficient to allow another start and the start inhibit will be removed. Start Inhibit Timer: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time for the Thermal Capacity to reduce to a level to allow for a safe start according to the Start Inhibit setpoints. Time Between Starts Timer: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time from the last start before the start inhibit will be removed and another start may be attempted. This time is measure from the beginning of the last motor start. Starts/Hour Timer: If enabled this display will indicate the number of starts within the last hour by showing the time remaining in each. The oldest start will be on the left. Once the time of one start reaches 0, it is no longer considered a start within the hour and is removed from the display and any remaining starts are shifted over to the left. Backspin Timer: This timer is only available with the B option. It is the time the motor will be blocked from starting while backspinning.
6-6
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 A1 STATUS
Restart Block Timer: If enabled this display will reflect the amount of time since the last motor stop before the start block will be removed and another start may be attempted.
6.2.6 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
EMERGENCY RESTART: Open DIFFERENTIAL RELAY: Open SPEED SWITCH: Open RESET: Open ACCESS: Open SPARE: Open
Range: Open, Closed Note: Programmed input name displayed Range: Open, Closed Note: Programmed input name displayed Range: Open, Closed Note: Programmed input name displayed Range: Open, Closed Note: Programmed input name displayed Range: Open, Closed Note: Programmed input name displayed Range: Open, Closed Note: Programmed input name displayed
The current state of the digital inputs will be displayed here.
6.2.7 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
TRIP: Deenergized
Range: Energized, Deenergized, Forced
ALARM: Deenergized
AUX 1: Deenergized
AUX 2: Deenergized
The current state of the output relays will be displayed here. Energized indicates that the NO contacts are now closed and the NC contacts are now open. De-energized indicates that the NO contacts are now open and the NC contacts are now closed. Forced indicates that the output relay has been commanded into a certain state.
6-7
6.2 A1 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.8 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: A1 STATUS
REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK
DATE: 01/01/1999 TIME: 00:00:00
Range: month/day/year, hour: minute: second
The date and time from the 369 real time clock may be viewed here.
6-8
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6.3.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 2 MENU
A2 ACTUAL VALUES METERING DATA
CURRENT METERING VOLTAGE METERING POWER METERING LOCAL RTD REMOTE RTD DEMAND METERING PHASORS
6.3.2 CURRENT METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING
CURRENT METERING
A: 0 C: 0
A: 0 : 0
B: 0 Amps
AVERAGE PHASE CURRENT: 0 Amps MOTOR LOAD: 0.00 X FLA CURRENT UNBALANCE: 0% GROUND CURRENT: 0.0 Amps
Range: 0 - 100 % in steps of 1 %
Range: 0.0 - 5000.0 in steps of 0.1 for 1A/ 5A CT, 0.0 - 25.0 in steps of 0.1 for
All measured current values are displayed here. Note that the unblance level is derated below FLA. See the unbalance setpoint for more details.
6-9
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.3 VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA
VOLTAGE METERING
VOLTAGE METERING
Vab: 0 Vca: 0
Vbc: 0 V RMS -
Range: 0-20000 V in steps of 1 Only shown if a VT connection programmed Range: 0-20000 V in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-20000 V in steps of 1 Only shown if a Wye VT connection proRange: 0-20000 V in steps of 1 Only shown if a Wye VT connection proRange: 0.00, 15.00 - 120.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
AVERAGE LINE VOLTAGE: 0 V Va: 0 Vc: 0 Vb: 0 V RMS -N
AVERAGE PHASE VOLTAGE: 0 V SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz BACKSPIN FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz
Range: 2 - 120 Hz in steps of 0.01 Only shown if option B installed
Measured voltage parameters will be displayed here. If option M or B has not been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section. THIS FEATURE NOT INSTALLED
6-10
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6.3.4 POWER METERING
POWER METERING
POWER METERING
POWER FACTOR: 1.00 REAL POWER: 0 kW REAL POWER: 0 hp REACTIVE POWER: 0 kvar APPARENT POWER: 0 kVA POSITIVE WATTHOURS: 0.000 MWh POSITIVE VARHOURS: 0.000 MVarh NEGATIVE VARHOURS: 0.000 MVarh
Range: 0.00-1.00 lag or lead Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-50000 kW in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-65000 hp in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-50000 kvar in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-50000 kVA in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0.000-999999.999 in steps of .001 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0.000-999999.999 in steps of .001 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0.000-999999.999 in steps of .001 Only shown if VT connection programmed
The values for three phase power metering, consumption and generation will be displayed here. If option M or B has not been installed the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section. THIS FEATURE NOT INSTALLED
6-11
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.5 LOCAL RTD
LOCAL RTD
LOCAL RTD
HOTTEST STATOR RTD NUMBER: 1 HOTTEST STATOR RTD TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #1 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #2 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #3 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #4 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #5 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #6 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #7 TEMPERATURE: 40C
Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1
Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #8 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #9 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #10 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #11 TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #12 TEMPERATURE: 40C
The temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. If option R has not been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section. THIS FEATURE NOT INSTALLED
6-12
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6.3.6 REMOTE RTD
REMOTE RTD
REMOTE RTD
HOTTEST STATOR RRTD NUMBER: 1 HOTTEST STATOR RTD TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #1 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #2 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #3 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #4 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #5 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #6 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #7 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #8 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #9 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #10 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #11 TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #12 TEMPERATURE: 40C
Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1
Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
The temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if programmed and connected to a RRTD module. The name of each RRTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. If option R has not been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section. THIS FEATURE NOT INSTALLED If communications with the RRTD module is lost, the following message will appear:. RRTD MODULE COMMUNICATIONS LOST
6-13
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.7 DEMAND METERING
DEMAND METERING
DEMAND METERING
CURRENT DEMAND: 0 Amps REAL POWER DEMAND: 0 kW REACTIVE POWER DEMAND: 0 kvar APPARENT POWER DEMAND: 0 kVA PEAK CURRENT DEMAND: 0 Amps PEAK REAL POWER DEMAND: 0 kW PEAK REACTIVE POWER DEMAND: 0 kvar PEAK APPARENT POWER DEMAND: 0 kVA
Range: 0-50000 kW in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: -32000-32000 kvar in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-50000 kVA in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-65535 A in steps of 1
Range: 0-50000 kW in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: -32000-32000 kvar in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0-50000 kVA in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed
The values for current and power demand are displayed here. Peak demand information can be cleared using the CLEAR PEAK DEMAND command located in S1 369 SETUP under CLEAR/PRESET DATA. Demand is only shown for positive real (kW) and reactive (kvar) powers. Only the current demand will be visible if options M or B are not installed.
6-14
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6.3.8 PHASORS
PHASORS
PHASORS
Ia PHASOR: 0A at 0Lag Ib PHASOR: 0A at 0Lag Ic PHASOR: 0A at 0Lag Va PHASOR: 0A at 0Lag Vb PHASOR: 0A at 0Lag Vc PHASOR: 0A at 0Lag
Range: 0 - 359 degrees in steps of 1
Range: 0 - 359 degrees in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0 - 359 degrees in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed Range: 0 - 359 degrees in steps of 1 Only shown if VT connection programmed
All angles shown are with respect to the reference phasor. The reference phasor is based on the VT connection type. In the event that option M has not been installed, VAN for Wye is 0V, or VAB for Delta is 0V, then IA will be used as the reference phasor. Reference Phasor IA VAN VAB VT Connection Type None Wye Delta
Note that the phasor display is not intended to be used as a protective metering element. Its prime purpose is to diagnose errors in wiring connections.
6-15
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 3 MENU
A3 ACTUAL VALUES LEARNED DATA
MOTOR DATA
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
This page contains the data the 369 learns to adapt itself to the motor protected. 6.4.2 MOTOR DATA
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA MOTOR DATA
MOTOR DATA
LEARNED ACCELERATION TIME: 0 s LEARNED STARTING CURRENT: 0 A LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY: 85 % LEARNED RUNNING COOL TIME CONST.: 0 min
Range: 0 - 100000 A in steps of 1
LEARNED STOPPED COOL TIME CONST.: 0 min LAST STARTING CURRENT: 0 A LAST STARTING CAPACITY: 85 % LAST ACCELERATION TIME: 0.0 s AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD LEARNED: 0.00 X FLA LEARNED UNBALANCE k FACTOR: 0
Range: 0.00 - 20.00 X FLA in steps of 0.01
The learned values for acceleration time and starting current are the average of the individual values acquired for the last five successful starts. The value for starting current is used when learned k factor is enabled. The learned value for starting capacity is the amount of thermal capacity required for a start that has been determined by the 369 from the last five successful motor starts. The last five learned start capacities are averaged and a 25% safety margin is factored in. This is done to guarantee enough thermal capacity available to start the motor. The Start Inhibit feature, when enabled, uses this value in determining lockout time.
6-16
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
The learned cool time constants are displayed here. The learned value is the average of the last five measured constants. These learned cool time constants are used only when Enable Learned Cool Times feature of the thermal model is set to yes. The learned unbalance k factor is displayed here. It is the average of the last five calculated k factors. The learned k factor is only used when unbalance biasing of thermal capacity is set on and to learned. It should be noted that learned values are calculated even when the features requiring them are turned off. None of the learned features should be used until at least five successful motor starts and stops have been accomplished. Values for starting capacity, starting current, and acceleration time are also displayed for the last start. The average motor load while running is displayed here. The motor load is averaged over a 15 minute sliding window. Clearing motor data (see setpoints page 1) will set all these values to their default settings.
6-17
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
RTD #1 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #2 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #3 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #4 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #5 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #6 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #7 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #8 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #9 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #10 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #11 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RTD #12 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C
Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
The maximum temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. If option R has not been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section. THIS FEATURE NOT INSTALLED If options R is enabled and no RTDs are programmed, the following message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages.. NO RTDs PROGRAMMED
6-18
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
RRTD #1 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #2 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #3 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #4 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #5 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #6 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #7 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #8 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #9 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #10 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #11 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C RRTD #12 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 40C
Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: -40 to 200C or -40 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
The maximum temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has been programmed and connected to a RRTD module. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. If an RRTD module is connected and no RRTDs are programmed, the following message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages.. NO RRTDs PROGRAMMED
6-19
6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 4 MENU
A4 ACTUAL VALUES STATISTICAL DATA
TRIP COUNTERS MOTOR STATISTICS
6.5.2 TRIP COUNTERS

PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA TRIP COUNTERS
TRIP COUNTERS
TOTAL NUMBER OF TRIPS: 0 INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE TRIPS: 0 SWITCH TRIPS: 0 OVERLOAD TRIPS: 0 SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPS: 0 MECHANICAL JAM TRIPS: 0
UNDERCURRENT TRIPS: 0 CURRENT UNBALANCE TRIPS: 0 SINGLE PHASE TRIPS: 0 GROUND FAULT TRIPS: 0 DIFFERENTIAL TRIPS: 0 ACCELERATION TRIPS: 0 STATOR RTD TRIPS: 0 BEARING RTD TRIPS: 0 OTHER RTD TRIPS: 0
6-20
6 ACTUAL VALUES AMBIENT RTD TRIPS: 0 UNDER VOLTAGE TRIPS: 0 OVER VOLTAGE TRIPS: 0 PHASE REVERSAL TRIPS: 0 UNDERFREQUENCY TRIPS: 0 OVERFREQUENCY TRIPS: 0 LEAD POWER FACTOR TRIPS: 0 LAG POWER FACTOR TRIPS: 0 POSITIVE REACTIVE TRIPS: 0 NEGATIVE REACTIVE TRIPS: 0 UNDERPOWER TRIPS: 0 REVERSE POWER: 0 TRIP COUNTERS LAST CLEARED: 01/01/1999

Date: month / day / year
A breakdown of the number of trips by type is displayed here. When the total reaches 50000, the counter resets to 0 on the next trip. This information can be cleared in the Clear/Preset Data section of setpoints page one. The date the counters are cleared will be recorded.
6-21
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5.3 MOTOR STATISTICS
PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA
MOTOR STATISTICS
MOTOR STATISTICS
NUMBER OF MOTOR STARTS: 0 NUMBER OF EMERGENCY RESTARTS: 0 MOTOR RUNNING HOURS: 0 hrs DIGITAL COUNTER: 0
Range: 0-65535 in steps of 1 Shown if counter set to a digital input
The number of motor starts and emergency restarts is recorded here. This information may be useful when troubleshooting a motor failure or in understanding the history and use of a motor for maintenace purposes. When either of these counters reaches 50000, it will automatically be reset to 0. Motor running hours displays the amount of time that the 369 has detected the motor in a running state (current applied and/or starter status indicating contactor/breaker closed). The motor starts, emergency restarts and running hours counters may be cleared in setpoints page 1, preset/ clear data section, by clearing motor data. The digital counter will be displayed when one of the digital inputs has been set up as a digital counter. The digital counter may be cleared in setpoints page 1, preset/clear data section, by clearing or presetting the digital counter. When the digital counter reaches 65535, it will automatically be reset by the 369 to 0.
6-22
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD
6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD 6.6.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 5 MENU
A5 ACTUAL VALUES EVENT RECORD
EVENT: 40 EVENT: 39
EVENT: 02 EVENT: 01
6.6.2 EVENT 01
PATH: A5 EVENT RECORD EVENT 01
EVENT 01
TIME OF EVENT 01: 00:00:00:00 DATE OF EVENT 01: Jan. 01, 1999 A: 0 C: 0 B: 0 A EVENT 01
Time: hours / minutes / seconds / hundreds of seconds Date: month / day / year
6
Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0 - 100 % in steps of 1 %
MOTOR LOAD EVENT 01: 0.00 X FLA CURRENT UNBALANCE: EVENT 01: 0 % GROUND CURRENT: EVENT 01: 0 Amps HOTTEST STATOR RTD1: 0C EVENT 01 Vab: Vca: Van: Vcn: 0 Vbc: 0 0 V EVENT 01 0 Vbn: 0 0 V EVENT 01
Range:0.0-5000.0 steps of 0.1 for 1A/5A CT, 0.00-25.00 steps of 0.01 for 50 : 0.025 A CT Range: -40 to 200C or -4 to 392 F, No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD Range: 0 - 20000 V in steps of 1
Only shown if VT Connection Programmed Delta
Range: 0 - 20000 V in steps of 1 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed Wye Range: 0.00, 15.00 - 120 Hz in steps of 1 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed Range: - 50000 - + 50000 in steps of 1 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed
SYSTEM FREQUENCY: EVENT 01: 0.00 Hz 0 kW 0 kvar 0 kVA EVENT 01
6-23
6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD POWER FACTOR: EVENT 01: 1.00
6 ACTUAL VALUES
Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 lead Only shown if VT Connection Programmed
A breakdown of the last 40 events is available here along with the cause of the event and the date and time. All trips automatically trigger an event. Alarms only trigger an event if turned on for that alarm. Loss or application of control power, service alarm and emergency restart opening and closing also triggers an event. After 40 events have been recorded, the oldest one is removed when a new one is added. The event record may be cleared in the setpoints page 1, clear/preset data, clear event record section.
6-24
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION
6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION 6.7.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 6 MENU
A6 ACTUAL VALUES RELAY INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION FIRMWARE VERSION
6.7.2 MODEL INFORMATION

PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
ORDER CODE: 369-HI-R-M-F-P SERIAL NUMBER: MXXXXXXXX INSTALLED OPTIONS: None INSTALLED OPTIONS: DATE OF MANUFACTURE: Jan. 01 1999 LAST CALIBRATION DATE: Jan. 01 1999
Range: 369 HI/LO, R/0, M/B/0, F/0, P/0
Range: See Autolabel.
Range: None, RTD, Meter, BSD, Fiber, Profibus
Range: RTD, Meter, BSD, Fiber, Profibus Only seen if previous display overflowed Range: month/day/year
Range: month/day/year
369 model and manufacture information may be viewed her. The last calibration date is the date the relay was last calibrated at GE Multilin. 6.7.3 FIRMWARE VERSION
PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION FIRMWARE VERSION
FIRMWARE VERSION
FIRMWARE REVISION: XXXXXXXX BOOT REVISION: XXXXXXXX MODIFICATION NUMBER: 000
This information reflects the revisions of the software currently running in the 369. This information should be noted and recorded before calling for technical support or service.
6-25
7 APPLICATIONS 7 APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON Table 71: COMPARISON BETWEEN 369 AND 269 PLUS
7.1 269-369 COMPARISON 7.1.1 369 AND 269 PLUS COMPARISON
369
All options can be turned on or added in the field
269 Plus
Must be returned for option change or add other devices
Current and optional voltage inputs are included on all Current inputs only. Must use additional meter device relays to obtain voltage and power measurements. Optional 12 RTDs With an additional 12 RTDs available with the RRTD. All RTDs are individually configured (100P, 100N, 120N, 10C) Fully programmable digital inputs 4 programmable analog outputs assignable to 49 parameters 1 RS232 (19.2K BAUD), 3 RS485 (1200 TO 19.2K BAUD programmable) communication ports. Also Optional profibus port and optional fibre optics port Flash memory firmware upgrade thru PC software and comm port EVENT RECORDER - time and date stamp last 40 events. Records all trips and alarms are selectable OSCILLOGRAPHY up to 64 cycles @ 16 samples/ cycle for last event(s) TESTING\SIMULATION function to force relays, analog outputs and simulate metered values Programmable text message(s) Backspin frequency detection and backspin timer Starter failure indication Measures up to 20xCT @ 16 samples/cycle 15 standard overload curves Remote display is standard 10 RTDs not programmable, must be specified at time of order. No programmable digital inputs 1 Analog output programmable for 5 parameters 1 RS485 Communication port (2400 BAUD max.)
EPROM must be replaced to change firmware Displays cause of last trip and last event N/A Exercise relays, force RTDs, force analog output N/A Backspin timer N/A Measures up to 12xCT @ 12 samples/cycle 8 standard overload curves Remote display with mod
7-1
7.2 369 FAQs 7.2 369 FAQs
7 APPLICATIONS 7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)
What is the difference between Firmware and Software? Firmware is the program running inside the relay, which is responsible for all relay protection and control elements. Software is the program running on the PC, which is used to communicate with the relay and provide relay control remotely in a user friendly format.
How can I obtain copies of the latest manual and PC software? I need it now!: Via Internet. tap://www.ge.com/edc/pm I guess I can wait: Fax request to GE Multilin Literature department at (905) 201-2113
Cannot communicate through the front port (RS232) Check the following settings: Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC) Baud rate setting on the master (PC or PLC) must match RS232 baud rate on the 369 relay. Cable has to be a straight through cable, do not use null modem cables where pin 2 and 3 are transposed Check the pin outs of RS232 cable (TX - pin 2, RX - pin 3, GND - pin 5)
Cannot communicate with RS485 Check the following settings: Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC) Baud rate must match between the relay and the master
Slave address polled must match between the relay and the master Is terminating filter circuit present? Are you communicating in half duplex? (369 communicates in half duplex mode only) Is wiring correct? (+ wire should go to + terminal of the relay, and - goes to - terminal) Is the RS485 cable shield grounded? (shielding diminishes noise from external EM radiation) Check the appropriate communication port LED on the relay. The LED should be solidly lit when communicating properly. The LED will blink on and off when the relay has communication difficulties and the LED will be off if no activity detected on communication lines.
Can the 4 wire RS485 (full duplex) be used with 369? No, the 369 communicates in 2-wire half duplex mode only. However, there are commercial RS485 converters that will convert a 4 wire to a 2 wire system.
7-2
7 APPLICATIONS Can the 369 be used on Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)? Yes it can. The following are important settings and notes on using 369 with VFD.
7.2 369 FAQs
Must set S2:/SYSTEM SETUP/CT/VT SETUP/NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY: Variable Frequency range of operation should not go below 15 Hz nor exceed 200 Hz CTs and VTs must be on the Motor side of the VFD drive
Important: PWM drives may cause the 369 to read wrong frequency due to extra zero crossings in the signal
Cannot store setpoint into the relay Check and make sure the ACCESS switch is shorted and check for any PASSCODE restrictions.
The 369 relay displays incorrect power reading, yet the power system is balanced, what could be the possible reasons? It is highly possible that the secondary wiring to the relay is not correct. Incorrect power can be read when any of the A, B, or C phases are swapped, a CT or VT is wired backwards, or the relay is programmed as ABC sequence when the power system is actually ACB and vice versa. The easiest way to verify is to check the voltage and the current phasor readings on the 369 relay and make sure that each respective voltage and current angles match.
What are the merits of a residual ground fault connection versus a core balance connection? The use of a zero sequence (core balance) CT to detect ground current is recommended over the G/F residual connection. This is especially true at motor starting. During across-the-line starting of large motors, care must be taken to prevent the high inrush current from operating the ground element of the 369. This is especially true when using the residual connection of 2 or 3 CTs. In a residual connection, the unequal saturation of the current transformers, size and location of motor, size of power system, resistance in the power system from the source to the motor, type of iron used in the motor core & saturation density, and residual flux levels may all contribute to the production of a false residual current in the secondary or relay circuit. The common practice in medium and high voltage systems is to use low resistance grounding. By using the doughnut CT scheme, such systems offer the advantages of speed and reliability without much concern for starting current, fault contribution by the motor, or false residual current. When a zero sequence CT is used, a voltage is generated in the secondary winding only when zero sequence current is flowing in the primary leads. Since virtually all motors have their neutrals ungrounded, no zero sequence current can flow in the motor leads unless there is a ground fault on the motor side.
7-3
7.3 369 DOs and DONTs 7.3 369 DOs and DONTs a) DOs Always check the power supply rating before applying power to the relay
7 APPLICATIONS 7.3.1 DOs and DONTs
Applying voltage greater than the maximum rating to the power supply (e.g. 120VAC to the low-voltage rated power supply) could result in component damage to the relay's power supply. This will result in the unit no longer being able to power up.
Ensure that the 369 nominal phase current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating and the connections of the connected CTs Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
Ensure that the source CT and VT polarity match the relay CT and VT polarity Polarity of the phase CTs is critical for power measurement, and residual ground current detection (if used). Polarity of the VTs is critical for correct power measurement and voltage phase reversal operation.
Properly ground the 369 Connect both the Filter Ground (terminal 123) and Safety Ground (terminal 126) of the 369 directly to the main GROUND BUS. The benefits of proper grounding of the 369 are numerous, e.g, Elimination of nuisance tripping Elimination of internal hardware failures Reliable operation of the relay Higher MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) It is recommended that a tinned copper braided shielding and bonding cable be used. A Belden 8660 cable or equivalent should be used as a minimum to connect the relay directly to the ground bus.
Grounding of Phase and Ground CTs All phase and Ground CTs must be grounded. The potential difference between the CT's ground and the ground bus should be minimal (ideally zero). It is highly recommended that the two CT leads be twisted together to minimize noise pickup, especially when the highly sensitive 50:0.025 Ground CT sensor is used.
RTDs Consult the application notes of the 369 Instruction Manual for the full description of the 369 RTD circuitry and the different RTD wiring schemes acceptable for proper operation. However, for best results the following recommendations should be adhered to: a) Use a 3 wire twisted, shielded cable to connect the RTDs from the motor to the 369. The shields should be connected to the proper terminals on the back of the 369. b) RTD shields are internally connected to the 369 ground (terminal #126) and must not be grounded anywhere else.
7-4
7 APPLICATIONS
7.3 369 DOs and DONTs
c) RTD signals can be characterized as very small, sensitive signals. Therefore, cables carrying RTD signals should be routed as far away as possible from power carrying cables such as power supply and CT cables. d) If, after wiring the RTD leads to the 369, the RTD temperature displayed by the Relay is zero, then check for the following conditions: 1. Shorted RTD 2. RTD hot and compensation leads are reversed, i.e. hot lead in compensation terminal and compensation lead in hot terminal
RS485 Communications Port The 369 can provide direct or remote communications (via a modem). An RS232 to RS485 converter is used to tie it to a PC/PLC or DCS system. The 369 uses the Modicon MODBUS RTU protocol (functions 03, 04, & 16) to interface with PC's, PLC's and DCS systems. RS485 communications was chosen to be used with the 369 because it allows communications over long distances of up to 4000 ft. However, care must be taken for it to operate properly and trouble free. The recommendations listed below must be followed to obtain reliable communications: a) A twisted, shielded pair (preferably a 24 gage Belden 9841 type or 120 equivalent) must be used, and routed away from power carrying cables, such as power supply and CT cables. b) No more than 32 devices can co-exist on the same link. If however, more than 32 devices should be daisy chained together, a REPEATER must be used. Note that a repeater is just another RS232 to RS485 converter device. The shields of all 369 units should also be daisy chained together and grounded at the MASTER (PC/PLC) only. This is due to the fact that if shields are grounded at different points, a potential difference between grounds might exist, resulting in placing one or more of the transceiver chips (chip used for communications) in an unknown state, i.e. not receiving nor sending, and the corresponding 369 communications might be erroneous, intermittent or unsuccessful. c) Two sets of 120/0.5W resistor and 1nF/50V capacitor in series must be used (value matches the characteristic impedance of the line). One set at the 369 end, connected between the positive and negative terminals (#46 & #47 on 369) and the second at the other end of the communications link. This is to prevent reflections and ringing on the line. If a different value resistor is used, it runs the risk of over loading the line and communications might be erroneous, intermittent or totally unsuccessful. d) It is highly recommended that connection from the 369 communication terminals be made directly to the interfacing Master Device (PC/PLC/DCS), without the use of stub lengths and/or terminal blocks. This is also to minimize ringing and reflections on the line.
7-5
7.3 369 DOs and DONTs b) DON'Ts Grounding of the RTD's should not be done in two places
7 APPLICATIONS
When grounding at the 369, only one Return lead need be grounded as all are hardwired together internally. No error will be introduced into the RTD reading by grounding in this manner. Running more than one RTD Return lead back will cause significant errors as two or more parallel paths for return have been created.
Apply direct voltage to the Digital Inputs There are 6 switch inputs (Spare Input; Differential Input; Speed Switch; Access; Emergency Restart; External Reset) that are designed for dry contact connections only. By applying direct voltage to the inputs, it may result in component damage to the digital input circuitry.
Reset an 86 Lockout switch before resetting the 369 If an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369 make sure that the 369 is reset prior to attempting to reset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped it will immediately retrip the lockout switch. Also if the lockout switch is held reset the high current draw of the lockout switch coil may cause damage to itself and/or the 369 output relay.
7-6
7 APPLICATIONS 7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION a) 369 CT Withstand
7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION 7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION
Withstand is important when the phase or ground CT has the capability of driving a large amount of current into the interposing CTs in the relay. This typically occurs on retrofit installations when the CTs are not sized to the burden of the relay. Electronic relays typically have low burdens (8 m for 369), while the older electromechanical relays have typically high burdens (1 ). For high current ground faults, the system will be either low resistance or solidly grounded. The limiting factor that determines the amount of ground fault current that can flow in these types of systems is the capacity of the source. Withstand is not important for ground fault on high resistance grounded systems. On these systems, a resistor makes the connection from source to ground at the source (generator, transformer). The resistor value is chosen such that in the event of a ground fault, the current that flows is limited to a low value, typically 5, 10, or 20 Amps. Since the potential for very large faults exists (ground faults on high resistance grounded systems excluded), the fault must be cleared as quickly as possible. It is therefore recommended that the time delay for short circuit and high ground faults be set to instantaneous. Then, the duration for which the 369 CTs subjected to high withstand will be less than 250ms (369 reaction time is less than 50ms + breaker clearing time). NOTE: Care must be taken to ensure that the interrupting device is capable of interrupting the potential fault. If not, some other method of interrupting the fault should be used, and the feature in question should be disabled (e.g. a fused contactor relies on fuses to interrupt large faults). The 369 CTs were subjected to high currents for 1s bursts. The CTs were capable of handling 500A. 500A relates to a 100 times the CT primary rating. If the time duration required is less than 1s, the withstand level will increase. b) CT Size and Saturation The rating (as per ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1) for relaying class CTs may be given in a format such as: 2.5C100, 10T200, T1OO, 10C50, or C200. The number preceding the letter represents the maximum ratio correction; no number in this position implies that the CT accuracy remains within a 10% ratio correction from 0 to 20 times rating. The letter is an indication of the CT type: A 'C' (formerly L) represents a CT with a low leakage flux in the core where there is no appreciable effect on the ratio when used within the limits dictated by the class and rating. The 'C' stands for calculated; the actual ratio correction should be different from the calculated ratio correction by no more than 1%. A 'C' type CT is typically a bushing, window, or bar type CT with uniformly distributed windings. A 'T' (formerly H) represents a CT with a high leakage flux in the core where there is significant effect on CT performance. The 'T' stands for test; since the ratio correction is unpredictable, it is to be determined by test. A 'T' type CT is typically primary wound with unevenly distributed windings. The subsequent number specifies the secondary terminal voltage that may be delivered by the full winding at 20 times rated secondary current without exceeding the ratio correction specified by the first number of the rating. (Example: a 10C100 can develop 100V at 2x5A, therefore an appropriate external burden would be 1 or less to allow 20 times rated secondary current with less than 10% ratio correction.) Note that the voltage rating is at the secondary terminals of the CT and the internal voltage drop across the secondary resistance must be accounted for in the design of the CT. There are seven voltage ratings: 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, and 800. If a CT comes close to a higher rating, but does not meet or exceed it, then the CT must be rated to the lower value.
7-7
7 APPLICATIONS
In order to determine how much current CTs can output, the secondary resistance of the CT is required. This resistance will be part of the equation as far as limiting the current flow. This is determined by the maximum voltage that may be developed by the CT secondary divided by the entire secondary resistance, CT secondary resistance included. 7.4.2 CT SELECTION The 369 phase CT should be chosen such that the FLA (FLC) of the motor falls within 50 to 100% of the CT primary rating. For example, if the FLA of the motor is 173A, a primary CT rating of 200, 250, or 300 can be chosen (200 being the better choice). This provides maximum protection of the motor. The CT selected must then be checked to ensure that it can drive the attached burden (relay and wiring and any auxiliary devices) at maximum fault current levels without saturating. There are essentially two ways of determining if the CT is being driven into saturation:
1. Use CT secondary resistance. Burden = CTsecondary resistance + Wireresistance + Relayburden resistance CT secondary voltage = Burden x (Ifault maximum / CTratio) Example: Maximum fault level = 6kA 369 burden = 0.008 CT = 300:5 CTsecondary resistance = 0.088 Wire length (1 lead) = 50m Wire Size = 4.00mm2 Ohms/km = 4.73 Burden = 0.088 + (2x50)(4.73/1000) + 0.008 = 0.569 secondary voltage CT = 0.569 x (6000 / (300/5)) = 56.9V
Using the excitation curves for the 300:5 CT we see that the knee voltage is at 60V, therefore this CT is acceptable for this application.
2. Use CT class. Burden = Wireresistance + Relayburden resistance CT secondary voltage = Burden x (Ifault maximum / CTratio)
7-8
7 APPLICATIONS Example:
Maximum fault level = 6kA 369 burden = 0.008 CT = 300:5 CT class = C20 Wire length (1 lead) = 50m Wire Size = 4.00mm2 Ohms/km = 4.73 Burden = (2x50)(4.73/1000) + 0.008 = 0.481 secondary voltage = 0.481 x (6000 / (300/5)) CT = 48.1V
From the CT class (C20): The amount of secondary voltage the CT can deliver to the load burden at 20xCT without exceeding the 10% ratio error is 20V. This application calls for 6000/300 = 20xCT (Fault current / CT primary) Thus the 10% ratio error may be exceeded. The number in the CT class code refers to the guaranteed secondary voltage of the CT. Therefore, the maximum current that the CT can deliver can be calculated as follows: maximum secondary current = CT class / Burden = 20 / 0.481 = 41.58A
Figure 71: EQUIVALENT CT CIRCUIT
7-9
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7 APPLICATIONS 7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
The amount of information from a motor manufacturer can vary from nameplate information to a vast amount of data related to every parameter of the motor. Table 72: SELECTED INFORMATION FROM A TYPICAL MOTOR DATA SHEET, shows selected information from a typical motor data sheet and Figure 72: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS, shows the related motor thermal limit curves. This information is required to set the 369 for a proper protection scheme. The following is a example of how to determine the 369 setpoints. It is only a example and the setpoints should be determined based on the application and specific design of the motor. Table 72: SELECTED INFORMATION FROM A TYPICAL MOTOR DATA SHEET Driven equipment Ambient Temperature Type or Motor Voltage Nameplate power Service Factor Insulation class Temperature rise stator / rotor Max. locked rotor current Locked rotor current% FLC Starting time Max. permissible starts cold / warm Rated Load Current Reciprocating Compressor min. -20oC max. 41oC Synchronous 6000 V 2300 kW 1 F 79 / 79 K 550% FLC 500% @ 100% Voltage / 425% @ 85% Voltage 4 seconds @ 100% Voltage / 6.5 seconds @ 85% Voltage 3/2 229A @ 100% Load
7-10
7 APPLICATIONS
Figure 72: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS Phase CT The phase CT should be chosen such that the FLC is 50% to 100% of CT primary. Since the FLC is 229A a 250:5, 300:5, or 400:5 CT may be chosen (a 250:5 is the better choice).
229 / 0.50 = 458

OR
229 / 1.00 = 229
7-11
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE Motor FLC Set the Motor Full Load Current to 229A, as per data sheets.
7 APPLICATIONS
Ground CT For high resistive grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly grounded or low resistive grounded systems where the fault current is much higher, a 1A or 5A CT should be used. If residual ground fault connection is to be used, the ground fault CT ratio most equal the phase CT ratio. The zero sequence CT chosen needs to be able to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.
VT Settings The motor is going to be connected in Wye, hence, the VT connection type will be programmed as Wye. Since the motor voltage is 4000V, the VT being used will be 4000:120. The VT ratio to be programmed into the 369 will then be 33.33:1 (4000/120) and the Motor Rated Voltage will be programmed to 4000V, as per the motor data sheets.
Overload Pickup The overload pickup is set to the same as the service factor of the motor. In this case, it would be set to the lowest setting of 1.05 x FLC for the service factor of 1.
Unbalance Bias Of Thermal Capacity Enable the Unbalance Bias of Thermal Capacity so that the heating effect of unbalance currents is added to the Thermal Capacity Used.
Unbalance Bias K Factor The K value is used to calculate the contribution of the negative sequence current flowing in the rotor due to unbalance. It is defined as:
Rr2 / Rr1
where: Rr2 = rotor neg. sequence resistance Rr1 = rotor positive sequence resistance
175 175 K = ------------- = --------- 6 2 2 5.5 LRA

where: LRA = Locked Rotor Current Note: Above formula is based on imperial data The 369 has the ability to learn the K value after five successful starts. After 5 starts, turn this setpoint off so that the 369 uses the learned value
7-12
7 APPLICATIONS Hot/Cold Curve Ratio
The hot/cold curve ratio is calculated by simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. In this example, the only one stall time is shown, therefore set the hot/cold ratio to zero.
Running Cool Time The running cool time is the time required for the motor to cool while running. This information is usually supplied by the motor manufacturer but is not part of the data that was given. Refer to the Selection of Cool Time application note for more details on how to determine this value.
Stopped Cool Time The stopped cool time is the time required for the motor to cool when stopped. This time is supplied by the motor manufacturer but is not part of the information sent. Refer to the Selection of Cool Time application note for more details on how to determine this value. Note: Motors have a fanning action when running due to the rotation of the rotor. For this reason, the running cool time is typically half of the stopped cool time.
Enable RTD Biasing This will enable the temperature from the Stator RTD sensors, to be included in the calculations of Thermal Capacity. This model determines the Thermal Capacity Used based on the temperature of the Stators and is separate from the overload model for calculating Thermal Capacity Used. RTD biasing is a back up protection element which accounts for such things as loss of cooling or unusually high ambient temperature.
RTD Bias Minimum Set to 40C which is the ambient temperature (obtained from data sheets).
RTD Bias Mid Point The center point temperature is set to the motors hot running temperature and is calculated as follows: Temperature Rise of Stator + Ambient Temperature. The temperature rise of the stator is 79K, obtained from the data sheets. Therefore, the RTD Center point temperature is set to 120C (79 + 40). RTD Bias Maximum This setpoint is set to the rating of the insulation or slightly less. A class F insulation is used in this motor which is rated at 155C.
Overload Curve The overload curve to be chosen should be just below the cold thermal limit and above the hot thermal limit. The best fitting curve seems to be curve 4, as seen in Figure 72:, MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS, on page 11.
7-13
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE Short Circuit Trip
7 APPLICATIONS
The short circuit trip should be set above the maximum locked rotor current but below the short circuit current of the fuses. The data sheets indicate a maximum locked rotor current of 550% FLC or 5.5 x FLC. A setting of 6 x FLC with a instantaneous time delay will be ideal but nuisance tripping may result due to the asymmetrical starting currents. If asymmetrical starting currents limits the starting capability, set the S/C level higher to a maximum of 10 x FLC to override this condition (1.7x5.5=9.35 where 1.7 is the maximum DC offset for an asymmetrical current).
Mechanical Jam If the process causes the motor to be prone to mechanical jams, set the Mechanical Jam Trip and Alarm accordingly. In most cases, the overload trip will become active before the Mechanical Trip, however, if a high overload curve is chosen, the Mechanical Jam level and time delay become more critical. The setting should then be set to below the overload curve but above any normal overload conditions of the motor.
Undercurrent If detection of loss of load is required for the specific application, set the undercurrent element according to the current that will indicate loss of load.
Unbalance Alarm and Trip The unbalance settings are determined by examining the motor application and motor design. In this case, the motor being protected is a reciprocating compressor, in which unbalance will be a normal running condition, thus this setting should be set high. The heating effect of unbalance will be protected by enabling unbalance input to thermal memory; described latter. A setting of 20% for the Unbalance Alarm with a delay of 10 seconds would be appreciate and the trip can be set to 25% with a delay of 10 seconds
Ground Fault Unfortunately, there is not enough information to determine a ground fault setting. These settings depend on the following information:
1. The Ground Fault current available. 2. System Grounding - high resistive grounding, solidly grounded, etc. 3. Ground Fault CT used. 4. Ground Fault connection - zero sequence or Residual connection.
Acceleration Trip This setpoint should be set higher than the maximum starting time to avoid nuisance tripping when the voltage is lower or for varying loads during acceleration. If reduced voltage starting is used, a setting of 8 seconds would be appropriate, or if direct across the line starting is used, a setting of 5 seconds could be used.
Enable Start Inhibit This function will limit starts when the motor is already hot. The 369 learns the amount of thermal capacity used at start. If the motor is hot, thus having some thermal capacity, the 369 will not allow a start if the available thermal capacity is less than the required thermal capacity for a start.
7-14
7 APPLICATIONS Starts/Hour
Starts/Hour can be set to the # of cold starts as per the data sheet. For this example, the starts/hour would be set to 3.
Time Between Starts In some cases, the motor manufacturer will specify the time between motor starts. In this example, this information is not given so this feature can be turned Off. However, if the information is given, the time provided on the motor data sheets should be programmed.
Stator RTDs RTD trip level should be set at or below the maximum temperature rating of the insulation. This example has a class F insulation which has a temperature rating of 155C, therefore the Stator RTD Trip level should be set to between 140C to 155C. The RTD alarm level should be set to a level to provide a warning that the motor temperature is rising. For this example, 120C or 130C would be appropriate.
Bearing RTDs The Bearing RTD alarm and trip settings will be determined by evaluating the temperature specification from the bearing manufacturer.
7-15
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS 7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION
The 369 detects a stopped motor condition when the phase current falls below 5% of CT, and detects a starting motor condition when phase current is sensed after a stopped motor condition. If the motor idles at 5% of CT, several starts and stops can be detected causing nuisance lockouts if Starts/Hour, Time Between Starts, Restart Block, or Backspin Timer are programmed. As well, the learned values, such as the Learned Starting Thermal Capacity, Learned Starting Current and Learned Acceleration time can be incorrectly calculated. To overcome this potential problem, the Spare Digital Input can be configured to read the status of the breaker and determine whether the motor is stopped or simply idling. With the spare input configured as Starter Status and the breaker auxiliary contacts wired across the spare input terminals, the 369 senses a stopped motor condition only when the phase current is below 5% of CT (or zero) AND the breaker is open. If both of these conditions are not met, the 369 will continue to operate as if the motor is running and the starting elements remain unchanged. Refer to Figure 73:, FLOWCHART SHOWING HOW MOTOR STATUS IS DETERMINED, on page 17, for more details of how the 369 detects motor status and how the starter status element further defines the condition of the motor. When the Starter Status is programmed, the type of breaker contact being used for monitoring must be set. The following is the states of the breaker auxiliary contacts in relation to the breaker: 52a, 52aa - open when the breaker contacts are open and closed when the breaker contacts are closed 52b, 52bb - closed when the breaker contacts are open and open when the breaker contacts are closed
7-16
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
Figure 73: FLOWCHART SHOWING HOW MOTOR STATUS IS DETERMINED
7-17
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS 7.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS
Thermal limits are not a black and white science and there is some art to setting a protective relay thermal model. The definition of thermal limits mean different things to different manufacturers and quite often, information is not available. Therefore, it is important to remember what the goal of the motor protection thermal modeling is: to thermally protect the motor (rotor and stator) without impeding the normal and expected operating conditions that the motor will be subject to. The thermal model of the 369 provides integrated rotor and stator heating protection. If cooling time constants are supplied with the motor data they should be used. Since the rotor and stator heating and cooling is integrated into a single model, use the longer of the cooling time constants (rotor or stator). If however, no cooling time constants are provided, settings will have to be determined. Before determining the cool time constant settings, the duty cycle of the motor should be considered. If the motor is typically started up and run continuously for very long periods of time with no overload duty requirements, the cooling time constants can be large. This would make the thermal model conservative. If the normal duty cycle of the motor involves frequent starts and stops with a periodic overload duty requirement, the cooling time constants will need to be shorter and closer to the actual thermal limit of the motor. Normally motors are rotor limited during starting. Thus RTDs in the stator do not provide the best method of determining cool times. Determination of reasonable settings for the running and stopped cool time constants can be accomplished in one of the following manners listed in order of preference. 1. The motor running and stopped cool times or constants may be provided on the motor data sheets or by the manufacturer if requested. Remember that the cooling is exponential and the time constants are one fifth the total time to go from 100% thermal capacity used to 0%. 2. Attempt to determine a conservative value from available data on the motor. See the following example for details. 3. If no data is available an educated guess must be made. Perhaps the motor data could be estimated from other motors of a similar size or use. Note that conservative protection is better as a first choice until a better understanding of the motor requirements is developed. Remember that the goal is to protect the motor without impeding the operating duty that is desired.
Example:
Motor data sheets state that the starting sequence allowed is 2 cold or 1 hot after which you must wait 5 hours before attempting another start. This implies that under a normal start condition the motor is using between 34 and 50% thermal capacity. Hence, two consecutive starts are allowed, but not three. If the hot and cold curves or a hot/cold safe stall ratio are not available program 0.5 (1hot/2cold starts) in as the hot/cold ratio. Programming Start Inhibit On makes a restart possible as soon as 62.5% (50x1.25) thermal capacity is available. After 2 cold or 1 hot start, close to 100% thermal capacity will be used. Thermal capacity used decays exponentially (see 369 manual section on motor cooling for calculation). There will be only 37% thermal capacity used after 1 time constant which means there is enough thermal capacity available for another start. Program 300 minutes (5 hours) as the stopped cool time constant. Thus after 2 cold or 1 hot start, a stopped motor will be blocked from starting for 5 hours.
Since the rotor cools faster when the motor is running, a reasonable setting for the running cool time constant might be half the stopped cool time constant or 150 minutes.
7-18
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.3 THERMAL MODEL
7
Figure 74: THERMAL MODEL BLOCK DIAGRAM LEGEND
U/B..........................Unbalance I/P ...........................Input Iavg.........................Average Three Phase Current Ieq...........................Equivalent Average Three Phase Current Ip.............................Positive Sequence Current In.............................Negative Sequence Current K .............................Constant Multiplier that Equates In to Ip FLC .........................Full Load Current FLC TCR ................FLC Thermal Capacity Reduction Setpoint TC ...........................Thermal Capacity used RTD BIAS TC .........TC Value looked up from RTD Bias Curve
NOTE: If Unbalance input to thermal memory is enabled, the increase in heating is reflected in the thermal model. If RTD Input to Thermal Memory is enabled, the feed-back from the RTDs will correct the thermal model.
7-19
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS 7.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE
START
RTD BIAS ENABLED ?
HOTTEST STATOR RTD > Tmax N
T.C. = T.C. RTD = 100% HOTTEST STATOR RTD <Tmin N
OVERLOAD ?
Tmin < HOTTEST STATOR RTD < Tmax (T.C. LOOKED UP ON RTD BIAS CURVE)
T.C. MODEL = 100%
T.C. RTD > T.C. THERMAL MODEL
TRIP
T.C. = T.C. RTD
T.C. = T.C. MODEL
END
840739A1.CDR
Figure 75: RTD BIAS FEATURE LEGEND Tmax ................... RTD Bias Maximum Temperature Value Tmin .................... RTD Bias Minimum Temperature Value Hottest RTD ........ Hottest Stator RTD measured TC ....................... Thermal Capacity Used TC RTD ............... Thermal Capacity Looked up on RTD Bias Curve. TC Model ............ Thermal Capacity based on the Thermal Model
7-20
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION
The overload element uses a Thermal Capacity algorithm to determine an overload trip condition. The extent of overload current determines how fast the Thermal Memory is filled, i.e. if the current is just over FLC X O/L Pickup, Thermal Capacity slowly increases; versus if the current far exceeds the FLC pickup level, the Thermal Capacity rapidly increases. An overload trip occurs when the Thermal Capacity Used reaches 100%. The overload current does not necessarily have to pass the overload curve for a trip to take place. If there is Thermal Capacity already built up, the overload trip will occur much faster. In other words, the overload trip will occur at the specified time on the curve only when the Thermal Capacity is equal to zero and the current is applied at a stable rate. Otherwise, the Thermal Capacity increases from the value prior to overload, until a 100% Thermal Capacity is reached and an overload trip occurs. It is important to chose the overload curve correctly for proper protection. In some cases it is necessary to calculate the amount of Thermal Capacity developed after a start. This is done to ensure that the 369 does not trip the motor prior to the completion of a start. The actual filling of the Thermal Capacity is the area under the overload current curve. Therefore, to calculate the amount of Thermal Capacity after a start, the integral of the overload current most be calculated. Below is an example of how to calculate the Thermal Capacity during a start: Thermal Capacity Calculation: 1. Draw lines intersecting the acceleration curve and the overload curve. This is illustrated in Figure 76:, THERMAL LIMIT CURVES, on page 22. 2. Determine the time at which the drawn line intersect, the acceleration curve and the time at which the drawn line intersects the chosen overload curve. 3. Integrate the values that have been determined. Table 73: THERMAL CAPACITY CALCULATIONS Time Period (seconds) 0 to 3 3 to 6 6 to 9 9 to 12 12 to 14 14 to 15 15 to 16 16 to 17 17 to 18 18 to 19 19 to 20 Motor Starting Current (% of FLC 580 560 540 520 500 480 460 440 380 300 160 Custom Curve Trip Time (seconds) 38 41 44 47 51 56 61 67 90 149 670 Total Accumulated Thermal Capacity Used (%) 3/38 x 100 = 7.8% (3/41 x 100) + 7.8% = 15.1% (3/44 x 100) + 15.1% = 21.9% (3/47 x 100) + 21.9% = 28.3% (2/51 x 100) + 28.3% = 32.2% (1/56 x 100) + 32.2% = 34.0% (1/61 x 100) + 34.0% = 35.6% (1/67 x 100) + 35.6% = 37.1% (1/90 x 100) + 37.1% = 38.2% (1/149 x 100) + 38.2% = 38.9% (1/670 x 100) + 38.9% = 39.0%
Therefore, after this motor has completed a successful start, the Thermal Capacity would have reached approximately 40%.
7-21
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
Figure 76: THERMAL LIMIT CURVES Thermal limit curves illustrate thermal capacity used calculation during a start.
7-22
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.6 START INHIBIT
The Start Inhibit element of the 369 provides an accurate and reliable start protection without unnecessary prolonged lockout times causing production down time. The lockout time is based on the actual performance and application of the motor and not on the worst case scenario, as other start protection elements. The 369 Thermal Capacity algorithm is used to establish the lockout time of the Start Inhibit element. Thermal Capacity is a percentage value that gives an indication of how hot the motor is and is derived from the overload currents (as well as Unbalance currents and RTDs if the respective biasing functions are enabled). The easiest way to understand the Thermal Modeling function of the 369 is to image a bucket that holds Thermal Capacity. Once this imaginary bucket is full, an overload trip occurs. The bucket is filled by the amount of overload current integrated over time and is compared to the programmed overload curve to obtain a percentage value. The thermal capacity bucket is emptied based on the programmed running cool time when the current has fallen below the Full Load Current (FLC) and is running normally. Upon a start, the inrush current is very high, causing the thermal capacity to rapidly increase. The Thermal Capacity Used variable is compared to the amount of the Thermal Capacity required to start the motor. If there is not enough thermal capacity available to start the motor, the 369 blocks the operator from starting until the motor has cooled to a level of thermal capacity to successfully start. Assume that a motor requires 40% Thermal Capacity to start. If the motor was running in overload prior to stopping, the thermal capacity would be some value; say 80%. Under such conditions the 369 (with Start Inhibit enabled) will lockout or prevent the operator from starting the motor until the thermal capacity has decreased to 60% so that a successful motor start can be achieved. This example is illustrated in Figure 77:, ILLUSTRATION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONALITY, on page 24. The lockout time is calculated as follows:
TC_used lockout_time = stopped_cool_time_constant ln ------------------------------------------ 100 TC_learned

where:
TC_used = Thermal Capacity Used TC_learned = Learned Thermal Capacity required to start stopped_cool_time = one of two variables will be used:
1. Learned cool time is enabled, or

2. Programmed stopped cool time
The setpoint, Initial Start capacity provides a value to be used in replace of the TC_learned value until the relay has observed the five successful starts and can determine a learned value. After the initial five starts, the Initial Start Capacity setpoint is ignored and learned value is automatically used. The learned start capacity is then updated every four starts. A safe margin is built into the calculation of the Learned Start Capacity Required to ensure successful completion of the longest and most demanding starts. The Learned Start Capacity is calculated as follows:
7-23
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
Learned _ Start _ Capacity =

where:
Start _ TC1 + Start _ TC 2 + Start _ TC3 + Start _ TC4 + Start _ TC5 4
Start_TC1 = the thermal capacity required for the first start Start_TC2 = the thermal capacity required for the second start etc.
Figure 77: ILLUSTRATION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONALITY
7-24
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.7 2 CT CONFIGURATION
The purpose of this Appendix is to illustrate how two CTs may be used to sense three phase currents. The proper configuration for the use of two CTs rather than three to detect phase current is shown. Each of the two CTs acts as a current source. The current that comes out of the CT on phase A flows into the interposing CT on the relay marked A. From there, the current sums with the current that is flowing from the CT on phase C which has just passed through the interposing CT on the relay marked C. This summed current flows through the interposing CT marked B and from there, the current splits up to return to its respective source (CT). Polarity is very important since the value of phase B must be the negative equivalent of 'A' + 'C' in order for the sum of all the vectors to equate to zero. Note, there is only one ground connection as shown. If two ground connections are made, a parallel path for current has been created.
Figure 78: TWO PHASE WIRING In the two CT configuration, the currents will sum vectorially at the common point of the two CTs. The diagram illustrates the two possible configurations. If one phase is reading high by a factor of 1.73 on a system that is known to be balanced, simply reverse the polarity of the leads at one of the two phase CTs (taking care that the CTs are still tied to ground at some point). Polarity is important.
Figure 79: VECTORS SHOWING REVERSE POLARITY
7-25
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
To illustrate the point further, the diagram here shows how the current in phases 'A' and 'C' sum up to create phase 'B'.
Figure 710: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT - CORRECTLY WIRED 2 CT SYSTEM Once again, if the polarity of one of the phases is out by 180 , the magnitude of the resulting vector on a balanced system will be out by a factor of 1.73.
Figure 711: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT - INCORRECTLY WIRED 2 CT SYSTEM
On a three wire supply, this configuration will always work and unbalance will be detected properly. In the event of a single phase, there will always be a large unbalance present at the interposing CTs of the relay. If for example phase A was lost, phase A would read zero while phases B and C would both read the magnitude of phase C. If on the other hand, phase B was lost, at the supply, A would be 180 out of phase with phase C and the vector addition would equal zero at phase B.
7-26
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS
The 50:0.025 ground fault input of the 369 is designed for sensitive detection of faults on a high resistance grounded system. Detection of ground currents from 1-10 amps primary translates to an input of 0.5mA to 5mA into the 50:0.025 tap. Understanding this allows the use of this input in a simple manner for the detection of ground faults on ungrounded systems. Figure 712: GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS, illustrates how a wye - open delta voltage transformer configuration may be used to detect the grounding of a phase. Under normal conditions, the net voltage of the three phases that appears across the 50:0.025 input and the resistor is close to zero. Under a fault condition, assuming the secondaries of the VTs to be 69 V, the net voltage seen by the relay and the resistor is 3Vo or (3 x 69) 207V.
7
Figure 712: GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS Since the wire resistance should be relatively small in comparison to the resistor chosen, the current that flows will be a function of the fault voltage that is seen on the open delta divided by the resistor value chosen plus the burden of the 369 50:0.025 input (1200).
For Example: If a pickup range of 10 - 100 V is desired, the resistor should be chosen as follows: 1. 1-10 A pickup on the 2000:1 tap = 0.5mA - 5mA. 2. 10V/0.5mA = 20k. 3. If the resistor chosen is 20k - 1.2k= 18.8k, the wattage should be greater than:
7-27
7.6 APPLICATIONS E/R, approximately = (207V)/18.8k = 2.28W, a 5W resistor will suffice.
7 APPLICATIONS
Note:
The VTs must have a primary rating equal or greater than the line to line voltage, as this is the voltage that will be seen by the unfaulted inputs in the event of a fault.
7-28
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY
The following is an explanation of how the RTD circuitry works in the 369 Motor Protection Relays.
Figure 713: RTD CIRCUITRY A constant current source sends 3mA DC down legs A and C. 6mA DC returns down leg B. It may be seen that: VAB = VLead A + VLead B or VAB = VCOMP + VRETURN and VBC = VHOT + VRTD + VRETURN and VBC = VLead C + VRTD + VLead B
The above holds true providing that all three leads are the same length, gage, and material, hence the same resistance. RLead A = RLead B = RLead C = RLead or RHOT = RCOMP = RRETURN = RLead Electronically, subtracting VAB from VBC leaves only the voltage across the RTD. In this manner lead length is effectively negated: VBC - VAB = {VLead + VRTD + VLead} - {VLead + VLead} VBC - VAB = VRTD
7-29
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS 7.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION
The 369 requires three leads to be brought back from each RTD: Hot, Return and Compensation. This can be quite expensive. It is however possible to reduce the number of leads required to 3 for the first RTD and 1 for each successive RTD. Refer to Figure 714: REDUCED WIRING RTDs, for wiring configuration for this application.
Figure 714: REDUCED WIRING RTDs The Hot line for each RTD would have to be run as usual for each RTD. The Compensation and Return leads however, need only be run for the first RTD. At the motor RTD terminal box, the RTD Return leads must be jumpered together with as short as possible jumpers. At the 369 relay, the Compensation leads must be jumpered together.
7-30
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
It can be noted that there is an error produced on each RTD equal to the voltage drop across the jumper on the RTD return. This error would increase on each successive RTD added. VRTD1 = VRTD1 VRTD2 = VRTD2 + VJ3 VRTD3 = VRTD3 + VJ3 + VJ4 VRTD4 = VRTD4 + VJ3+ VJ4 + VJ5 etc....
This error is directly dependent on the length and gauge of the wire used for the jumpers and any error introduced by a poor connection. For RTD types other than 10C, the error introduced by the jumpers is negligible. This RTD wiring technique reduces the cost of wiring, however, the following disadvantages must be noted: 1. Error in temperature readings due to lead and connection resistances. Not recommended for 10C RTDs. 2. If the RTD Return lead to the 369 or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will read open. 3. If the Compensation lead breaks or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will function without any lead compensation.
7-31
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS 7.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION
An example of how to add lead compensation to a two wire RTD may be seen in Figure 715: 2 WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION.
Figure 715: 2 WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION The compensation lead would be added and it would compensate for the Hot and the Return assuming they are all of equal length and gauge. To compensate for resistance of the Hot and Compensation leads, a resistor equal to the resistance of the Hot lead could be added to the compensation lead, though in many cases this is unnecessary.
7-32
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING
Figure 716: AUTO TRANSFORMER, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CIRCUIT
7-33
8 TESTING 8 TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP
8.1 TEST SETUP 8.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this testing description is to demonstrate the procedures necessary to perform a complete functional test of all the 369 hardware while also testing firmware/hardware interaction in the process. Testing of the relay during commissioning using a primary injection test set will ensure that CTs and wiring are correct and complete. 8.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP
Figure 81: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP
8-1
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8 TESTING 8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for phase current accuracy is 0.5% of 2xCT when the injected current is < 2xCT. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 1. Alter the following setpoint:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000A
2. Measured values should be within 10A of expected. Inject the values shown in the table below and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\CURRENT METERING
INJECTED CURRENT 1 A UNIT (A) 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 1.5 2
INJECTED CURRENT 5 A UNIT (A) 0.5 1.0 2.5 5 7.5 10
EXPECTED CURRENT READING (A) 100 200 500 1000 1500 2000
MEASURED CURRENT PHASE A (A)
MEASURED CURRENT PHASE B (A)
MEASURED CURRENT PHASE C (A)
8.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST The 369 specification for voltage input accuracy is 0.5% of full scale(273V). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO: 10
2. Measured values should be within 24V of expected. Apply the voltage values shown in the table and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\VOLTAGE METERING
APPLIED LINE-NEUTRAL VOLTAGE (V) 30 50 100 150 200 240
EXPECTED VOLTAGE READING (V) 300 500 1000 1500 2000 2400
MEASURED VOLTAGE A-N (V)
MEASURED VOLTAGE B-N (V)
MEASURED VOLTAGE C-N (V)
8-2
8 TESTING
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.2.3 GROUND (1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for the 1A/5A ground current input accuracy is 0.5% of 1xCT for the 5A input and 0.5% of 5xCT for the 1A input. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 5A INPUT 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE : 5A Secondary SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A
2. Measured values should be 5A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
INJECTED CURRENT 5 A UNIT (A) 0.5 1.0 2.5 5 1A INPUT
EXPECTED CURRENT READING (A) 100 200 500 1000
MEASURED GROUND CURRENT (A)
1. Alter the following setpoints:

SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE: 1A Secondary SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A
2. Measured values should be 25A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
INJECTED CURRENT 1 A UNIT (A) 0.1 0.2 0.5 1
EXPECTED CURRENT READING (A) 100 200 500 1000
8-3
8 TESTING 8.2.4 MULTILIN 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for Multilin 50:0.025 ground current input accuracy is 0.5% of CT rated primary (25A). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 1. Alter the following setpoint:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE: MULTILIN 50:0.025
2. Measured values should be within0.125A of expected. Inject the values shown in the table below either as primary values into a Multilin 50:0.025 Core Balance CT or as secondary values that simulate the core balance CT. Verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
PRIMARY INJECTED SECONDARY CURRENT INJECTED CURRENT 50:0.025 CT (mA) (A) 0.25 0.125 1 0.5 10 5 25 12.5
EXPECTED CURRENT READING (A) 0.25 1.00 10.00 25.00
8.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST The 369 specification for RTD input accuracy is 2 . Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S8:RTD TEMPERATURE \ RTD TYPE \ STATOR RTD TYPE: 100 ohm Platinum
(select desired type) 2. Measured values should be 2 C or 4 F. Alter the resistances applied to the RTD inputs as per the table below to simulate RTDs and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\ LOCAL RTD ( and / or REMOTE RTD if using the RRTD Module)
3. Select the preferred temperature units for the display. Alter the following setpoint:
SETPOINT S1: 369 SETUP \ DISPLAY PREFERENCES \ TEMPERATURE DISPLAY : Celsius ( or Fahrenheit if preferred)
4. Repeat the above measurements for the other RTD types. ( 120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Nickel and 10 Ohm Copper ).
8-4
8 TESTING
MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE APPLIED RESISTANCE 100 OHM PLATINUM (ohm) 80.31 100.00 119.39 138.50 157.32 175.84 194.08 APPLIED RESISTANCE 120 OHM NICKEL (ohm) 86.17 120.00 157.74 200.64 248.95 303.46 366.53 EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( C) -50 0 50 100 150 200 250 EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( C) -50 0 50 100 150 200 250 EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( F) -58 32 122 212 302 392 482 EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( F) -58 32 122 212 302 392 482 MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE ____( C ) ____( F ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SELECT ONE ____( C ) ____( F ) 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11
12
APPLIED RESISTANCE 100 OHM NICKEL (ohm) 71.81 100.00 131.45 167.20 207.45 252.88 305.44
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( C) -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( F) -58 32 122 212 302 392 482
MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE ____( C ) ____( F ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
8-5
8 TESTING MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE ____( C ) ____( F ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
APPLIED RESISTANCE 10 OHM COPPER (ohm) 7.10 9.04 10.97 12.90 14.83 16.78 18.73
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( C) -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING ( F) -58 32 122 212 302 392 482
11
12
8-6
8 TESTING
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION
The digital inputs and trip coil supervision can be verified easily with a simple switch or pushbutton. Perform the steps below to verify functionality of the digital inputs. 1. Open switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision circuit. 2. View the status of the digital inputs and trip coil supervision in:
ACTUAL VALUES A1: \ STATUS \ DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
3. Close switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision circuit. 4. View the status of the digital inputs and trip coil supervision in:
ACTUAL VALUES A1: \ STATUS \ DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
EXPECTED STATUS (SWITCH OPEN) SPARE Open DIFFERENTIAL RELAY Open SPEED SWITCH Open ACCESS SWITCH Open EMERGENCY RESTART Open EXTERNAL RESET Open INPUT
PASS FAIL
EXPECTED STATUS (SWITCH CLOSED) Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted
PASS FAIL
8-7
8 TESTING 8.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
The 369 specification for analog input and analog output accuracy is 1% of full scale. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 4-20mA 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S10:ANALOG OUTPUTS \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 \ ANALOG RANGE: 4-20 mA
(repeat for analog inputs 2-4) 2. Analog output values should be 0.2mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS \ FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 : 0%
(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2-4) 3. Verify the ammeter readings for all the analog outputs 4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings
.
ANALOG OUTPUT FORCE VALUE 0 25 50 75 100 0-1mA
EXPECTED AMMETER READING (mA) 4 8 12 16 20
MEASURED AMMETER READING (mA) 1 2 3 4

8-8
8 TESTING
.
ANALOG OUTPUT FORCE VALUE 0 25 50 75 100 0-20mA

.
ANALOG OUTPUT FORCE VALUE 0 25 50 75 100
8-9
8 TESTING 8.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS
To verify the functionality of the output relays, perform the following steps: 1. Use the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST OUTPUT RELAYS\FORCE TRIP RELAY: Energized SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST OUTPUT RELAYS\FORCE TRIP RELAY DURATION: Static
2. Using the above setpoints, individually select each of the other output relays ( AUX 1, AUX 2 and ALARM) and verify operation
.
FORCE OPERATION SETPOINT R1 Trip R2 Auxiliary R3 Auxiliary R4 Alarm
EXPECTED MEASUREMENT for SHORT R1 R2 R3 R4 no nc no nc no nc no nc

ACTUAL MEASUREMENT for SHORT R1 R2 R3 R4 no nc no nc no nc no nc
8-10
8 TESTING 8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST
The 369 specification for overload curve timing accuracy is 100ms or 2% of time to trip. Pickup accuracy is as per the current inputs (0.5% of 2xCT when the injected current is < 2xCT and 1% of 20xCT when the injected current is 2xCT). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000 SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA: 1000 SETPOINT S3:OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ OVERLOAD CURVES \ SELECT CURVE STYLE: Standard SETPOINTS3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ OVERLOAD CURVES \ STANDARD OVELOAD CURVE NUMBER : 4 SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL: 1.10 SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR: 0 SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ HOT / COLD SAFE STALL RATIO: 1.00 SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ ENABLE RTD BIASING: No
2. Any trip must be reset prior to each test. Short the emergency restart terminals momentarily immediately prior to each overload curve test to ensure that the thermal capacity used is zero. Failure to do so will result in shorter trip times. Inject the current of the proper amplitude to obtain the values as shown and verify the trip times. Motor load may be viewed in:
Thermal capacity used and estimated time to trip may be viewed in:
ACTUAL VALUES A1:\STATUS\MOTOR STATUS
AVERAGE PHASE CURRENT DISPLAYED (A) 1050 1200 1750 3000 6000 10000
INJECTED CURRENT 1 A UNIT (A) 1.05 1.20 1.75 3.0 6.0 10.0
PICKUP LEVEL 1.05 1.20 1.75 3.00 6.00 10.00
EXPECTED TIME TO TRIP (s) never 795.44 169.66 43.73 9.99 5.55
TOLERANCE RANGE (s) n/a 779.53-811.35 166.27-173.05 42.86-44.60 9.79-10.19 5.44-5.66
MEASURED TIME TO TRIP (s)
8.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST The 369 specification for reactive and apparent power is 1.5% of 2xCTxVT full scale @ Iavg <2xCT. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000 SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT RATIO: 10.00:1
2. Inject current and apply voltage as per the table below. Verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
8-11

ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\POWER METERING INJECTED INJECTED CURRENT CURRENT 1A UNIT, 5A UNIT, APPLIED VOLTAGE APPLIED VOLTAGE (Ia is reference (Ia is reference vector) vector)
8 TESTING
EXPECTED LEVEL OF POWER QUANTITY
TOLERANCE MEASURED RANGE POWER OF POWER QUANTITY QUANTITY
EXPECTED POWER FACTOR
MEASURED POWER FACTOR
Ia=1A 0 Ib=1A 120 Ic=1A 240 Va=120V 342 Vb=120V 102 Vc=120V 222 Ia=1A 0 Ib=1A 120 Ic=1A 240 Va=120V 288 Vb=120V 48 Vc=120V 168
Ia=5A 0 Ib=5A 120 Ic=5A 240 Va=120V 342 Vb=120V 102 Vc=120V 222 Ia=5A 0 Ib=5A 120 Ic=5A 240 Va=120V 288 Vb=120V 48 Vc=120V 168
+ 3424 kW
3352-3496 kW
0.95 lag
+ 3424 kvar
3352-3496 kvar
0.31 lag
8.3.3 UNBALANCE TEST The 369 measures the ratio of negative sequence current (l2) to positive sequence current (l1). This value as a percent is used as the unbalanced level when motor load exceeds FLA. When the average phase current is below FLA, the unbalanced value is derated to prevent nuisance tripping as positive sequence current is much smaller and negative sequence current remains relatively constant. A sample calculation is biven below.
I Iavg The derating formula is: 2 x100% I 1 FLA
Figure 82: THREE PHASE EXAMPLE FOR UNBALANCE CALCULATION
8-12
8 TESTING
Symmetrical component analysis of vectors using the mathematic vector convention yields a ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current as shown:
I2
1 (I + a 2I + aI ) a c b = 3 1 (I + aI + a 2I ) I1 c b 3 a
=
where a = 1120 = 0.5 + j0.866
I2 I1
7800+(1120 )2 (1000 113 ) + (1120 )(1000113 ) 7800+(1120 )(1000 113 ) + (1120 )2 (1000113 )
if, FLA=1000
I2 I1 I2 I1
I2 I1 I2 I1
7800+1000127+1000233 7800+10007+1000353 ) 780 6018 + j798.6 + 6018 j798.6 . . 780 + 992.5 + j1219 + 992.5 j1219 . .
780 A + 1000 A + 1000A 3
Iavg =
= 926.7 A
and since, (Iavg =926.7A) < (FLA=1000)

=
423.6 2765
UNBALANCE = 0.1532 926.7 1000 x100% =
= -0.1532
14.2%
The 369 specification for unbalance accuracy is 2%. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000 A SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ MOTOR FLA: 1000 A
2. Inject the values shown in the table below and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
INJECTED CURRENT 1A UNIT (A) Ia= 0.78 0 Ib=1 113 Ic=1 226 Ia=1.56 0 Ib=2 113 Ic=2 226 Ia= 0.39 0 Ib=0.5 113 Ic=0.5 226
INJECTED CURRENT 1A UNIT (A) Ia= 3.9 0 Ib=5 113 Ic=5 226 Ia=7.8 0 Ib=10 113 Ic=10 226 Ia= 1.95 0 Ib=2.5 113 Ic=2.5 226
EXPECTED UNBALANCE LEVEL (%) 14
MEASURED UNBALANCE LEVEL
15
8-13
8 TESTING 8.3.4 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST
The 369 can detect voltage phase rotation and protect against phase reversal. To test the phase reversal element, perform the following steps: 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye or Delta SETPOINT S7:VOLTAGE ELEMENTS \ PHASE REVERSAL \ PHASE REVERSAL TRIP: On SETPOINT S7:VOLTAGE ELEMENTS \ PHASE REVERSAL \ ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip SETPOINT S2: SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE : ABC
2. Apply voltages as per the table below. Verify the 369 operation on voltage phase reversal.
APPLIED VOLTAGE
Va=120V 0 Vb=120V 120 Vc=120V 240 Va=120V 0 Vb=120V 240 Vc=120V 120
EXPECTED RESULT NO TRIP PHASE REVERSAL TRIP
OBSERVED RESULT NO TRIP PHASE REVERSAL TRIP
8-14
8 TESTING
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.3.5 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST
The 369 specification for short circuit timing is +40ms or 0.5% of total time. The pickup accuracy is as per the phase current inputs. Perform the steps below to verify the performance of the short circuit element. 1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000 SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP: On SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP LEVEL: 5.0 x CT SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ ADD S/C DELAY: 0
2. Inject current as per the table below, resetting the unit after each trip by pressing the [RESET] key, and verify timing accuracy. Pre-trip values may be viewed in
ACTUAL VALUES A1: STATUS \ LAST TRIP DATA \
INJECTED CURRENT 5A UNIT (A) 30 40 50
INJECTED CURRENT 1A UNIT (A) 6 8 10
EXPECTED TIME TO TRIP (ms)
MEASURED TIME TO TRIP (ms)
<40 <40 <40
8-15
9 COMMISSIONING 9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS Table 91: SETPOINTS TABLE (Sheet 1 of 16)
GROUP DESCRIPTION MIN. 0 5 10 0 0.1 C 1 1200 None 1200 None 1200 None RS485 1200 None 0 8x8 0 0 0 0 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 1 1 1 None 1 100 Off 50,60 ABC Off None 1 Off
9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS 9.1.1 SETPOINTS TABLE
MAX. 65535 100 900 255 6.0 F 254 19200 odd, even 19200 odd, even 19200 odd, even fiber 19200 odd, even 100 1x64 40 char. 40 char. 40 char. 40 char. 40 char. No No No No No No No No No No No 5000 5000 5,or 50:.025 5000 Wye,Delta 240 20000 AB,CB,AN,BN ,CN Variable ACB L,UL Aux2 50000 On
SETTING
SETPOINT ACCESS Access Level Access Password DISPLAY Default Message Cycle Time PROPERTIES Default Message Timeout Contrast Adjustment Display Update Interval Temperature Display Units COMMUNICATIONS Slave Address Computer RS232 Baud Rate Computer RS232 Parity Channel 1 Baud Rate Channel 1 Parity Channel 2 Baud Rate Channel 2 Parity Channel 3 Connection Channel 3 Baud Rate Channel 3 Parity WAVEFORM Trigger Position CAPTURE Number of Records MESSAGE Text Message 1 SCRATCHPAD Text Message 2 Text Message 3 Text Message 4 Text Message 5 DEFAULT Default to Current Metering MESSAGES Default to Motor Load Default to Delta Voltage Metering Default to Power Factor Default to Positive Watthours Default to Real Power Default to Reactive Power Default to Hottest Stator RTD Default to Text Message 1 Default to Text Message 2 INSTALLED Enable RRTD Module CT / VT SETUP Phase CT Primary Motor Full Load Amps Ground CT Type Ground CT Primary Voltage Transformer Connection Type Voltage Transformer Ratio Motor Rated Voltage Voltage Single VT Operation Nominal Frequency System Phase Sequence Trip Counter Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Alarm Pickup Level Trip Counter Alarm Events
TRIP COUNTER
9-1
9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS Table 91: SETPOINTS TABLE (Sheet 2 of 16)

GROUP DESCRIPTION MIN. Off Breaker None 10 Off 5 Off None 10 Off 5 Off None 1 Off 5 Off None 1 Off 5 Off None 1 Off All FS All FS All FS All FS Off None 1.01 Off None 1 No None No Learned 0.01 No 1 1 No 0 min mid MAX. L,UL Contactor Aux2 1000 On 90 L,UL Aux2 65535 On 90 L,UL Aux2 50000 On 90 L,UL Aux2 50000 On 90 L,UL Aux2 50000 On Local,Remote NFS Local,Remote NFS Local,Remote NFS Local,Remote NFS On Aux2 1.25 L,UL Aux2 100 Yes Aux2 Yes 29 1 Yes 500 500 Yes mid max 200
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
STARTER FAILURE Starter Failure Alarm Starter Type Assign Alarm Relays Starter Failure Delay Starter Failure Alarm Events CURRENT DEMAND Current Demand Period Current Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Current Demand Alarm Level Current Demand Alarm Events kW DEMAND kW Demand Period kW Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays kW Demand Alarm Level kW Demand Alarm Events kvar DEMAND kvar Demand Period kvar Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays kvar Demand Alarm Level kvar Demand Alarm Events kVA DEMAND kVA Demand Period kVA Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays kVA Demand Alarm Level kVA Demand Alarm Events OUTPUT RELAY Trip Relay Reset Mode Trip Relay Operation Aux1 Relay Reset Mode Aux1 Relay Operation Aux2 Relay Reset Mode Aux2 Relay Operation Alarm Relay Reset Mode Alarm Relay Operation SERIAL COM. Serial Communication Control CONTROL Assign Start Control Relays THERMAL MODEL Overload Pickup Level Thermal Capacity Alarm Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays Thermal Capacity Alarm Level Thermal Capacity Alarm Events Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay Enable Unbalance Biasing Unbalance k Factor Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio Enable Learned Cool Time Running Cool Time Constant Stopped Cool Time Constant Enable RTD Biasing RTD Bias Minimum RTD Bias Center Point RTD Bias Maximum
9-2
9 COMMISSIONING Table 91: SETPOINTS TABLE (Sheet 3 of 16)

GROUP O/L CURVE SETUP DESCRIPTION MIN. Standard 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Off 1.01 None 0.1 Off Off None 2.0 0.00 Off None 0.00 Off None 1.01 0.5 Off Off None 1.01 0.5
MAX. Custom 15 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 L,UL 1.50 Aux2 60.0 On L,UL Aux2 20.0 255.00 L,UL Aux2 255.00 L,UL Aux2 6.00 125.0 On L,UL Aux2 6.00 125.0
SETTING
Select Curve Style Standard Overload Curve Number Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.05 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.10 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.20 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.30 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.40 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.25 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.25 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.25 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 5.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 5.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 6.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 6.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 7.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 7.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 8.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 10.0 x FLA Time to Trip at 15.0 x FLA Time to Trip at 20.0 x FLA OVERLOAD ALARM Overload Alarm Overload Alarm Level Assign Overload Alarm Relays Overload Alarm Delay Overload Alarm Events SHORT CIRCUIT Short Circuit Trip Assign Trip Relays Short Circuit Pickup Short Circuit Trip Delay Short Circuit Trip Backup Assign Backup Relays Short Circuit Trip Backup Delay MECHNICAL JAM Mechanical Jam Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Mechanical Jam Alarm Pickup Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay Mechanical Jam Alarm Events Mechanical Jam Trip Assign Trip Relays Mechanical Jam Trip Pickup Mechanical Jam Trip Delay
9-3

GROUP UNDERCURRENT DESCRIPTION Block Undercurrent from Start Undercurrent Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Undercurrent Alarm Pickup Undercurrent Alarm Delay Undercurrent Alarm Events Undercurrent Trip Assign Trip Relays Undercurrent Trip Pickup Undercurrent Trip Delay Block Unbalance From Start Current Unbalance Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Unbalance Alarm Pickup Unbalance Alarm Delay Unbalance Alarm Events Current Unbalance Trip Assign Trip Relays Unbalance Trip Pickup Unbalance Trip Delay Ground Fault Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Ground Fault Alarm Pickup Alarm Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 Ground Fault Alarm Delay Ground Fault Alarm Events Ground Fault Trip Assign Trip Relays Ground Fault Trip Pickup Trip Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 Ground Fault Trip Delay Ground Fault Trip Backup Ground Fault Trip Backup Relays Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay Acceleration Trip Assign Trip Relays Acceleration Timer From Start Enable Single Shot Restart Enable Start Inhibit Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible Time Between Starts Restart Block Assign Start Inhibit Relays Enable Back-Spin Start Inhibit Low Frequency Start Level Minimum Voltage Samples before start Backspin Timer Assign Backspin Inhibit Relays MIN. 0 Off None 0.1 1 Off Off None 0.1 1 0 Off None 4 1 Off Off None 4 1 Off None 0.10 0.25 0.00 Off Off None 0.10 0.25 0.00 Off None 0.01 Off None 1 No No Off Off Off None No 2 30 1 1 None MAX. 15000 L,UL Aux2 0.99 255 On L,UL Aux2 0.99 255 5000 L,UL Aux2 30 255 On L,UL Aux2 30 255 L,UL Aux2 1.00 25.00 255.00 On L,UL Aux2 1.00 25.00 255.00 On Aux1, Aux2 255.00 L,UL Aux2 250 Yes Yes 5 500 50000 Aux2 Yes 30 15000 10000 50000 Aux2
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
CURRENT UNBALANCE
GROUND FAULT
ACCELERATION TRIP START INHIBITS
BACKSPIN DETECTION
9-4

GROUP Local RTD #1 DESCRIPTION Local RTD #1 Application Local RTD #1 RTD Type Local RTD #1 Name Local RTD #1 Alarm Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays Local RTD #1 Alarm Level Local RTD #1 High Alarm Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events Local RTD #1 Trip Local RTD #1 Trip Relays Local RTD #1 Trip Level Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting Local RTD #2 Application Local RTD #2 RTD Type Local RTD #2 Name Local RTD #2 Alarm Local RTD #2 Alarm Relays Local RTD #2 Alarm Level Local RTD #2 High Alarm Local RTD #2 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #2 High Alarm Level Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events Local RTD #2 Trip Local RTD #2 Trip Relays Local RTD #2 Trip Level Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting Local RTD #3 Application Local RTD #3 RTD Type Local RTD #3 Name Local RTD #3 Alarm Local RTD #3 Alarm Relays Local RTD #3 Alarm Level Local RTD #3 High Alarm Local RTD #3 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #3 High Alarm Level Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events Local RTD #3 Trip Local RTD #3 Trip Relays Local RTD #3 Trip Level Enable RTD #3 Trip Voting MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off
MAX. S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator
SETTING
Local RTD #2
Local RTD #3
9-5

GROUP Local RTD #4 DESCRIPTION Local RTD #4 Application Local RTD #4 RTD Type Local RTD #4 Name Local RTD #4 Alarm Local RTD #4 Alarm Relays Local RTD #4 Alarm Level Local RTD #4 High Alarm Local RTD #4 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #4 High Alarm Level Record RTD #4 Alarms as Events Local RTD #4 Trip Local RTD #4 Trip Relays Local RTD #4 Trip Level Enable RTD #4 Trip Voting Local RTD #5 Application Local RTD #5 RTD Type Local RTD #5 Name Local RTD #5 Alarm Local RTD #5 Alarm Relays Local RTD #5 Alarm Level Local RTD #5 High Alarm Local RTD #5 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #5 High Alarm Level Record RTD #5 Alarms as Events Local RTD #5 Trip Local RTD #5 Trip Relays Local RTD #5 Trip Level Enable RTD #5 Trip Voting Local RTD #6 Application Local RTD #6 RTD Type Local RTD #6 Name Local RTD #6 Alarm Local RTD #6 Alarm Relays Local RTD #6 Alarm Level Local RTD #6 High Alarm Local RTD #6 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #6 High Alarm Level Record RTD #6 Alarms as Events Local RTD #6 Trip Local RTD #6 Trip Relays Local RTD #6 Trip Level Enable RTD #6 Trip Voting MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off MAX. S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
Local RTD #5
Local RTD #6
9-6

GROUP Local RTD #7 DESCRIPTION Local RTD #7 Application Local RTD #7 RTD Type Local RTD #7 Name Local RTD #7 Alarm Local RTD #7 Alarm Relays Local RTD #7 Alarm Level Local RTD #7 High Alarm Local RTD #7 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #7 High Alarm Level Record RTD #7 Alarms as Events Local RTD #7 Trip Local RTD #7 Trip Relays Local RTD #7 Trip Level Enable RTD #7 Trip Voting Local RTD #8 Application Local RTD #8 RTD Type Local RTD #8 Name Local RTD #8 Alarm Local RTD #8 Alarm Relays Local RTD #8 Alarm Level Local RTD #8 High Alarm Local RTD #8 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #8 High Alarm Level Record RTD #8 Alarms as Events Local RTD #8 Trip Local RTD #8 Trip Relays Local RTD #8 Trip Level Enable RTD #8 Trip Voting Local RTD #9 Application Local RTD #9 RTD Type Local RTD #9 Name Local RTD #9 Alarm Local RTD #9 Alarm Relays Local RTD #9 Alarm Level Local RTD #9 High Alarm Local RTD #9 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #9 High Alarm Level Record RTD #9 Alarms as Events Local RTD #9 Trip Local RTD #9 Trip Relays Local RTD #9 Trip Level Enable RTD #9 Trip Voting MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off
SETTING
Local RTD #8
Local RTD #9
9-7

GROUP Local RTD #10 DESCRIPTION Local RTD #10 Application Local RTD #10 RTD Type Local RTD #10 Name Local RTD #10 Alarm Local RTD #10 Alarm Relays Local RTD #10 Alarm Level Local RTD #10 High Alarm Local RTD #10 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #10 High Alarm Level Record RTD #10 Alarms as Events Local RTD #10 Trip Local RTD #10 Trip Relays Local RTD #10 Trip Level Enable RTD #10 Trip Voting Local RTD #11 Application Local RTD #11 RTD Type Local RTD #11 Name Local RTD #11 Alarm Local RTD #11 Alarm Relays Local RTD #11 Alarm Level Local RTD #11 High Alarm Local RTD #11 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #11 High Alarm Level Record RTD #11 Alarms as Events Local RTD #11 Trip Local RTD #11 Trip Relays Local RTD #11 Trip Level Enable RTD #11 Trip Voting Local RTD #12 Application Local RTD #12 RTD Type Local RTD #12 Name Local RTD #12 Alarm Local RTD #12 Alarm Relays Local RTD #12 Alarm Level Local RTD #12 High Alarm Local RTD #12 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #12 High Alarm Level Record RTD #12 Alarms as Events Local RTD #12 Trip Local RTD #12 Trip Relays Local RTD #12 Trip Level Enable RTD #12 Trip Voting MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off MAX. S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
Local RTD #11
Local RTD#12
9-8

GROUP Remote RTD #1 DESCRIPTION Remote RTD #1 Application Remote RTD #1 RTD Type Remote RTD #1 Name Remote RTD #1 Alarm Remote RTD #1 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #1 Alarm Level Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Level Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #1 Trip Remote RTD #1 Trip Relays Remote RTD #1 Trip Level Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting Remote RTD #2 Application Remote RTD #2 RTD Type Remote RTD #2 Name Remote RTD #2 Alarm Remote RTD #2 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #2 Alarm Level Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Level Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #2 Trip Remote RTD #2 Trip Relays Remote RTD #2 Trip Level Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting Remote RTD #3 Application Remote RTD #3 RTD Type Remote RTD #3 Name Remote RTD #3 Alarm Remote RTD #3 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #3 Alarm Level Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Level Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #3 Trip Remote RTD #3 Trip Relays Remote RTD #3 Trip Level Enable RTD #3 Trip Voting MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off
SETTING
Remote RTD #2
Remote RTD #3
9-9

GROUP Remote RTD #4 DESCRIPTION Remote RTD #4 Application Remote RTD #4 RTD Type Remote RTD #4 Name Remote RTD #4 Alarm Remote RTD #4 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #4 Alarm Level Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Level Record RTD #4 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #4 Trip Remote RTD #4 Trip Relays Remote RTD #4 Trip Level Enable RTD #4 Trip Voting Remote RTD #5 Application Remote RTD #5 RTD Type Remote RTD #5 Name Remote RTD #5 Alarm Remote RTD #5 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #5 Alarm Level Remote RTD #5 High Alarm Remote RTD #5 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #5 High Alarm Level Record RTD #5 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #5 Trip Remote RTD #5 Trip Relays Remote RTD #5 Trip Level Enable RTD #5 Trip Voting Remote RTD #6 Application Remote RTD #6 RTD Type Remote RTD #6 Name Remote RTD #6 Alarm Remote RTD #6 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #6 Alarm Level Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Level Record RTD #6 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #6 Trip Remote RTD #6 Trip Relays Remote RTD #6 Trip Level Enable RTD #6 Trip Voting MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off MAX. S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
Remote RTD #5
Remote RTD #6
9-10

GROUP Remote RTD #7 DESCRIPTION Remote RTD #7 Application Remote RTD #7 RTD Type Remote RTD #7 Name Remote RTD #7 Alarm Remote RTD #7 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #7 Alarm Level Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Level Record RTD #7 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #7 Trip Remote RTD #7 Trip Relays Remote RTD #7 Trip Level Enable RTD #7 Trip Voting Remote RTD #8 Application Remote RTD #8 RTD Type Remote RTD #8 Name Remote RTD #8 Alarm Remote RTD #8 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #8 Alarm Level Remote RTD #8 High Alarm Remote RTD #8 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #8 High Alarm Level Record RTD #8 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #8 Trip Remote RTD #8 Trip Relays Remote RTD #8 Trip Level Enable RTD #8 Trip Voting Remote RTD #9 Application Remote RTD #9 RTD Type Remote RTD #9 Name Remote RTD #9 Alarm Remote RTD #9 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #9 Alarm Level Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Level Record RTD #9 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #9 Trip Remote RTD #9 Trip Relays Remote RTD #9 Trip Level Enable RTD #9 Trip Voting MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off
SETTING
Remote RTD #8
Remote RTD #9
9-11

GROUP Remote RTD #10 DESCRIPTION MIN. None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off None 10C,100P 0 Off None 1 Off None 1 No Off None 1 Off Off None Off Off None Off Off None Off MAX. S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator S,B,A,O 100N,120N 8 chars. L,UL Aux2 200 L,UL Aux2 200 Yes L,UL Aux2 200 1-12,Stator L,UL Aux2 On L,UL Aux2 On L,UL Aux2 On
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
Remote RTD #10 Application Remote RTD #10 RTD Type Remote RTD #10 Name Remote RTD #10 Alarm Remote RTD #10 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #10 Alarm Level Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Level Record RTD #10 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #10 Trip Remote RTD #10 Trip Relays Remote RTD #10 Trip Level Enable RTD #10 Trip Voting Remote RTD #11 Remote RTD #11 Application Remote RTD #11 RTD Type Remote RTD #11 Name Remote RTD #11 Alarm Remote RTD #11 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #11 Alarm Level Remote RTD #11 High Alarm Remote RTD #11 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #11 High Alarm Level Record RTD #11 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #11 Trip Remote RTD #11 Trip Relays Remote RTD #11 Trip Level Enable RTD #11 Trip Voting Remote RTD #12 Remote RTD #12 Application Remote RTD #12 RTD Type Remote RTD #12 Name Remote RTD #12 Alarm Remote RTD #12 Alarm Relays Remote RTD #12 Alarm Level Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Level Record RTD #12 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #12 Trip Remote RTD #12 Trip Relays Remote RTD #12 Trip Level Enable RTD #12 Trip Voting OPEN RTD ALARM Open RTD Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Open RTD Alarm Events SHORT/LOW TEMP Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm RTD ALARM Assign Alarm Relays Short / Low Temp Alarm Events LOSS OF REMOTE Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm RTD COMMs Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Relays Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Events
9-12

GROUP UNDERVOLTAGE DESCRIPTION MIN. No Off None 0.50 0.50 0.0 Off Off None 0.50 0.50 0.0 Off None 1.01 0.0 Off Off None 1.01 0.0 Off None 0 Off None 20.00 0.0 Off Off None 20.00 0.0 0 Off None 20.00 0.1 Off Off None 20.00 0.1 0 Off None 0.5 0.1 Off Off None 0.5 0.1
MAX. Yes L,UL Aux2 0.99 0.99 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 0.99 0.99 255.0 L,UL Aux2 1.25 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 1.25 255.0 L,UL Aux2 5000 L,UL Aux2 70.00 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 70.00 255.0 5000 L,UL Aux2 70.00 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 70.00 255.0 5000 L,UL ,Aux2 0.99 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 0.99 255.0
SETTING
Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped Undervoltage Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup Running Undervoltage Alarm Pickup Undervoltage Alarm Delay Undervoltage Alarm Events Undervoltage Trip Undervoltage Trip Relays Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup Running Undervoltage Trip Pickup Undervoltage Trip Delay OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage Alarm Overvoltage Alarm Relays Overvoltage Alarm Pickup Overvoltage Alarm Delay Overvoltage Alarm Events Overvoltage Trip Overvoltage Trip Relays Overvoltage Trip Pickup Overvoltage Trip Delay PHASE REVERSAL Phase Reversal Trip AssignTrip Relays UNDER Block Underfrequency on Start FREQUENCY Underfrequency Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Underfrequency Alarm Level Underfrequency Alarm Delay Underfrequency Alarm Events Underfrequency Trip Assign Trip Relays Underfrequency Trip Level Underfrequency Trip Delay OVER FREQUENCY Block Overrfrequency on Start Overfrequency Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Overfrequency Alarm Level Overfrequency Alarm Delay Overfrequency Alarm Events Overfrequency Trip Assign Trip Relays Overfrequency Trip Level Overfrequency Trip Delay LEAD POWER Block Lead Power Factor From Start FACTOR Power Factor Lead Alarm Power Factor Lead Alarm Relays Power Factor Lead Alarm Level Power Factor Lead Alarm Delay Power Factor Lead Alarm Events Power Factor Lead Trip Power Factor Lead Trip Relays Power Factor Lead Trip Level Power Factor Trip Lead Delay
9-13

GROUP LAG POWER FACTOR DESCRIPTION Block Lag Power Factor From Start Lag Power Factor Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Lag Power Factor Alarm Level Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay Lag Power Factor Alarm Events Lag Power Factor Trip AssignTrip Relays Lag Power Factor Trip Level Lag Power Factor Trip Delay Block Positive kvar Element From Start Positive kvar Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Positive kvar Alarm Level Positive kvar Alarm Delay Positive kvar Alarm Events Positive kvar Trip Assign Trip Relays Positive kvar Trip Level Positive kvar Trip Delay Block kvar Element from Start Negative kvar Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Negative kvar Alarm Level Negative kvar Alarm Delay Negative kvar Alarm Events Negative kvar Trip Assign Trip Relays Negative kvar Trip Level Negative kvar Trip Delay Block Underpower From Start Underpower Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Underpower Alarm Level Underpower Alarm Delay Underpower Alarm Events Underpower Trip Underpower Trip Relays Underpower Trip Level Underpower Trip Delay Block Reverse Power From Start Reverse Power Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Reverse Power Alarm Level Reverse Power Alarm Delay Reverse Power Alarm Events Reverse Power Trip Assign Trip Relays Reverse Power Trip Level Reverse Power Trip Delay MIN. 0 Off None 0.5 0.1 Off Off None 0.5 0.1 0 Off None 1 0.1 Off Off None 1 0.1 0 Off None 1 0.1 Off Off None 1 0.1 0 Off None 1 0.5 Off Off None 1 0.5 0 Off None 1 0.5 Off Off None 1 0.5 MAX. 5000 L,UL Aux2 0.99 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 0.99 255.0 5000 L,UL Aux2 25000 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 25000 255.0 5000 L,UL Aux2 25000 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 25000 255.0 15000 L,UL Aux2 25000 255.0 On L,UL Aux2 25000 255.0 50000 L,UL Aux2 25000 30.0 On L,UL Aux2 25000 30.0
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
UNDER POWER
REVERSE POWER
9-14

GROUP SPARE SWITCH DESCRIPTION Spare Switch Assignable Function Starter Aux Contact Type General Spare Switch Name General Spare Switch Type General Spare Switch Block Input From Start General Spare Switch Alarm General Spare Switch Alarm Relays General Spare Switch Alarm Delay General Spare Switch Alarm Events General Spare Switch Trip General Spare Switch Trip Relays General Spare Switch Trip Delay Emergency Switch Assignable Function General Emergency Switch Name General Emergency Switch Type General Emergency Switch Block Input From Start General Emergency Switch Alarm General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay General Emergency Switch Alarm Events General Emergency Switch Trip General Emergency Switch Trip Relays General Emergency Switch Trip Delay Differential Switch Assignable Function Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays General Differential Switch Name General Differential Switch Type General Differential Switch Block Input From Start General Differential Switch Alarm General Differential Switch Alarm Relays General Differential Switch Alarm Delay General Differential Switch Alarm Events General Differential Switch Trip General Differential Switch Trip Relays General Differential Switch Trip Delay Speed Switch Assignable Function Speed Switch Delay Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays General Speed Switch Name General Speed Switch Type General Speed Switch Block Input from Start General Speed Switch Alarm General Speed Switch Alarm Relays General Speed Switch Alarm Delay General Speed Switch Alarm Events General Speed Switch Trip General Speed Switch Trip Relays General Speed Switch Trip Delay MIN. Off 52a 0 NO 0 Off None 0.1 Off Off None 0.1 Off 0 NO 0 Off None 0.1 Off Off None 0.1 Off None 0 NO 0 Off None 0.1 Off Off None 0.1 Off 0.5 None 0 NO 0 Off None 0.1 Off Off None 0.1
MAX. See manual 52b 12 chars. NC 5000 L,UL Aux2 5000.0 On L,UL Aux2 5000.0 See manual 12 chars. NC 5000 L,UL Aux2 5000.0 On L,UL Aux2 5000.0 See manual Aux2 12 chars. NC 5000 L,UL Aux2 5000.0 On L,UL Aux2 5000.0 See manual 100.0 Aux2 12 chars. NC 5000 L,UL Aux2 5000.0 On L,UL Aux2 5000.0
SETTING
EMERGENCY SWITCH
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
SPEED SWITCH
9-15

GROUP REMOTE RESET SWITCH DESCRIPTION Reset Switch Assignable Function First Character of Reset Switch Name General Reset Switch Type General Reset Switch Block Input From Start General Reset Switch Alarm General Reset Switch Alarm Relays General Reset Switch Alarm Delay General Reset Switch Alarm Events General Reset Switch Trip General Reset Switch Trip Relays General Reset Switch Trip Delay Counter Name Counter Units Counter Type Digital Counter Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Counter Alarm Level Record Alarms as Events Enable Analog Output 1 Analog Output 1 Range Analog Output 1 Parameter Analog Output 1 Minimum Analog Output 1 Maximum Enable Analog Output 2 Analog Output 2 Range Analog Output 2 Parameter Analog Output 2 Minimum Analog Output 2 Maximum Enable Analog Output 3 Analog Output 3 Range Analog Output 3 Parameter Analog Output 3 Minimum Analog Output 3 Maximum Enable Analog Output 4 Analog Output 4 Range Analog Output 4 Parameter Analog Output 4 Minimum Analog Output 4 Maximum MIN. Off 0 NO 0 Off None 0.1 Off Off None 0.1 0 0 Increment Off None 0 No Disabled 0-1 Disabled 0-1 Disabled 0-1 Disabled 0-1 MAX. See manual 12 chars. NC 5000 L,UL Aux2 5000.0 On L,UL Aux2 5000.0 8 chars. 6 chars. Decrement L,UL Aux2 65535 Yes Enabled 0-20,4-20 See Manual See Manual See Manual Enabled 0-20,4-20 See Manual See Manual See Manual Enabled 0-20,4-20 See Manual See Manual See Manual Enabled 0-20,4-20 See Manual See Manual See Manual
9 COMMISSIONING
SETTING
DIGITAL COUNTER Assigned to:
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
ANALOG OUTPUT 3
ANALOG OUTPUT 4
9-16
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
10.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE 10.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
The hardware or electrical interface is one of the following: one of three 2-wire RS485 ports from the rear terminal connector, the RS232 from the front panel connector or through a fibre optic connection. In a 2-wire RS485 link, data flow is bi-directional. Data flow is half duplex for both the RS485 and the RS232 ports. That is, data is never transmitted and received at the same time. RS485 lines should be connected in a daisy chain configuration (avoid star connections) with a terminating network installed at each end of the link, i.e. at the master end and at the slave farthest from the master. The terminating network should consist of a 120 Ohm resistor in series with a 1 nF ceramic capacitor when used with Belden 9841 RS485 wire. The value of the terminating resistors should be equal to the characteristic impedance of the line. This is approximately 120 Ohms for standard #22 AWG twisted pair wire. Shielded wire should always be used to minimize noise. Polarity is important in RS485 communications. Each '+' terminal of every 369 must be connected together for the system to operate. See chapter 2 INSTALLATION for details on correct serial port wiring. When using a fibre optic link the Tx from the 369 should be connected to the Rx of the Master device and the Rx from the 369 should be connected to the Tx of the Master device. 10.2 PROTOCOL 10.2.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
The 369 implements a subset of the AEG Modicon Modbus RTU serial communication standard. Many popular programmable controllers support this protocol directly with a suitable interface card allowing direct connection of relays. Although the Modbus protocol is hardware independent, the 369 interfaces include three 2-wire RS485 ports and one RS232 port. Modbus is a single master, multiple slave protocol suitable for a multi-drop configuration as provided by RS485 hardware. In this configuration up to 32 slaves can be daisy-chained together on a single communication channel. The 369 is always a slave. It cannot be programmed as a master. Computers or PLCs are commonly programmed as masters. The Modbus protocol exists in two versions: Remote Terminal Unit (RTU, binary) and ASCII. Only the RTU version is supported by the 369. Monitoring, programming and control functions are possible using read and write register commands. 10.2.2 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from an 369 is default to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. This produces a 10 bit data frame. This is important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are not supported by Hayes modems at bit rates of greater than 300 bps). The parity bit is optional as odd or even. If it is programmed as odd or even, the data frame consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 stop bit. Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard communication speed. The 369 RS485, fiber optic and RS232 ports support operation at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud.
10
369 Motor Management Relay 10-1
10.2 PROTOCOL
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.2.3 DATA PACKET FORMAT
A complete request/response sequence consists of the following bytes (transmitted as separate data frames): Master Request Transmission: SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA CRC Slave Response Transmission: SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA CRC - 1 byte - 1 byte - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE - 2 bytes
- 1 byte - 1 byte - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE - 2 bytes
SLAVE ADDRESS - This is the first byte of every transmission. This byte represents the user-assigned address of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master. Each slave device must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slave will respond to a transmission that starts with its address. In a master request transmission the SLAVE ADDRESS represents the address of the slave to which the request is being sent. In a slave response transmission the SLAVE ADDRESS represents the address of the slave that is sending the response. Note: A master transmission with a SLAVE ADDRESS of 0 indicates a broadcast command. Broadcast commands can be used for specific functions. FUNCTION CODE - This is the second byte of every transmission. Modbus defines function codes of 1 to 127. The 369 implements some of these functions. In a master request transmission the FUNCTION CODE tells the slave what action to perform. In a slave response transmission if the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is the same as the FUNCTION CODE sent from the master indicating the slave performed the function as requested. If the high order bit of the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is a 1 (i.e. if the FUNCTION CODE is > 127) then the slave did not perform the function as requested and is sending an error or exception response. DATA - This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the FUNCTION CODE. This may be Actual Values, Setpoints, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. Data is sent MSByte first followed by the LSByte. CRC - This is a two byte error checking code. CRC is sent LSByte first followed by the MSByte.
10
10-2 369 Motor Management Relay
10 COMMUNICATIONS
10.2 PROTOCOL 10.2.4 ERROR CHECKING
The RTU version of Modbus includes a two byte CRC-16 (16 bit cyclic redundancy check) with every transmission. The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial (11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the transmission, LSByte first. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. If an 369 Modbus slave device receives a transmission in which an error is indicated by the CRC-16 calculation, the slave device will not respond to the transmission. A CRC-16 error indicates than one or more bytes of the transmission were received incorrectly and thus the entire transmission should be ignored in order to avoid the 369 performing any incorrect operation. The CRC-16 calculation is an industry standard method used for error detection. An algorithm is included here to assist programmers in situations where no standard CRC-16 calculation routines are available. CRC-16 Algorithm Once the following algorithm is complete, the working register "A" will contain the CRC value to be transmitted. Note that this algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The MSbit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped since it does not affect the value of the remainder. The following symbols are used in the algorithm: --> A AL AH CRC i,j (+) Di G shr(x) algorithm: 1.FFFF hex --> A 2.0 --> i 3.0 --> j 4.Di (+) AL --> AL 5.j+1 --> j 6.shr(A) 7.is there a carry? No: go to 8. Yes: G (+) A --> A 8.is j = 8? No: go to 5. Yes: go to 9. 9.i+1 --> i 10.is i = N? No: go to 3. Yes: go to 11. 11.A --> CRC data transfer 16 bit working register low order byte of A high order byte of A 16 bit CRC-16 value loop counters logical exclusive or operator i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1) 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed shift right (the LSbit of the low order byte of x shifts into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of the high order byte of x, all other bits shift right one location
10
10.2 PROTOCOL
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.2.5 TIMING
Data packet synchronization is maintained by timing constraints. The receiving device must measure the time between the reception of characters. If three and one half character times elapse without a new character or completion of the packet, then the communication link must be reset (i.e. all slaves start listening for a new transmission from the master). Thus at 9600 baud a delay of greater than 3.5 * 1/9600 * 10 = 3.65 ms will cause the communication link to be reset.
10
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS The following functions are supported by the 369: 03 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values 04 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values 05 - Execute Operation 06 - Store Single Setpoint 07 - Read Device Status 08 - Loopback Test 16 - Store Multiple Setpoints
10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS 10.3.1 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS
10.3.2 FUNCTION CODES 03 & 04 - READ SETPOINTS & ACTUAL VALUES Modbus implementation: 369 Implementation: Read Input and Holding Registers Read Setpoints and Actual Values
For the 369 implementation of Modbus, these commands can be used to read any Setpoint ("holding registers") or Actual Value ("input registers"). Holding and input registers are 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. Thus all 369 Setpoints and Actual Values are sent as two bytes. The maximum number of registers that can be read in one transmission is 125. Function codes 03 and 04 are configured to read setpoints or actual values interchangeably because some PLCs do not support both function codes. The slave response to these function codes is the slave address, function code, a count of the number of data bytes to follow, the data itself and the CRC. Each data item is sent as a two byte number with the high order byte sent first. The CRC is sent as a two byte number with the low order byte sent first. Message Format and Example: Request slave 11 to respond with 2 registers starting at address 0308. For this example the register data in these addresses is:
Address 0308 0309
Data 0064 000A

Bytes 1 1 2 2 2 Example (hex) 0B 03 03 08 00 02 45 27
Master Transmission SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS NUMBER OF SETPOINTS CRC
message for slave 11 read registers data starting at 0308 2 registers (4 bytes total) CRC calculated by the master
Slave Response SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE BYTE COUNT DATA 1 DATA 2 CRC
1 1 1 2 2 2
0B 03 04 00 64 00 0A EB 91
message from slave 11 read registers 2 registers = 4 bytes value in address 0308 value in address 0309 CRC calculated by the slave
10
10-5
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.3.3 FUNCTION CODE 05 - EXECUTE OPERATION
Modbus Implementation: Force Single Coil 369 Implementation: Execute Operation
This function code allows the master to request an 369 to perform specific command operations. The command numbers listed in the Commands area of the memory map correspond to operation code for function code 05. The operation commands can also be initiated by writing to the Commands area of the memory map using function code 16. Refer to FUNCTION 16 - STORE MULTIPLE SETPOINTS for complete details. Supported Operations Reset 369 (operation code 1) Motor Start (operation code 2) Motor Stop (operation code 3) Waveform Trigger (operation code 4) Message Format and Example:
Reset 369 (operation code 1). Master Transmission SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE
CODE VALUE CRC
Bytes 1 1 2 2 2
Example (hex) 0B 05 00 01 FF 00 DD 50
message for slave 11 execute operation reset command (operation code 1) perform function CRCcalculated by the master
Slave Response SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE CODE VALUE CRC
1 1 2 2 2
0B 05 00 01 FF 00 DD 50
message from slave 11 execute operation reset command (operation code 1) perform function CRC calculated by the slave
10
10 COMMUNICATIONS
10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS 10.3.4 FUNCTION CODE 06 - STORE SINGLE SETPOINT
Modbus Implementation: Preset Single Register 369 Implementation: Store Single Setpoint This command allows the master to store a single setpoint into the memory of an 369. The slave response to this function code is to echo the entire master transmission. Message Format and Example: Request slave 11 to store the value 01F4 in Setpoint address 1180 After the transmission in this example is complete, Setpoints address 1180 will contain the value 01F4. Master Transmission SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS DATA CRC Bytes 1 1 2 2 2 Example (hex) 0B message for slave 11 06 store single setpoint 11 Setpoint address 1180 80 01 data for address 1180 F4 8D CRC calculated by the master A3
Slave Response SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS DATA CRC
1 1 2 2 2
0B 06 11 80 01 F4 8D A3
message from slave 11 store single Setpoint Setpoint address 1180 data stored in address 1180 CRC calculated by the slave
10
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.3.5 FUNCTION CODE 07 - READ DEVICE STATUS
Modbus Implementation: Read Exception Status 369 Implementation: Read Device Status This is a function used to quickly read the status of a selected device. A short message length allows for rapid reading of status. The status byte returned will have individual bits set to 1 or 0 depending on the status of the slave device. 369 General Status Byte: LSBit B0: Trip relay energized = 1 B1: Aux 1 relay energized = 1 B2: Aux 2 relay energized = 1 B3: Alarm relay energized = 1 B4: Stopped = 1 B5: Starting = 1 B6: Running = 1 B7: Tripped =1
MSBit
Message Format and Example: Request status from slave 11. Master Transmission SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE CRC Bytes 1 1 2 Example (hex) 0B message for slave 11 07 read device status 47 CRC calculated by the master 42
Slave Response SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DEVICE STATUS CRC
1 1 1 2
0B 07 59 C2 08
message for slave 11 read device status status = 01011001 in binary CRC calculated by the slave
10
10 COMMUNICATIONS
10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS 10.3.6 FUNCTION CODE 08 - LOOPBACK TEST
Modbus Implementation: Loopback Test 369 Implementation: Loopback Test This function is used to test the integrity of the communication link. The 369 will echo the request. Message Format and Example: Loopback test from slave 11. Master Transmission SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DIAG CODE DATA CRC Bytes 1 1 2 2 2 Example (hex) 0B 08 00 00 00 00 E0 A1 message for slave 11 loopback test must be 00 00 must be 00 00 CRC calculated by the master
Slave Response SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DIAG CODE DATA CRC
1 1 2 2 2
0B 08 00 00 00 00 E0 A1
message from slave 11 loopback test must be 00 00 must be 00 00 CRC calculated by the slave
10
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.3.7 FUNCTION CODE 16 - STORE MULTIPLE SETPOINTS
Modbus Implementation: Preset Multiple Registers 369 Implementation: Store Multiple Setpoints This function code allows multiple Setpoints to be stored into the 369 memory. Modbus "registers" are 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. Thus all 369 setpoints are sent as two bytes. The maximum number of Setpoints that can be stored in one transmission is dependent on the slave device. Modbus allows up to a maximum of 60 holding registers to be stored. The 369 response to this function code is to echo the slave address, function code, starting address, the number of Setpoints stored, and the CRC. Message Format and Example: Request slave 11 to store the value 01F4 to Setpoint address 1180 and the value 01DE to setpoint address 1181. After the transmission in this example is complete, 369 slave 11 will have the following Setpoints information stored:
Address 1180 1181
Data 01F4 01DE

Bytes 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 Example (hex) 0B 10 11 80 00 02 04 01 F4 01 DE DB B1
Master Transmission SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS NUMBER OF SETPOINTS BYTE COUNT DATA 1 DATA 2 CRC
message for slave 11 store Setpoints Setpoint address 1180 2 Setpoints (4 bytes total) 4 bytes of data data for address 1180 data for address 1181 CRC calculated by the master
Slave Response SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS NUMBER OF SETPOINTS CRC
1 1 2 2 2
0B 10 11 80 00 02 45 B6
message from slave 11 store Setpoints Setpoint address 1180 2 setpoints CRC calculated by the slave
10
10 COMMUNICATIONS
10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS 10.3.8 FUNCTION CODE 16 - PERFORMING COMMANDS
Some PLCs may not support execution of commands using function code 5 but do support storing multiple setpoints using function code 16. To perform this operation using function code 16 (10H), a certain sequence of commands must be written at the same time to the 369. The sequence consists of : Command Function register, Command operation register and Command Data (if required). The Command Function register must be written with the value of 5 indicating an execute operation is requested. The Command Operation register must then be written with a valid command operation number from the list of commands shown in the memory map. The Command Data registers must be written with valid data if the command operation requires data. The selected command will execute immediately upon receipt of a valid transmission. Message Format and Example: Perform a reset on 369 (operation code 1). Master Transmission SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS NUMBER OF SETPOINTS BYTE COUNT COMMAND FUNCTION COMMAND OPERATION CRC Bytes 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 Example (hex) 0B 10 00 80 00 02 04 00 05 00 01 0B D6 message for slave 11 store Setpoints Setpoint address 0080 2 Setpoints (4 bytes total) 4 bytes of data data for address 0080 data for address 0081 CRC calculated by the master
Slave Response SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS NUMBER OF SETPOINTS CRC
1 1 2 2 2
0B 10 00 80 00 02 40 8A
message from slave 11 store Setpoints Setpoint address 0080 2 setpoints CRC calculated by the slave
10
10.4 ERROR RESPONSES 10.4 ERROR RESPONSES
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.4.1 ERROR RESPONSES
When an 369 detects an error other than a CRC error, a response will be sent to the master. The MSbit of the FUNCTION CODE byte will be set to 1 (i.e. the function code sent from the slave will be equal to the function code sent from the master plus 128). The following byte will be an exception code indicating the type of error that occurred. Transmissions received from the master with CRC errors will be ignored by the 369. The slave response to an error (other than CRC error) will be: SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE EXCEPTION CODE CRC - 1 byte - 1 byte (with MSbit set to 1) - 1 byte - 2 bytes
The 369 implements the following exception response codes. 01 - ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the 369. 02 - ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an allowable address for the 369. 03 - ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range for the selected data address.
10
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.5 MEMORY MAP
10.5 MEMORY MAP 10.5.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION
The data stored in the 369 is grouped as Setpoints and Actual Values. Setpoints can be read and written by a master computer. Actual Values are read only. All Setpoints and Actual Values are stored as two byte values. That is, each register address is the address of a two byte value. Addresses are listed in hexadecimal. Data values (Setpoint ranges, increments, factory values) are in decimal. Note: Many Modbus communications drivers add 40001d to the actual address of the register addresses. For example: if address 0h was to be read, 40001d would be the address required by the Modbus communications driver; if address 320h (800d) was to be read, 40801d would be the address required by the Modbus communications driver. 10.5.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA The 369 has a powerful feature, called the User Definable Memory Map, which allows a computer to read up to 124 non-consecutive data registers (setpoints or actual values) by using one Modbus packet. It is often necessary for a master computer to continuously poll various values in each of the connected slave relays. If these values are scattered throughout the memory map, reading them would require numerous transmissions and would burden the communication link. The User Definable Memory Map can be programmed to join any memory map address to one in the block of consecutive User Map locations, so that they can be accessed by reading these consecutive locations. The User Definable area has two sections: 1. A Register Index area (memory map addresses 0180h-01FCh) that contains 125 Actual Values or Setpoints register addresses. 2. A Register area (memory map addresses 0100h-017Ch) that contains the data at the addresses in the Register Index. Register data that is separated in the rest of the memory map may be remapped to adjacent register addresses in the User Definable Registers area. This is accomplished by writing to register addresses in the User Definable Register Index area. This allows for improved through-put of data and can eliminate the need for multiple read command sequences. For example, if the values of Average Phase Current (register address 0306h) and Hottest Stator RTD Temperature (register address 0320h) are required to be read from an 369, their addresses may be remapped as follows: 1. Write 0306h to address 0180h (User Definable Register Index 0000) using function code 06 or 16. 2. Write 0307h to address 0181h (User Definable Register Index 0001) using function code 06 or 16. (Average Phase Current is a double register number) 3. Write 0320h to address 0182h (User Definable Register Index 0001) using function code 06 or 16. A read (function code 03 or 04) of registers 0100h (User Definable Register 0000) and 0101h (User Definable Register 0001) will return the Phase A Current and register 0102h (User Definable Register 0002) will return Hottest Stator RTD Temperature.
10
10.5 MEMORY MAP
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.5.3 EVENT RECORDER
The 369 event recorder data starts at address 3000h. Address 3003h is a pointer to the event of interest (1 representing the latest event and 40 representing the oldest event). To retrieve event 1, write 1 to the Event Record Selector (3003h) and read the data from 3004h to 3022h. To retrieve event 2, write 2 to the Event Record Selector (3003h) and read the data from 3004h to 3022h. All 40 events may be retrieved in this manner. The time and date stamp of each event may be used to ensure that all events have been retrieved in order without new events corrupting the sequence of events (event 1 should be more recent than event 2, event 2 should be more recent than event 3, etc...). 10.5.4 WAVEFORM CAPTURE The 369 stores a number of cycles of A/D samples each time a trip occurs in a trace buffer, determined by the setpoint in S1 Preferences, Trace Memory Buffers. The Trace Memory Trigger is set up in S1 Preferences and this determines how many pre-trip and post-trip cycles are stored. The trace buffer is time and date stamped and may be correlated to a trip in the event record. 10 waveforms are captured this way when a trip occurs. These are the 3 phase currents, 3 differential currents, ground current and 3 voltage waveforms. This information is stored in volatile memory and will be lost if power is cycled to the relay. To access the captured waveforms, select the waveform of interest by writing its trace memory channel (see following table) to the Trace Memory Channel Selector (address 30F1h). Then read the trace memory data from address 3100h to 3400h. There are 12 samples per cycle for each of the cycles. The values read are in actual amperes or volts. TRACE MEMORY CHANNEL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 WAVEFORM Phase A current Phase B current Phase C current Differential phase A current Differential phase B current Differential phase C current Ground current Phase A voltage Phase B voltage Phase C voltage
Address 30F8h shows the number of traces taken. To access the latest use the value at address 30F0h. To access more than 1 trace, reduce this value to access the older traces.
10
APPENDIX A APPENDIX A MEMORY MAPPINGA.1 MEMORY MAPPING Table A1: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 28)
GROUP
ADDR (hex) DESCRIPTION
Multilin Product Code Product Hardware Revision Firmware Revision Modification Number Boot Revision Boot Mod Number Reserved Multilin 369 Accessories options Order Code ...
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING A.1.1 MEMORY MAP
A
MIN.
1 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 32 32 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1995 1995 0 0 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 0
MAX.
26 N/A 999 999 1 63 63 127 127 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2094 2094 1 1 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 4
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 N/A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII N/A N/A -
FORMAT CODE
F1 F15 F16 F1 F1 FC149 FC136 FC149 F1 F1 F22 F22 F22 F22 F22 F22 F18 F18 FC162 FC162 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F31
FACTORY DEFAULT
53 A N/A 0 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Jan.1,1999 Jan.1,1999 0 0 :: :: :: :: AI KF BA IK 0
Product ID (Addresses 0000 -007F) PRODUCT ID 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 ...
000F Modify Options 0010 Modify Options Passcode Characters 1 & 2 ... ... 0017 Modify Options Passcode Characters 15 & 16 --- --0020 Serial Number character 1 and 2 0021 Serial Number character 3 and 4 0022 Serial Number character 5 and 6 0023 Serial Number character 7 and 8 0024 Serial Number character 9 and 10 0025 Serial Number character 11 and 12 --- --0030 Calibration Date --0040 Manufacturing Date --- --SETPOINT ACCESS 0050 Keypad Access Level 0051 Comm Access Level 0052 Access Password Character 1 & 2 0053 Access Password Character 3 & 4 0054 Access Password Character 5& 6 0055 Access Password Character 7 & 8 0056 Encrypted Access Password1 & 2 0057 Encrypted Access Password 3 & 4 0058 Encrypted Access Password 5& 6 0059 Encrypted Access Password 7 & 8 --- --007F Reserved Commands (Addresses 0080 -00FF) COMMANDS 0080 Command Function Code 0081 Reserved User Map (Addresses 0100 -017F) USER MAP VALUES 0100 User Map Value # 1 0101 User Map Value # 2 ... ... 017C User Map Value # 125 017D Reserved ... ... 017F Reserved USER MAP ADDRESSES 0180 User Map Address # 1 0181 User Map Address # 2 ... ... 01FC User Map Address # 125 01FD Reserved ... ... 01FF Reserved Actual Values (Addresses 0200 -0FFF)
-------
-------
-------
-------
-------
-------
0 0 0
3FFF 3FFF 3FFF
1 1 1
hex hex hex
F1 F1 F1
0 0 0
A-1
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING Table A1: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 2 of 28)
APPENDIX A
GROUP
MOTOR STATUS
ADDR (hex)
0200 0201 0202 0204 --0220 0221 0223 0225 0226 0228 022A 022C 022D 022E 0230 --0234 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 023A 023B 023C 023D 023E 023F 0240 0241 ...
DESCRIPTION
Motor Status Motor Thermal Capacity Used Estimated Time to Trip on Overload Reserved --Cause of Last Trip Time of Last Trip (2 words) Date of Last Trip (2 words) Reserved Phase A Pre-Trip Current Phase B Pre-Trip Current Phase C Pre-Trip Current Motor Load Pre - Trip Current Unbalance Pre - Trip Ground Current Pre - Trip Reserved Hottest Stator RTD During Trip Pre-Trip Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD Pre-Trip Voltage Vab Pre-Trip Voltage Vbc Pre-Trip Voltage Vca Pre-Trip Voltage Van Pre-Trip Voltage Vbn Pre-Trip Voltage Vcn Pre-Trip System Frequency Pre-Trip Real Power Pre-Trip Reactive Power Pre-Trip Apparent Power Pre-Trip Power Factor Reserved
MIN.
0 0 -1
MAX.
4 100 65500
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 % s
FORMAT CODE
FC133 F1 F20
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 -1
LAST TRIP DATA
0 N/A N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32000 -32000 0 -99 -
169 N/A N/A 65535 65535 65535 2000 100 50000 12 200 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 12000 32000 32000 50000 100 -
1 N/A N/A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
N/A N/A A A A FLA % A oC
FC134 F19 F18 F9 F9 F9 F3 F1 FC23 F1 F4 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F3 F12 F12 F1 F21 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
V V V V V V Hz kW kvar kVA -
A-2
APPENDIX A Table A1: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 3 of 28)

GROUP
ALARM STATUS
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ... 0267 0268 0269 026A 026B 026C ... 026F 0270 0271 0272 ... 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 027A ... 027D 027E 027F 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 0285 0286
DESCRIPTION
General Spare Switch Alarm Status General Emerency Restart Switch Alarm Status General Differential Switch Alarm Status General Speed Switch Alarm Status General Reset Switch Alarm Status ... Thermal Capacity Alarm Overload Alarm Status Mechanical Jam Alarm Status Undercurrent Alarm Status Current Unbalance Alarm Status Ground Fault Alarm Status ... Undervoltage Alarm Status Overvoltage Alarm Status Under Frequency Alarm Status Over Frequency Alarm Status ... Lead Power Factor Alarm Status Lag Power Factor Alarm Status Positive kvar Alarm Status Negative kvar Alarm Status Underpower Alarm Status Reverse Power Alarm Status ... Local RTD #1 Alarm Status Local RTD #2 Alarm Status Local RTD #3 Alarm Status Local RTD #4 Alarm Status Local RTD #5 Alarm Status Local RTD #6 Alarm Status Local RTD #7 Alarm Status Local RTD #8 Alarm Status Local RTD #9 Alarm Status Local RTD #10 Alarm Status
MIN.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MAX.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
FORMAT CODE
FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A-3
APPENDIX A
GROUP
ADDR (hex)
0287 0288 ... 028B 028C 028D 028E 028F 0290 0291 0292 0293 0294 0295 0296 ... 0299 029A 029B 029C 029D 029E 029F 02A0 02A1 02A2 02A3 02A4 ... 02A7 02A8 02A9 02AA 02AB 02AC 02AD 02AE 02AF 02B0 02B1 02B2 02B3 02B4 02B5 ... 02B8 02B9 02BA 02BB 02BC 02BD 02BE 02C0 02C1 02C2 02C3 02C4 02C5 02C6 02C7 02C8 02C0
DESCRIPTION
Local RTD #11 Alarm Status Local RTD #12 Alarm Status ... Local RTD #1 High Alarm Status Local RTD #2 High Alarm Status Local RTD #3 High Alarm Status Local RTD #4 High Alarm Status Local RTD #5 High Alarm Status Local RTD #6 High Alarm Status Local RTD #7 High Alarm Status Local RTD #8 High Alarm Status Local RTD #9 High Alarm Status Local RTD #10 High Alarm Status Local RTD #11 High Alarm Status Local RTD #12 High Alarm Status ... Remote RTD #1 Alarm Status Remote RTD #2 Alarm Status Remote RTD #3 Alarm Status Remote RTD #4 Alarm Status Remote RTD #5 Alarm Status Remote RTD #6 Alarm Status Remote RTD #7 Alarm Status Remote RTD #8 Alarm Status Remote RTD #9 Alarm Status Remote RTD #10 Alarm Status Remote RTD #11 Alarm Status Remote RTD #12 Alarm Status ... Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #5 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #8 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #11 High Alarm Status Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Status Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status Short / Low Temp Alarm Status Lost Remote RTD Communication ... Trip Counter Alarm Status Starter Failure Alarm Current Demand Alarm Status kW Demand Alarm Status kvar Demand Alarm Status kVA Demand Alarm Status Self Test Alarm Overload Lockout Timer Start Timer 1 Start Timer 2 Start Timer 3 Start Timer 4 Start Timer 5 Time Between Starts Timer Restart Block Timer Backspin Timer Start Inhibit Timer
MIN.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MAX.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 500 60 60 60 60 60 500 50000 50000 60
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 min min min min min min min s s min
FORMAT CODE
FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC156 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 FC123 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
START INHIBIT STATUS
0 = none
A-4

GROUP
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
02CF 02D0 02D1 02D2 02D3 02D4 02D5 02D6 --02FB 02E0 02E1 02E2 02E3 --02E5 02F0 02F4 --02FF 0300 0302 0304 0306 0308 0309 030A 030B 030D ... 031E 031F 0320
DESCRIPTION
Reserved Access Speed Spare Differential Relay Emergency Restart Reset Reserved --Reserved Trip Alarm Aux.1 Aux.2 --Reserved Date (Read Only) Time (Read Only) --Reserve Phase A Current Phase B Current Phase C Current Average Phase Current Motor Load Current Unbalance Reserved Ground Current Reserved ... Reserved Hottest Stator RTD Number Hottest Stator RTD Temperature
MIN.
0 0 0 0 0 0
MAX.
1 1 1 1 1 1
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 -
FORMAT CODE
FC131 FC131 FC131 FC131 FC131 FC131
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 0 0 0 0
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
N/A N/A N/A N/A
FC150 FC150 FC150 FC150
2 2 2 2
REAL TIME CLOCK
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
F18 F19
N/A N/A
CURRENT METERING
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
65535 65535 65535 65535 2000 100 50000 -
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
A A A A xFLA % A -
F9 F9 F9 F9 F3 F1 FC23 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
TEMPERATURE
0 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
12 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
oC o o
F1 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4
0 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
0321 Local RTD #1 Temperature 0322 Local RTD #2 Temperature 0323 Local RTD #3 Temperature 0324 Local RTD #4 Temperature 0325 Local RTD #5 Temperature 0326 Local RTD #6 Temperature 0327 Local RTD #7 Temperature 0328 Local RTD #8 Temperature 0329 Local RTD #9 Temperature 032A Local RTD #10 Temperature 032B Local RTD #11 Temperature 032C Local RTD #12 Temperature 032D --033D 033E 033F Reserved --Reserved Hottest Stator RRTD Number Hottest Stator RRTD Temperature
C C
oC oC o o o o
C C C C
oC oC o o
C C
0 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
12 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
oC oC oC oC o o
F1 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4
0 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
0340 Remote RTD #1 Temperature 0341 Remote RTD #2 Temperature 0342 Remote RTD #3 Temperature 0343 Remote RTD #4 Temperature 0344 Remote RTD #5 Temperature 0345 Remote RTD #6 Temperature 0346 Remote RTD #7 Temperature 0347 Remote RTD #8 Temperature
C C
oC oC oC
A-5
APPENDIX A
GROUP
ADDR (hex)
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
-40 -40 -40 -40
MAX.
200 200 200 200
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1
o o
FORMAT CODE
F4 F4 F4 F4
FACTORY DEFAULT
40 40 40 40
0348 Remote RTD #9 Temperature 0349 Remote RTD #10 Temperature 034A Remote RTD #11 Temperature 034B Remote RTD #12 Temperature 034C --035F 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 0365 0366 0367 0368 0369 ... 036F 0370 0371 0373 0374 0376 0377 0379 037B 037D ... 038F 0390 0392 0394 0396 0397 0399 039B 039D 039E ... 03AF 03C0 03C1 03C2 03C3 03C4 03C5 03C6 03C7 03C8 03C9 ... 03D1 ... 03D7 Reserved Reserved Vab Vbc Vca Average Line Voltage Van Vbn Vcn Average_Phase_Voltage System Frequency Backspin Frequency ... Reserved Power Factor Real Power Real Power Reactive Power Apparent Power Positive Watthours Positive Varhours Negative Varhours Reserved ... Reserved Current Demand Real Power Demand Reactive Power Demand Apparent Power Demand Peak Current Demand Peak Real Power Demand Peak Reactive Power Demand Peak Apparent Power Demand Reserved Reserved Learned Acceleration Time Learned Starting Current Learned Starting Capacity Learned Running Cool Time Constant Learned Stopped Cool Time Constant Last Starting Current Last Starting Capacity Last Acceleration Time Average Motor Load Learned Learned Unbalance k factor ... Reserved ... Reserved
C C
oC oC
VOLTAGE METERING
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200
20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 12000 12000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
V V V V V V V V Hz Hz
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F3 F3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
POWER METERING
-99 -32000 0 -32000 0 0 0 0
100 32000 65000 32000 50000 65535 65535 65535
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
kW hp kvar kVA MWh Mvarh Mvarh
F21 F12 F1 F12 F1 F17 F17 F17
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DEMAND METERING
0 0 0 0 0 0 -32000 0
50000 50000 50000 50000 65535 50000 32000 50000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A kW kvar kVA A kW kvar kVA
F9 F1 F1 F1 F9 F1 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MOTOR DATA
0 = OFF
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
2500 65535 100 500 500 65535 100 2500 2000 29
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s A % min min A % s x FLA -
F2 F9 F1 F1 F1 F9 F1 F2 F3 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A-6

GROUP
RTD MAXIMUMS
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
MAX.
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
o o
FORMAT CODE
F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4
FACTORY DEFAULT
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
03E0 Local RTD # 1 Max. Temperature 03E1 Local RTD # 2 Max. Temperature 03E2 Local RTD # 3 Max. Temperature 03E3 Local RTD # 4 Max. Temperature 03E4 Local RTD # 5 Max. Temperature 03E5 Local RTD # 6 Max. Temperature 03E6 Local RTD # 7 Max. Temperature 03E7 Local RTD # 8 Max. Temperature 03E8 Local RTD # 9 Max. Temperature 03E9 Local RTD # 10 Max. Temperature 03EA Local RTD # 11 Max. Temperature 03EB Local RTD # 12 Max. Temperature 03EC ... 03FF 0400 Reserved ... Reserved Remote RTD # 1 Max. Temperature
C C
oC oC o
C C C C C
oC o o
oC o
oC o
-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
oC oC o o o o
F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
0401 Remote RTD # 2 Max. Temperature 0401 Remote RTD # 3 Max. Temperature 0403 Remote RTD # 4 Max. Temperature 0404 Remote RTD # 5 Max. Temperature 0405 Remote RTD # 6 Max. Temperature 0406 Remote RTD # 7 Max. Temperature 0407 Remote RTD # 8 Max. Temperature 0408 Remote RTD # 9 Max. Temperature 0409 Remote RTD # 10 Max. Temperature 040A Remote RTD # 11 Max. Temperature 040B Remote RTD # 12 Max. Temperature ... 042F 0430 ... 0433 ... 0436 0437 0438 0439 043A 043B 043C 043D ... 043F 0440 0441 0442 0443 ... 0446 0447 0448 0449 044A 044B ... 044E 044F 0450 ... Reserved Total Number of Trips ... Switch Trips ... Overload Trips Short Circuit Trips Mechanical Jam Trips Undercurrent Trips Current Unbalance Trips Single Phase Trips Ground Fault Trips Acceleration Trips ... Under Voltage Trips Over Voltage Trips Phase Reversal Trips Under Frequency Trips Over Frequency Trips ... Lead Power Factor Trips Lag Power Factor Trips Positive Reactive Power Trips Negative Reactive Power Trips Underpower Trips Reverse Power Trips ... Stator RTD Trips Bearing RTD Trips Other RTD Trips
C C C C
oC oC o o
C C
oC oC
TRIP COUNTERS
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A-7
APPENDIX A
GROUP
ADDR (hex)
DESCRIPTION
Ambient RTD Trips ... Incomplete Sequence Trips Trip Counters Last Cleared ... Reserved Number of Motor Starts Number of Emergency Restarts Reserved Digital Counter ... Reserved Motor Running Hours ... Reserved Va Angle Vb Angle Vc Angle Ia Angle Ib Angle Ic Angle Reserved ... Reserved Default Message Cycle Time Default Message Timeout Contrast Adjustment Temperature Display Units Reserved ... Reserved Trigger Position Number of Records Slave Address Computer RS232 Baud Rate Computer RS232 Parity CHANNEL 1 Parity CHANNEL 1 Baud Rate CHANNEL 2 Parity CHANNEL 2 Baud Rate CHANNEL 3 Parity CHANNEL 3 Baud Rate CHANNEL 3 Connection CHANNEL 3 Application Reserved Date (2 words) Time (2 words) Reserved
MIN.
0 0 N/A
MAX.
50000 50000 N/A
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 N/A N/A
FORMAT CODE
F1 F1 F18
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 N/A
0451 ... 0454 ... 0457 ... 046F MOTOR STATISTICS 0470 0471 0472 0473 ... 049F 04A0 ... 04BF PHASORS 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 0505 0506 ... 0FFF Setpoints (Addresses 1000 -1FFF) DISPLAY PREFERENCES 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 ... 1007 WAVEFORM CAPTURE 1008 1009 369 COMMUNIC ATIONS 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 101A ... 102F REAL TIME CLOCK 1030 1034 ... 103B
0 0 0
50000 50000 65535
1 1 1
F1 F1 F9
0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
65535 359 359 359 359 359 359
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
hr o o o o o o
F9 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 10 0 1 0
100 900 255 60 1
1 1 1 1 1
s s s -
F1 F1 F1 F2 FC100
20 300 145 4 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
100 3 254 4 2 2 4 2 4 2 4 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
% -
F1 FC152 F1 FC101 FC102 FC101 FC102 FC101 FC102 FC101 FC102 FC151 FC149
50 2 254 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 0 0
valid valid
date time
N/A N/A
F18 F19
A-8

GROUP
DEFAULT MESSAGES
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 104A ... 105F 1060 1061 ... 1087 1088 1089 ... 10AF 10B0 10B1 ... 10D7 10D8 10D9 ... 10FF 1100 1101 ... 1127 ... 112F 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 ... 113F 1140 1141 1142 ... 117F 1180 1181 1182 1183 ... 119F 11A0 11A1 11A2 11A3 ... 11BF
DESCRIPTION
Reserved Default to Current Metering Default to Motor Load Default to Delta Voltage Metering Default to Power Factor Default to Positive Watthours Default to Real Power Default to Reactive Power Default to Hottest Stator RTD Default to Text Message 1 Default to Text Message 2 Reserved 1st Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 2nd Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 40th Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 1st Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 2nd Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 40th Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 1st Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 2nd Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 40th Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 1st Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 2nd Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 40th Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 1st Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 2nd Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 40th Character of 5th Scratchpad Message Reserved Clear Last Trip Data Clear Peak Demand Data Clear RTD Maximums Preset MWh Clear Trip Counters Preset Digital Counter Clear Event Records Preset Mvarh Reserved Clear Motor Data Reserved Clear All Data Reserved Phase CT Primary Motor Full Load Amps Ground CT Type Ground CT Primary Reserved Voltage Transformer Connection Type Voltage Transformer Ratio Motor Rated Voltage Voltage Single VT Operation Reserved
MIN.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
MAX.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
FORMAT CODE
FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T e T e T e T e T e
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
CLEAR/ PRESET DATA
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 65535 1 65535 1 65535
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MWh Mvarh
FC103 FC103 FC103 F17 FC103 F9 FC103 F17
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
1 1
1 1
FC103 FC103
0 0
CT / VT SETUP
1 1 0 1
5000 5000 3 5000
1 1 1 1
A A A
F1 F1 FC104 F1
500 10 2 100
0 100 100 0
2 24000 20000 3
1 1 1 1
V -
FC106 F3 F1 FC143
0 35 4160 0
A-9
APPENDIX A
GROUP
ADDR (hex)
DESCRIPTION
Nominal Frequency System Phase Sequence Reserved Reserved Serial Communication Control Assign Start Control Relays Reserved Reserved Reduced Voltage Starting Start Control Relays Transition On Incomplete Sequence Trip Relays Reduced Voltage Start Level Reduced Voltage Start Timer Reserved Reserved Enable RTD Option Enable Metering/Backspin Option Reserved Enable Fiber Optic Port Enable Profibus Interface Enable RRTD Module Reserved Enter Passcode 1 Enter Passcode 2 Enter Passcode 3 Enter Passcode 4 Enter Passcode 5 Enter Passcode 6 Enter Passcode 7 Enter Passcode 8 Enter Passcode 9 Enter Passcode 10 Reserved First Character of Counter Name First Character of Counter Unit Name Counter Type Digital Counter Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Counter Alarm Level Reserved Record Alarms as Events First Character of Emergency Switch Name General Emergency Switch Type General Emergency Switch Block Input From Start General Emergency Switch Alarm General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay General Emergency Switch Alarm Events General Emergency Switch Trip General Emergency Switch Trip Relays General Emergency Switch Trip Delay Emergency Switch Assignable Function Reserved
MIN.
0 0
MAX.
2 1
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 -
FORMAT CODE
FC107 FC124
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0
11C0 11C1 11C2 ... 11C7 SERIAL COM. CONTROL 11C8 11C9 11CA --11CF REDUCED VOLTAGE 11D0 11D1 11D2 11D3 11D4 11D5 ... 11DF INSTALLED OPTIONS AND 1200 ACCESSORIES 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 120A 120B 120C 120D 120E 120F 1210 1211 --129F DIGITAL COUNTER 12E6 12F2 12F8 12F9 12FA 12FB 12FD 12FE EMERGENCY 1330 1340 1341
0 0
1 7
1 1
FC103 FC113
0 2
0 0 0 0 25 1
1 2 2 6 300 500
1 1 1 1 1 1
% FLA s
FC103 FC113 FC108 FC111 F1 F1
0 4 0 0 100 200
0 0 0 0 0 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
1 2 1 1 2 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FC103 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC149 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
32 32 0 0 0 0 0 32 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
127 127 1 2 6 65535 1 127 1 5000 2 6 50000 1 2 6 50000 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s 100ms 100ms -
F1 F1 FC114 FC115 FC113 F9 FC103 F1 FC116 F1 FC115 FC113 F2 FC103 FC115 FC111 F2 FC110
G U 0 0 0 100 0 G 0 0 0 0 50 0 0 0 50 0
1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 134A ... 135F Reserved
A-10

GROUP
DIFFERENTIAL
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
32 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
MAX.
127 1 5000 2 7 50000 1 2 7 50000 7 7
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s 100ms 100ms -
FORMAT CODE
F1 FC116 F1 FC115 FC113 F2 FC103 FC115 FC111 F2 FC157 FC111
FACTORY DEFAULT
G 0 0 0 1 50 0 0 1 50 0 1
SPEED
RESET
SPARE
1370 First Character of Differential Switch Name 1380 General Differential Switch Type 1381 General Differential Switch Block Input From Start 1382 General Differential Switch Alarm 1383 General Differential Switch Alarm Relays 1384 General Differential Switch Alarm Delay 1385 General Differential Switch Alarm Events 1386 General Differential Switch Trip 1387 General Differential Switch Trip Relays 1388 General Differential Switch Trip Delay 1389 Differential Switch Assignable Function 138A Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays ... 138F Reserved 13A0 First Character of Speed Switch Name 13B0 General Speed Switch Type 13B1 General Speed Switch Block Input from Start 13B2 General Speed Switch Alarm 13B3 General Speed Switch Alarm Relays 13B4 General Speed Switch Alarm Delay 13B5 General Speed Switch Alarm Events 13B6 General Speed Switch Trip 13B7 General Speed Switch Trip Relays 13B8 General Speed Switch Trip Delay 13B9 Speed Switch Assignable Function 13BA Speed Switch Delay 13BB Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays ... 13BF Reserved 13D0 First Character of Reset Switch Name 13E0 General Reset Switch Type 13E1 General Reset Switch Block Input From Start 13E2 General Reset Switch Alarm 13E3 General Reset Switch Alarm Relays 13E4 General Reset Switch Alarm Delay 13E5 General Reset Switch Alarm Events 13E6 General Reset Switch Trip 13E7 General Reset Switch Trip Relays 13E8 General Reset Switch Trip Delay 13E9 Reset Switch Assignable Function ... 13FF Reserved 1400 First Character of Spare Switch Name 1410 General Spare Switch Type 1411 General Spare Switch Block Input From Start 1412 General Spare Switch Alarm 1413 General Spare Switch Alarm Relays 1414 General Spare Switch Alarm Delay 1415 General Spare Switch Alarm Events 1416 General Spare Switch Trip 1417 General Spare Switch Trip Relays 1418 General Spare Switch Trip Delay 1419 Spare Switch Assignable Function 141A Starter Aux Contact Type ... 14FF Reserved
32 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 5 0
127 1 5000 2 7 50000 1 2 7 50000 7 1000 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1
s 100ms 100ms 100ms -
F1 FC116 F1 FC115 FC113 F2 FC103 FC115 FC111 F2 FC158 F2 FC111
G 0 0 0 1 50 0 0 1 50 0 20 1
32 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
127 1 5000 2 7 50000 1 2 7 50000 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s 100ms 100ms -
F1 FC116 F1 FC115 FC113 F2 FC103 FC115 FC111 F2 FC160
G 0 0 0 1 50 0 0 1 50 0
32 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
127 1 5000 2 7 50000 1 1 7 50000 7 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s 100ms 100ms -
F1 FC116 F1 FC115 FC113 F2 FC103 FC115 FC111 F2 FC159 FC109
G 0 0 0 1 50 0 0 1 50 0 0
A-11
APPENDIX A
GROUP
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
ADDR (hex)
1500 1501 1502 1503 ... 1509 150A 150B 150C 150D ... 157F 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588
DESCRIPTION
Trip Relay Reset Mode Alarm Relay Reset Mode Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode
MIN.
0 0 0 0
MAX.
2 2 2 2
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 -
FORMAT CODE
FC117 FC117 FC117 FC117
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 0 0
Trip Relay Operation Alarm Relay Operation Aux1 Relay Operation Aux2 Relay Operation Reserved Reserved Overload Pickup Level Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay Unbalance k Factor (0=Learned) Running Cool Time Constant Stopped Cool Time Constant Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio RTD Biasing RTD Bias Minimum
0 0 0 0 101 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 125 7 29 500 500 100 1 198 199 200 2 7 100 1 1 1 1 15 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500 65500
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.01xFLA min min oC o o
FC161 FC161 FC161 FC161 F3 FC111 F1 F1 F1 F3 FC103 F1 F1 F1 FC115 FC113 F1 FC103 FC103 FC103 FC128 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
0 1 1 0 101 1 0 15 30 100 0 40 120 155 0 1 75 0 0 0 0 4 17415 3415 1667 795 507 365 280 170 117 86 67 53 44 37 31 27 23 21 18 16 15 12 10 9 7 6 6 6 6
THERMAL MODEL
0 =Off
1589 RTD Bias Mid Point 158A RTD Bias Maximum 158B 158C 158D 158E 158F 1590 1591 ... 15AE 15AF 15B0 15B2 15B4 15B6 15B8 15BA 15BC 15BE 15C0 15C2 15C4 15C6 15C8 15CA 15CC 15CE 15D0 15D2 15D4 15D6 15D8 15DA 15DC 15DE 15E0 15E2 15E4 15E6 15E8 Thermal Capacity Alarm Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays Thermal Capacity Alarm Level Thermal Capacity Alarm Events Enable Learned Cool Time Enable Unbalance Biasing Reserved Select Curve Style Standard Overload Curve Number Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.05 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.10 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.20 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.30 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.40 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 1.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.25 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 2.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.25 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 3.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.25 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 4.75 x FLA Time to Trip at 5.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 5.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 6.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 6.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 7.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 7.50 x FLA Time to Trip at 8.00 x FLA Time to Trip at 10.0 x FLA Time to Trip at 15.0 x FLA
C % used s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s
O/L CURVE SETUP
A-12

GROUP
ADDR (hex) DESCRIPTION
Time to Trip at 20.0 x FLA Reserved
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
MIN.
0
MAX.
65500
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 s
FORMAT CODE
F1
FACTORY DEFAULT
6
15EA 15EC ... ... 163F SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP 1640 1641 1642 1643 0=instantaneous time delay. 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648
Short Circuit Trip Reserved Assign Trip Relays Short Circuit Pickup Short Circuit Trip Delay Short Circuit Trip Backup Assign Backup Relays Short Circuit Trip Backup Delay Reserved
0 0 20 0 0 0 0
1 7 200 255.00 2 3 25500
1 1 1 0.01 1 1 0.01
x CT s s
FC103 FC111 F2 F3 FC115 FC119 F3
0 1 100 0 0 1 0
OVERLOAD ALARM
MECHNICAL JAM
UNDERCURRENT
CURRENT UNBALANCE
... 164F 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 165F 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 166F 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 ... 167F 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 ... 169F
Reserved Overload Alarm Overload Alarm Level Assign Overload Alarm Relays Overload Alarm Delay Overload Alarm Events Reserved Mechanical Jam Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Mechanical Jam Alarm Pickup Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay Mechanical Jam Alarm Events Mechanical Jam Trip Assign Trip Relays Mechanical Jam Trip Pickup Mechanical Jam Trip Delay Reserved Block Undercurrent from Start Undercurrent Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Undercurrent Alarm Pickup Undercurrent Alarm Delay Undercurrent Alarm Events Undercurrent Trip Assign Trip Relays Undercurrent Trip Pickup Undercurrent Trip Delay Reserved Block Unbalance From Start Current Unbalance Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Unbalance Alarm Pickup Unbalance Alarm Delay Unbalance Alarm Events Current Unbalance Trip Assign Trip Relays Unbalance Trip Pickup Unbalance Trip Delay Reserved
0 101 0 1 0 0 0 101 5 0 0 0 101 5 0 0 0 10 1 0 0 0 10 1
2 150 7 600 1 2 7 600 1250 1 2 7 600 1250 15000 2 7 99 255 1 2 7 99 255
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.01XFLA s .01XFLA s .01XFLA s s .01XFLA s .01XFLA s
FC115 F3 FC113 F2 FC103 FC115 FC113 F3 F2 FC103 FC115 FC111 F3 F2 F1 FC115 FC113 F3 F1 FC103 FC115 FC111 F3 F1
0 101 1 1 0 0 1 150 10 0 0 1 150 10 0 0 1 70 1 0 0 1 70 1
0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 4 1
5000 2 7 30 255 1 2 7 30 255
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s % s % s
F1 FC115 FC113 F1 F1 FC103 FC115 FC111 F1 F1
0 0 1 15 1 0 0 1 20 1
A-13
APPENDIX A
GROUP
GROUND FAULT
ADDR (hex)
16A0 16A1 16A2 16A3 16A4 16A5 16A6 16A7 16A8 16A9 16AA 16AB 16AC 16AD 16AE 16AF --16CF 16D0 16D1 16D2 16D3 16D4 16E0 16E1 16E2 16E3 16E4 16E5 --1701 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 --178F 1790 1791 1792 1793
DESCRIPTION
Reserved Ground Fault Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Ground Fault Alarm Pickup Alarm Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 Ground Fault Alarm Delay Ground Fault Alarm Events Ground Fault Trip Assign Trip Relays Ground Fault Trip Pickup Trip Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 Ground Fault Trip Delay Ground Fault Trip Backup Ground Fault Trip Backup Relays Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay Reserved Reserved Acceleration Trip Assign Trip Relays Acceleration Timer From Start Reserved Reserved Enable Single Shot Restart Enable Start Inhibit Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible Time Between Starts Restart Block Assign Start Inhibit Relay
MIN.
0 0 10 25 0 0 0 0 10 25 0 0 0 0.10
MAX.
2 7 100 2500 255.00 1 2 7 100 2500 255.00 1 3 255.00
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 1 0.01 0.1XCT Amps s 0.1XCT 0.1XCT s s
FORMAT CODE
FC115 FC113 F3 F3 F3 FC103 FC 115 FC 111 F3 F3 F3 FC103 FC119 F3
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 1 10 25 0 0 0 1 20 25 0 0 33 0.20
ACCELERATION TRIP
START INHIBITS
0 = Off
0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 2500 1 1 5 500 50000 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1s min s -
FC115 FC111 F1 FC103 FC103 F1 F1 F1 FC111
0 1 100 0 0 0 10 0 1
BACKSPIN DETECTION
Reserved Enable Back-Spin Start Inhibit Low Frequency Start Level Minimum Voltage Samples before start Backspin Timer Assign Backspin Inhibit Relays Reserved Reserved Local RTD #1 Application Local RTD #1 High Alarm Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level
0 2 30 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
1 30 15000 10000 50000 7 4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hz mV s oC
FC103 F1 F1 F1 F1 FC111 FC121 FC115 FC113 F1 FC115 FC113 F1 FC103 FC115 FC122 FC111 F1 FC120 F1 F1
0 2 30 1 0 1 0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
Local RTD #1
1794 Local RTD #1 Alarm 1795 Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays 1796 Local RTD #1 Alarm Level 1797 1798 1799 179A 179B 179C 17A0 --17A3 17A4 --Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events Local RTD #1 Trip Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting Local RTD #1 Trip Relays Local RTD #1 Trip Level Local RTD #1 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #1 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #1 Name Reserved
oC
oC
A-14

GROUP
Local RTD #2
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
17B0 17B1 17B2 17B3
DESCRIPTION
Local RTD #2 Application Local RTD #2 High Alarm Local RTD #2 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #2 High Alarm Level
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FC121 FC115 FC113 F1 FC115 FC113 F1 FC103 FC 115 FC122 FC111 F1 FC120 F1 F1
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
17B4 Local RTD #2 Alarm 17B5 Local RTD #2 Alarm Relays 17B6 Local RTD #2 Alarm Level 17B7 17B8 17B9 17BA 17BB 17BC 17C0 --17C3 17C4 --17CF 17D0 17D1 17D2 17D3 Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events Local RTD #2 Trip Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting Local RTD #2 Trip Relays Local RTD #2 Trip Level Local RTD #2 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #2 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #2 Name Reserved Reserved Local RTD #3 Application Local RTD #3 High Alarm Local RTD #3 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #3 High Alarm Level
C -
oC
C -
Local RTD #3
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
17D4 Local RTD #3 Alarm 17D5 Local RTD #3 Alarm Relays 17D6 Local RTD #3 Alarm Level 17D7 17D8 17D9 17DA 17DB 17DC 17E0 --17E3 17E4 --17EF 17F0 17F1 17F2 17F3 Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events Local RTD #3 Trip Enable RTD #3 Trip Voting Local RTD #3 Trip Relays Local RTD #3 Trip Level Local RTD #3 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #3 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #3 Name Reserved Reserved Local RTD #4 Application Local RTD #4 High Alarm Local RTD #4 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #4 High Alarm Level
C -
FC121 FC115 FC113 F1 FC115 FC113 F1 FC103 FC115 FC122 FC111 F1 FC120 F1 F1
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
Local RTD #4
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
17F4 Local RTD #4 Alarm 17F5 Local RTD #4 Alarm Relays 17F6 Local RTD #4 Alarm Level 17F7 17F8 17F9 17FA 17FB 17FC 1800 --1803 1804 --180F Enable RTD #4 Alarms as Events Local RTD #4 Trip Enable RTD #4 Trip Voting Local RTD #4 Trip Relays Local RTD #4 Trip Level Local RTD #4 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #4 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #4 Name Reserved Reserved
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
C -
A-15
APPENDIX A
GROUP
Local RTD #5
ADDR (hex)
1810 1811 1812 1813
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 250 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 1 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
1814 Local RTD #5 Alarm 1815 Local RTD #5 Alarm Relays 1816 Local RTD #5 Alarm Level 1817 1818 1819 181A 181B 181C 1820 --1823 1824 --182F 1830 1831 1832 1833 Record RTD #5 Alarms as Events Local RTD #5 Trip Enable RTD #5 Trip Voting Local RTD #5 Trip Relays Local RTD #5 Trip Level Local RTD #5 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #5 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #5 Name Reserved Reserved Local RTD #6 Application Local RTD #6 High Alarm Local RTD #6 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #6 High Alarm Level
C / oF oC
C -
Local RTD #6
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
Local RTD #7
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1854 Local RTD #7 Alarm 1855 Local RTD #7 Alarm Relays 1856 Local RTD #7 Alarm Level 1857 1858 1859 185A 185B 185C 1860 --1863 1864 --186F Record RTD #7 Alarms as Events Local RTD #7 Trip Enable RTD #7 Trip Voting Local RTD #7 Trip Relays Local RTD #7 Trip Level Local RTD #7 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #7 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #7 Name Reserved Reserved
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
C -
A-16

GROUP
Local RTD #8
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
1870 1871 1872 1873
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
C -
oC
C -
Local RTD #9
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1894 Local RTD #9 Alarm 1895 Local RTD #9 Alarm Relays 1896 Local RTD #9 Alarm Level 1897 1898 1899 189A 189B 189C 18A0 --18A3 18A4 --18AF 18B0 18B1 18B2 18B3 Record RTD #9 Alarms as Events Local RTD #9 Trip Enable RTD #9 Trip Voting Local RTD #9 Trip Relays Local RTD #9 Trip Level Local RTD #9 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #9 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #9 Name Reserved Reserved Local RTD #10 Application Local RTD #10 High Alarm Local RTD #10 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #10 High Alarm Level
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
Local RTD #10
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
18B4 Local RTD #10 Alarm 18B5 Local RTD #10 Alarm Relays 18B6 Local RTD #10 Alarm Level 18B7 18B8 18B9 18BA 18BB 18BC 18C0 --18C3 18C4 --18CF Record RTD #10 Alarms as Events Local RTD #10 Trip Enable RTD #10 Trip Voting Local RTD #10 Trip Relays Local RTD #10 Trip Level Local RTD #10 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #10 Name --8th Character of RTD #10 Name Reserved Reserved
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
C -
A-17
APPENDIX A
GROUP
Local RTD #11
ADDR (hex)
18D0 18D1 18D2 18D3
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
18D4 Local RTD #11 Alarm 18D5 Local RTD #11 Alarm Relays 18D6 Local RTD #11 Alarm Level 18D7 18D8 18D9 18DA 18DB 18DC 18E0 --18E3 18E4 --18EF 18F0 18F1 18F2 18F3 Record RTD #11 Alarm Events Local RTD #11 Trip Enable RTD #11 Trip Voting Local RTD #11 Trip Relays Local RTD #11 Trip Level Local RTD #11 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #11 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #11 Name Reserved Reserved Local RTD #12 Application Local RTD #12 High Alarm Local RTD #12 High Alarm Relays Local RTD #12 High Alarm Level
C -
oC
C -
Local RTD#12
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
18F4 Local RTD #12 Alarm 18F5 Local RTD #12 Alarm Relays 18F6 Local RTD #12 Alarm Level 18F7 18F8 18F9 18FA 18FB 18FC 1900 --1903 1904 --190F 1910 1911 1912 1913 Record RTD #12 Alarms as Events Local RTD #12 Trip Enable RTD #12 Trip Voting Local RTD #12 Trip Relays Local RTD #12 Trip Level Local RTD #12 RTD Type First Character of Local RTD #12 Name --8th Character of Local RTD #12 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #1 Application Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Level
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
Remote RTD #1
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1914 Remote RTD #1 Alarm 1915 Remote RTD #1 Alarm Relays 1916 Remote RTD #1 Alarm Level 1917 1918 1919 191A 191B 191C 1920 --1923 1924 --192F Record RRTD #1 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #1 Trip Enable RRTD #1 Trip Voting Remote RTD #1 Trip Relays Remote RTD #1 Trip Level Remote RTD #1 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #1 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #1 Name Reserved Reserved
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
C -
A-18

GROUP
Remote RTD #2
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
1930 1931 1932 1933
DESCRIPTION
Remote RTD #2 Application Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Level
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
1934 Remote RTD #2 Alarm 1935 Remote RTD #2 Alarm Relays 1936 Remote RTD #2 Alarm Level 1937 1938 1939 193A 193B 193C 1940 --1943 1944 --194F 1950 1951 1952 1953 Record RRTD #2 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #2 Trip Enable RRTD #2 Trip Voting Remote RTD #2 Trip Relays Remote RTD #2 Trip Level Remote RTD #2 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #2 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #2 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #3 Application Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Level
C -
oC
C -
Remote RTD #3
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1954 Remote RTD #3 Alarm 1955 Remote RTD #3 Alarm Relays 1956 Remote RTD #3 Alarm Level 1957 1958 1959 195A 195B 195C 1960 --1963 1964 --196F 1970 1971 1972 1973 Record RRTD #3 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #3 Trip Enable RRTD #3 Trip Voting Remote RTD #3 Trip Relays Remote RTD #3 Trip Level Remote RTD #3 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD # Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #3 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #4 Application Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Level
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
Remote RTD #4
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1974 Remote RTD #4 Alarm 1975 Remote RTD #4 Alarm Relays 1976 Remote RTD #4 Alarm Level 1977 1978 1979 197A 197B 197C 1980 --1983 1984 --198F Record RRTD #4 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #4 Trip Enable RRTD #4 Trip Voting Remote RTD #4 Trip Relays Remote RTD #4 Trip Level Remote RTD #4 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #4 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #4 Name Reserved Reserved
C C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
A-19
APPENDIX A
GROUP
Remote RTD #5
ADDR (hex)
1990 1991 1992 1993
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
1994 Remote RTD #5 Alarm 1995 Remote RTD #5 Alarm Relays 1996 Remote RTD #5 Alarm Level 1997 1998 1999 199A 199B 199C 19A0 --19A3 19A4 --19AF 19B0 19B1 19B2 19B3 Record RRTD #5 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #5 Trip Enable RRTD #5 Trip Voting Remote RTD #5 Trip Relays Remote RTD #5 Trip Level Remote RTD #5 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #5 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #5 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #6 Application Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Level
C -
oC
C -
Remote RTD #6
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
19B4 Remote RTD #6 Alarm 19B5 Remote RTD #6 Alarm Relays 19B6 Remote RTD #6 Alarm Level 19B7 19B8 19B9 19BA 19BB 19BC 19C0 --19C3 19C4 --19CF 19D0 19D1 19D2 19D3 Record RRTD #6 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #6 Trip Enable RRTD #6 Trip Voting Remote RTD #6 Trip Relays Remote RTD #6 Trip Level Remote RTD #6 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #6 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #6 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #7 Application Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Level
C -
0 0 1 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
Remote RTD #7
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
19D4 Remote RTD #7 Alarm 19D5 Remote RTD #7 Alarm Relays 19D6 Remote RTD #7 Alarm Level 19D7 19D8 19D9 19DA 19DB 19DC 19E0 --19E3 19E4 --19EF Record RRTD #7 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #7 Trip Enable RRTD #7 Trip Voting Remote RTD #7 Trip Relays Remote RTD #7 Trip Level Remote RTD #7 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #7 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #7 Name Reserved Reserved
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
C -
A-20

GROUP
Remote RTD #8
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
19F0 19F1 19F2 19F3
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
19F4 Remote RTD #8 Alarm 19F5 Remote RTD #8 Alarm Relays 19F6 Remote RTD #8 Alarm Level 19F7 19F8 19F9 19FA 19FB 19FC 1A00 --1A03 1A04 --1A0F 1A10 1A11 1A12 1A13 Record RRTD #8 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #8 Trip Enable RRTD #8 Trip Voting Remote RTD #8 Trip Relays Remote RTD #8 Trip Level Remote RTD #8 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #8 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #8 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #9 Application Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Level
C -
oC
C -
Remote RTD #9
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1A14 Remote RTD #9 Alarm 1A15 Remote RTD #9 Alarm Relays 1A16 Remote RTD #9 Alarm Level 1A17 1A18 1A19 1A1A 1A1B 1A1C 1A20 --1A23 1A24 --1A2F 1A30 1A31 1A32 1A33 Record RRTD #9 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #9 Trip Enable RRTD #9 Trip Voting Remote RTD #9 Trip Relays Remote RTD #9 Trip Level Remote RTD #9 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #9 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #9 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #10 Application Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Level
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
Remote RTD #10
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1A34 Remote RTD #10 Alarm 1A35 Remote RTD #10 Alarm Relays 1A36 Remote RTD #10 Alarm Level 1A37 1A38 1A39 1A3A 1A3B 1A3C 1A40 --1A43 1A44 --1A4F Record RRTD #10 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #10 Trip Enable RRTD #10 Trip Voting Remote RTD #10 Trip Relays Remote RTD #10 Trip Level Remote RTD #10 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #10 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #10 Name Reserved Reserved
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
C -
A-21
APPENDIX A
GROUP
Remote RTD #11
ADDR (hex)
1A50 1A51 1A52 1A53
DESCRIPTION
MIN.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
MAX.
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
1A54 Remote RTD #11 Alarm 1A55 Remote RTD #11 Alarm Relays 1A56 Remote RTD #11 Alarm Level 1A57 1A58 1A59 1A5A 1A5B 1A5C 1A60 --1A63 1A64 --1A6F 1A70 1A71 1A72 1A73 Record RRTD #11 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #11 Trip Enable RRTD #11 Trip Voting Remote RTD #11 Trip Relays Remote RTD #11 Trip Level Remote RTD #11 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #11 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #11 Name Reserved Reserved Remote RTD #12 Application Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Relays Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Level
C -
oC
C -
Remote RTD #12
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 32 32
4 2 7 200 2 7 200 1 2 13 7 200 3 127 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1A74 Remote RTD #12 Alarm 1A75 Remote RTD #12 Alarm Relays 1A76 Remote RTD #12 Alarm Level 1A77 1A78 1A79 1A7A 1A7B 1A7C 1A80 --1A83 1A84 --1B17 1B18 1B19 1B1A 1B1B ... 1B1F 1B20 1B21 1B22 1B23 1B24 1B25 1B26 --Record RRTD #12 Alarms as Events Remote RTD #12 Trip Enable RRTD #12 Trip Voting Remote RTD #12 Trip Relays Remote RTD #12 Trip Level Remote RTD #12 RTD Type First Character of Remote RTD #12 Name --8th Character of Remote RTD #12 Name Reserved Reserved Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Relays Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Events Reserved Reserved Open RTD Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Open RTD Alarm Events Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Short / Low Temp Alarm Events Reserved
C -
0 0 2 130 0 1 130 0 0 1 1 130 0 R
oC
oC
LOSS OF REMOTE RTD COMM
0 0 0
2 7 1
1 1 1
FC115 FC113 FC103
0 1 0
OPEN RTD ALARM
0 0 0 0 0 0 -
2 7 1 2 7 1 -
1 1 1 1 1 1 -
FC115 FC113 FC103 FC115 FC113 FC103 -
0 1 0 0 1 0 -
A-22

GROUP
UNDERVOLTAGE
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
1B60 1B61 1B62 1B63 1B64 1B65 1B66 1B67 1B68 1B69 1B6A 1B6B 1B6C ... 1B7F 1B80 1B81 1B82 1B83 1B84 1B85 1B86 1B87 1B88 1B89 ... 1B9F 1BA0 1BA1 1BA2 ... 1BAF 1BB0 1BB1 1BB2 1BB3 1BB4 1BB5 1BB6 1BB7 1BB8 1BB9 1BBA ... 1BBF 1BC0 1BC1 1BC2 1BC3 1BC4 1BC5 1BC6 1BC7 1BC8 1BC9 1BCA --1BCF
DESCRIPTION
Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped Undervoltage Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Undervoltage Alarm Pickup Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup Undervoltage Alarm Delay Undervoltage Alarm Events Undervoltage Trip Undervoltage Trip Relays Undervoltage Trip Pickup Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup Undervoltage Trip Delay Reserved Reserved Overvoltage Alarm Overvoltage Alarm Relays Overvoltage Alarm Pickup Overvoltage Alarm Delay Overvoltage Alarm Events Overvoltage Trip Overvoltage Trip Relays Overvoltage Trip Pickup Overvoltage Trip Delay Reserved Reserved Phase Reversal Trip Assign Trip Relays Reserved Reserved Block Overfrequency on Start Overfrequency Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Overfrequency Alarm Level Overfrequency Alarm Delay Overfrequency Alarm Events Overfrequency Trip Assign Trip Relays Overfrequency Trip Level Overfrequency Trip Delay Reserved
MIN.
0 0 0 50 50 0 0 0 0 50 50 0
MAX.
1 2 7 99 99 2550 1 2 7 99 99 2550
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x Rated x Rated 0.1s x Rated x Rated 0.1s
FORMAT CODE
FC103 FC115 FC113 F3 F3 F2 FC103 FC115 FC111 F3 F3 F2
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 1 85 85 30 0 0 1 80 80 30
OVERVOLTAGE
0 0 101 0 0 0 0 101 0
2 7 125 2550 1 1 7 125 2550
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
x Rated s x Rated s
FC115 FC113 F3 F2 FC103 FC103 FC111 F3 F2
0 1 105 10 0 0 1 110 10
PHASE REVERSAL
0 0 -
2 7 -
1 1 -
FC115 FC111 -
0 1 -
OVER FREQUENCY
0 0 0 2000 0 0 0 0 2000 0 -
5000 2 7 7000 2550 1 1 7 7000 2550 -
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
s Hz s Hz s -
F1 FC115 FC113 F3 F2 FC103 FC103 FC111 F3 F2 -
1 0 1 6050 10 0 0 1 6050 10 -
UNDER FREQUENCY
Block Underfrequency on Start Underfrequency Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Underfrequency Alarm Level Underfrequency Alarm Delay Underfrequency Alarm Events Underfrequency Trip Assign Trip Relays Underfrequency Trip Level Underfrequency Trip Delay Reserved
0 0 0 2000 0 0 0 0 2000 0
5000 2 7 7000 2550 1 2 7 7000 2550
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s Hz s Hz s
1 0 1 5950 10 0 0 1 5950 10
A-23
APPENDIX A
GROUP
LEAD POWER FACTOR
ADDR (hex)
1BD0 1BD1 1BD2 1BD3 1BD4 1BD5 1BD6 1BD7 1BD8 1BD9 1BDA --1BDF 1BE0 1BE1 1BE2 1BE3 1BE4 1BE5 1BE6 1BE7 1BE8 1BE9 1BEA ... 1BEF 1BF0 1BF1 1BF2 1BF3 1BF4 1BF5 1BF6 1BF7 1BF8 1BF9 1BFA ... 1BFF 1C00 1C01 1C02 1C03 1C04 1C05 1C06 1C07 1C08 1C09 1C0A ... 1C0F
DESCRIPTION
Block Lead Power Factor From Start Lead Power Factor Alarm Assign Lead Power Factor Alarm Relays Lead Power Factor Alarm Level Lead Power Factor Alarm Delay Lead Power Factor Alarm Events Lead Power Factor Trip Lead Power Factor Trip Relays Lead Power Factor Trip Level Lead Power Factor Trip Delay Reserved
MIN.
0 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 5 1
MAX.
5000 2 7 99 2550 1 2 7 99 2550
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s s s
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
1 0 1 30 10 0 0 1 30 10
LAG POWER FACTOR
Block Lag Power Factor From Start Lag Power Factor Alarm Assign Lag Power Factor Alarm Relays Lag Power Factor Alarm Level Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay Lag Power Factor Alarm Events Lag Power Factor Trip Assign Lag Power Factor Trip Relays Lag Power Factor Trip Level Lag Power Factor Trip Delay Reserved Reserved Block Positive kvar Element From Start Positive kvar Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Positive kvar Alarm Level Positive kvar Alarm Delay Positive kvar Alarm Events Positive kvar Trip Assign Trip Relays Positive kvar Trip Level Positive kvar Trip Delay Reserved Reserved Block kvar Element from Start Negative kvar Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Negative kvar Alarm Level Negative kvar Alarm Delay Negative kvar Alarm Events Negative kvar Trip Assign Trip Relays Negative kvar Trip Level Negative kvar Trip Delay Reserved Reserved
0 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 5 1
5000 2 7 99 2550 1 2 7 99 2550
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s s s
1 0 1 85 10 0 0 1 80 10
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
5000 2 7 25000 2550 1 1 7 25000 2550
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s kvar s kvar s
1 0 1 10 10 0 0 1 25 10
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
5000 2 7 25000 2550 1 1 7 25000 2550
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s kvar s kvar s
1 0 1 10 10 0 0 1 25 10
A-24

GROUP
UNDERPOWER
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
1C10 1C11 1C12 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C16 1C17 1C18 1C19 1C1A ... 1C1F 1C20 1C21 1C22 1C23 1C24 1C25 1C26 1C27 1C28 1C29 1C2A ... 1C2F 1C80 1C81 1C82 1C83 1C84 ... ... 1C8F 1C90 1C91 1C92 1C93 1C94 1C95 ... 1CCF 1CD0 1CD1 1CD2 1CD3 1CD5 1CD6 ... 1CDF 1CE0 1CE1 1CE2 1CE3 1CE4 1CE5 ... 1CEF
DESCRIPTION
Block Underpower From Start Underpower Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Underpower Alarm Level Underpower Alarm Delay Underpower Alarm Events Underpower Trip Underpower Trip Relays Underpower Trip Level Underpower Trip Delay Reserved Reserved Block Reverse Power From Start Reverse Power Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Reverse Power Alarm Level Reverse Power Alarm Delay Reverse Power Alarm Events Reverse Power Trip Assign Trip Relays Reverse Power Trip Level Reverse Power Trip Delay Reserved Reserved Trip Counter Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Alarm Pickup Level Trip Counter Alarm Events Reserved
MIN.
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
MAX.
15000 2 7 25000 2550 1 2 7 25000 2550
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s kW s kW s
FORMAT CODE
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 1 2 1 0 0 1 1 1
REVERSE POWER
0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 2
50000 2 7 25000 300 1 2 7 25000 300
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s kW s kW s
0 0 1 2 1 0 0 1 1 1
TRIP COUNTER
0 0 0 0
2 7 50000 1
1 1 1 1
FC115 FC113 F1 FC103
0 1 25 0
STARTER FAILURE
Reserved Starter Failure Alarm Starter Type Assign Alarm Relays Starter Failure Delay Starter Failure Alarm Events Reserved Reserved Current Demand Period Current Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays Current Demand Alarm Level Current Demand Alarm Events Reserved Reserved kW Demand Period kW Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays kW Demand Alarm Level kW Demand Alarm Events Reserved Reserved
0 0 0 10 0
2 1 7 1000 1
1 1 1 10 1
ms -
FC115 FC125 FC113 F1 FC103
0 0 1 100 0
CURRENT DEMAND
5 0 0 10 0
90 2 7 65535 1
1 1 1 1 1
min A -
F1 FC115 FC113 F9 FC103
15 0 1 100 0
kW DEMAND
5 0 0 1 0
90 2 7 50000 1
1 1 1 1 1
min kW -
F1 FC115 FC113 F1 FC103
15 0 1 100 0
A-25
APPENDIX A
GROUP
kvar DEMAND
ADDR (hex)
1CF0 1CF1 1CF2 1CF3 1CF4 1CF5 ... 1CFF 1D00 1D01 1D02 1D03 1D04 1D05 ... ... 1D3F 1D40 1D41 1D42 1D43 1D44 1D45 1D46 1D47 1D48 1D49 1D4A 1D4B 1D4C 1D4D 1D4E 1D4F 1D50 1D51 1D52 1D53 1D54 --1EFF 1F00 1F01 1F02 ... 1F0F 1F10 1F11 1F12 1F13 1F14 1F15 1F16 1F17 1F18 1F19
DESCRIPTION
kvar Demand Period kvar Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays kvar Demand Alarm Level kvar Demand Alarm Events Reserved Reserved kVA Demand Period kVA Demand Alarm Assign Alarm Relays kVA Demand Alarm Level kVA Demand Alarm Events Reserved
MIN.
5 0 0 -32000 0
MAX.
90 2 7 32000 1
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 min kvar -
FORMAT CODE
F1 FC115 FC113 F1 FC103
FACTORY DEFAULT
15 0 1 100 0
kVA DEMAND
5 0 0 1 0
90 2 7 50000 1
1 1 1 1 1
min kVA -
F1 FC115 FC113 F1 FC103
15 0 1 100 0
ANALOG OUTPUTS
Reserved Enable Analog Output 1 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter Analog Output 1 Minimum Analog Output 1 Maximum Enable Analog Output 2 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter Analog Output 2 Minimum Analog Output 2 Maximum Enable Analog Output 3 Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter Analog Output 3 Minimum Analog Output 3 Maximum Enable Analog Output 4 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter Analog Output 4 Minimum Analog Output 4 Maximum Reserved Reserved Simulation Mode Pre-Fault to Fault Time Delay Reserved Reserved Pre-Fault Current Phase A Pre-Fault Current Phase B Pre-Fault Current Phase C Pre-Fault Ground Current Pre - Fault Voltage Phase A Pre - Fault Voltage Phase B Pre - Fault Voltage Phase C Pre-Fault Current Lags Voltage Pre - Fault System Frequency Stator RTD Pre-Fault Temperature
0 0 0 TBD TBD 0 0 0 TBD TBD 0 0 0 TBD TBD 0 0 0 TBD TBD
1 2 48 TBD TBD 1 2 48 TBD TBD 1 2 48 TBD TBD 1 2 48 TBD TBD
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FC103 FC26 FC127 F1 F1 FC103 FC26 FC127 F1 F1 FC103 FC26 FC127 F1 F1 FC103 FC26 FC127 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SIMULATION MODE
0 0
3 300
1 1
FC138 F1
0 10
PRE-FAULT VALUES
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 250 -40 -40 -40 -40 -
2000 2000 2000 50000 110 110 110 359 700 200 200 200 200 -
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
x FLA x FLA x FLA A x CT x CT x CT degrees Hz

o
F3 F3 F3 FC23 F3 F3 F3 F1 F2 F4 F4 F4 F4 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 600 40 40 40 40 -
1F1A Bearing RTD Pre-Fault Temperature 1F1B Other RTD Pre-Fault Temperature 1F1C Ambient RTD Pre-Fault Temperature ... ... 1F3F Reserved
oC oC oC
A-26

GROUP
FAULT SETUP
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
ADDR (hex)
1F40 1F41 1F42 1F43 1F44 1F45 1F46 1F47 1F48 1F49
DESCRIPTION
Fault Current Phase A Fault Current Phase B Fault Current Phase C Fault Ground Current Fault Voltage Phase A Fault Voltage Phase B Fault Voltage Phase C Fault Current Lag Voltage Fault System Frequency Stator RTD Fault Temperature
MIN.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 250 -40 -40 -40 -40
MAX.
2000 2000 2000 50000 110 110 110 359 700 200 200 200 200
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x FLA x FLA x FLA A x CT x CT x CT degrees Hz
oC oC o o
FORMAT CODE
F3 F3 F3 F23 F3 F3 F3 F1 F2 F4 F4 F4 F4
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 600 40 40 40 40
1F4A Bearing RTD Fault Temperature 1F4B Other RTD Fault Temperature 1F4C Ambient RTD Fault Temperature ... ... 1F7F Reserved TEST OUTPUT RELAYS 1F80 Force Trip Relay 1F81 Force Trip Relay Duration 1F82 Force AUX1 Relay 0 = continuous 1F83 Force AUX1 Relay Duration 1F84 Force AUX2 Relay 1F85 Force AUX2 Relay Duration 1F86 Force Alarm Relay 1F87 Force Alarm Relay Range 1F81 Reserved ... 1F8F Reserved TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS 1F90 Force Analog Outputs 1F91 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 1F92 Analog Output 2 Forced Value 1F93 Analog Output 3 Forced Value 1F94 Analog Output 4 Forced Value 1F95 Reserved ... 1FFE Reserved 2000 Reserved --2FFF Reserved Event Recorder / Trace Memory (Addresses 3000 -3FFF) EVENT RECORDER 3000 Event Recorder Last Reset (2 words) 3002 Total Number of Events Since Last Clear 3003 Event Record Selector (1=newest, 40=oldest) 3004 Cause of Event 3005 Time of Event (2 words) 3007 Date of Event (2 words) 3009 Reserved 300A Reserved 300B Event Phase A Current 300C Event Phase B Current 300D Event Phase C Current 300E Event Motor Load 300F Event Current Unbalance 3010 Event Ground Current 3011 Reserved 3012 Event Hottest Stator RTD 3013 Event Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD ... 301A 301B 301C 301D 301E Event Voltage Vab Event Voltage Vbc Event Voltage Vca Event Voltage Van Event Voltage Vbn
C C
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
2 301 2 301 2 301 2 301
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s s s s
FC150 F1 FC150 F1 FC150 F1 FC150 F1
0 301 0 301 0 301 0 301
0 0 0 0 0
1 100 100 100 100
1 1 1 1 1
% range % range % range % range
FC126 F1 F1 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0
N/A 0 1 0 N/A N/A
N/A 65535 40 40 N/A N/A
N/A 1 1 1 N/A N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F18 F1 F1 FC134 F19 F18
N/A 0 1 0 N/A N/A
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -40 0 0 0 0 0
65535 65535 65535 2000 100 50000 12 200 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A A A FLA % A o
F9 F9 F9 F3 F1 F23 F1 F4 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V V V V V
A-27
APPENDIX A
GROUP
ADDR (hex)
301F 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 ... 30EF 30F0 30F1 30F3 30F5 ... 30FF 3100 ... 3400 31C0 ... 3FFF
DESCRIPTION
Event Voltage Vcn Event System Frequency Event Real Power Event Reactive Power Event Apparent Power Event Power Factor Reserved ... Reserved Trace Memory Channel Selector Trace Memory Date Trace Memory Time Reserved Reserved First Trace Memory Sample ... Last Trace Memory Sample Reserved ... Reserved
MIN.
0 0 -32000 -32000 0 -99
MAX.
20000 12000 32000 32000 50000 100
STEP UNITS VALUE

1 1 1 1 1 1 V Hz kW kvar kVA -
FORMAT CODE
F1 F3 F12 F12 F1 F21
FACTORY DEFAULT
0 0 0 0 0 0
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
0 N/A N/A
9 N/A N/A
1 N/A N/A
N/A N/A
F1 F18 F19
0 N/A N/A
-32767 -32767
32767 32767
1 1
F4 F4
0 0
A-28
APPENDIX A
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING A.1.2 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS
Table A2: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 1 of 12)

FORMAT CODE
F1 16 bits
A
DEFINITION
TYPE
UNSIGNED VALUE Example: 1234 stored as 1234
F2
16 bits
UNSIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE Example: 123.4 stored as 1234
F3
16 bits
UNSIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES Example: 12.34 stored as 1234
F4
16 bits
2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE Example: -1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F5
16 bits
2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACES Example: -123.4 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F6
16 bits
2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES Example: -12.34 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F7
16 bits
2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES Example: -1.234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302) 2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 4 DECIMAL PLACES Example: -0.1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F8
16 bits
F9
32 bits 1st 16 bits 2nd 16 bits
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Example: 123456 stored as 123456 (i.e. 1st word: 0001 hex, 2nd word: E240 hex) UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Example: 12345.6 stored as 123456 (i.e. 1st word: 0001 hex, 2nd word: E240 hex)
F10
F11
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Example: 1234.56 stored as 123456 (i.e. 1st word: 0001 hex, 2nd word: E240 hex) 2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Example: -123456 stored as -123456 (i.e. 1st word: FFFE hex, 2nd word: 1DC0 hex)
F12
F13
2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Example: -12345.6 stored as -123456 (i.e. 1st word: FFFE hex, 2nd word: 1DC0 hex) 2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Example: -1234.56 stored as -123456 (i.e. 1st word: FFFE hex, 2nd word: 1DC0 hex)
F14
A-29
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING Table A2: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 2 of 12)
APPENDIX A
FORMAT CODE
F15 16 bits
TYPE
HARDWARE REVISION 1=A 2=B ... 26 = Z SOFTWARE REVISION Major Revision Number 0 to 9 in steps of 1 xxxx xxxx 1111 1111 Minor Revision Number (two BCD digits) 00 to 99 in steps of 1 Example: Revision 2.30 stored as 0230 hex 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0010 ... 0000 0000 0001 1010
DEFINITION
F16
16 bits 1111 1111 xxxx xxxx
F17
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Example: 123.456 stored as 123456 (i.e. 1st word: 0001 hex, 2nd word: E240 hex) DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) Month (1 to 12) Day (1 to 31) Year (1995 to 2094) Example: Feb 20, 1995 stored as 34867142 (i.e. 1st word: 0214, 2nd word 07C6) Feb = 02, 20th = 14, 1995 = 07C6 thus 021407C6hex = 34867142decimal TIME (HH:MM:SS:hh) Hours (0 to 23) Minutes (0 to 59) Seconds (0 to 59) Hundreds of seconds (0 to 99) - Not used by 369 Example: 2:05pm stored as 235208704 (i.e. 1st word: 0E05, 2nd word 0000)
F18
32 bits 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd and 4th byte
F19
32 bits 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte
F20
2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE High Order Word of Long Value Low Order Word of Long Value Note: -1 means Never 2s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES (Power Factor) Leading Power Factor - Negative Lagging Power Factor - Positive Example: Power Factor of 0.87 lag is used as 87 (i.e. 0057)
F21
16 bits <0 >0
F22
16 bits MSB LSB
TWO 8-BIT CHARACTERS PACKED INTO 16-BIT UNSIGNED First Character Second Character Example: String AB stored as 4142 hex. Unsigned Value (For 1A/5 A CT, 1Decimal Place) (For 50: 0.025 A CT, 2 Decimal Places) Example: For 1A/5A CT, G/F current = 1000.0 A Example: For 50: .025 A CT, G/F current = 25.00
FC23
16 Bits
F26
16 Bits 0 1 2
Analog Output Selection 0 - 1mA 0 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA Disable / Enable Selection Disabled Enabled
F30
16 Bits 0 1
A-30
APPENDIX A Table A2: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 3 of 12)

FORMAT CODE
F31 16 Bits 0 1 2 3 4 FC100 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 FC101 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 4 FC102 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 FC103 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 FC104 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 FC105 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 FC106 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 FC107 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 FC108 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 FC109 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
TYPE
Command Function Codes Not in use Reset 369 Motor Start Motor Stop Waveform Trigger Temperature Display Units Celsius Fahrenheit RS 485 Baud Rate 1200 baud 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud RS 485 Parity None Odd Even Off / On or No / Yes Selection Off / No On / Yes Ground CT Type None 1 A Secondary 5 A Secondary Multilin CT 50/0.025 CT Type None 1 A Secondary 5 A Secondary Voltage Transformer Connection Type None Open Delta Wye Nominal Frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz Variable Reduced Voltage Starting Transition On Current Only Current or Timer Current and Timer Starter Status Switch Starter Aux a (52a) Starter Aux b (52b)
DEFINITION
A-31
APPENDIX A
FORMAT CODE
FC110 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FC111
TYPE
Unsigned 16 bit integer Emergency Restart Switch Input Function Off Emergency Switch General Switch Digital Counter Waveform Capture Simulate Pre - Fault Simulate Fault Simulate Pre - Fault to Fault Trip Relays none Trip Aux1 Aux2 Trip & Aux1 Trip & Aux2 Aux1 & Aux2 Trip & Aux1 & Aux2 Not Defined
DEFINITION
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FC112
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1
FC113
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm Relays None Alarm Aux1 Aux2 Alarm & Aux1 Alarm & Aux2 Aux1 & Aux2 Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2 Counter Type Increment Decrement Alarm/Trip Type Selection Off Latched Unlatched Switch Type Normally Open Normally Closed Reset Mode All Resets Remote Reset Only Keypad Reset Only Backup Relays None Aux 1 Aux1 & Aux2 Aux2
FC114
FC115
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2
FC116
FC117
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2
FC119
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3
A-32

FORMAT CODE
FC120 0 1 2 3 FC121 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 4 FC122 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 FC123 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 4 FC124 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 FC125 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
TYPE
Unsigned 16 bit integer RTD Type 100 Ohm Platinum 120 Ohm Nickel 100 Ohm Nickel 10 Ohm Copper RTD Application None Stator Bearing Ambient Other Local / Remote RTD Voting Selection Off RTD #1 RTD #2 RTD #3 RTD #4 RTD #5 RTD #6 RTD #7 RTD #8 RTD #9 RTD #10 RTD #11 RTD #12 All Stator Alarm Status Off Not Active Timing Out Active Latched Phase Rotation at Motor Terminals ABC ACB Starter Type Breaker Contactor
DEFINITION
A-33
APPENDIX A
FORMAT CODE
FC127 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 FC128
TYPE
Unsigned 16 bit integer Analog Output Parameter Selection Phase A Current Phase B Current Phase C Current Average Phase Current AB Line Voltage BC Line Voltage CA Line Voltage Average Line Voltage Phase AN Voltage Phase BN Voltage Phase CN Voltage Average Phase Voltage Hottest Stator RTD Local RTD #1 Local RTD #2 Local RTD #3 Local RTD #4 Local RTD #5 Local RTD #6 Local RTD #7 Local RTD #8 Local RTD #9 Local RTD #10 Local RTD #11 Local RTD #12 Remote RTD #1 Remote RTD #2 Remote RTD #3 Remote RTD #4 Remote RTD #5 Remote RTD #6 Remote RTD #7 Remote RTD #8 Remote RTD #9 Remote RTD #10 Remote RTD #11 Remote RTD #12 Power Factor Reactive Power (kvar) Real Power (kW) Apparent Power (KVA) Thermal Capacity Used Relay Lockout Time Current Demand kvar Demand kW Demand kVA Demand Motor Load MWhrs Curve Style Standard Custom Digital Input Pickup Type Over Under
DEFINITION
FC130
A-34

FORMAT CODE
FC131
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
TYPE
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 Input Switch Status Open Closed Motor Status Stopped Starting Running Overloaded Tripped Cause of Event / Cause of Last Trip (up to 40) No Event / No Trip To Date Reserved Speed Switch Trip Differential Trip General Spare Switch Trip General Emergency Restart Switch Trip General Diferential Switch Trip General Speed Switch Trip General Reset Switch. Trip Reserved Overload Trip Short Circuit Trip Short Circuit Backup Mechanical Jam Trip Undercurrent Trip Current Unbalance Trip Single Phasing Trip Ground Fault Trip Ground Fault Backup Reserved Acceleration Trip Start Inhibit Starts/Hour Inhibit Time Between Starts Inhibit Restart Block Backspin Inhibit Reserved Undervoltage Trip Overvoltage Trip Phase Reversal Trip Underfrequency Trip Overfrequency Trip Reserved Lead Power Factor Trip Lag Power Factor Trip Positive kvarTrip Negative kvar Trip Underpower Trip Reverse Power Trip Reserved Local RTD 1 Trip Local RTD 2 Trip Local RTD 3 Trip Local RTD 4 Trip Local RTD 5 Trip
DEFINITION
FC133
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 4
FC134
Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A-35
APPENDIX A
FORMAT CODE
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
TYPE
Local RTD 6 Trip Local RTD 7 Trip Local RTD 8 Trip Local RTD 9 Trip Local RTD 10 Trip Local RTD 11 Trip Local RTD 12 Trip Reserved Remote RTD 1 Trip Remote RTD 2 Trip Remote RTD 3 Trip Remote RTD 4 Trip Remote RTD 5 Trip Remote RTD 6 Trip Remote RTD 7 Trip Remote RTD 8 Trip Remote RTD 9 Trip Remote RTD 10 Trip Remote RTD 11Trip Remote RTD 12 Trip Reserved General Spare Switch Alarm General Emergency Switch Alarm General Differential Switch Alarm General Speed Switch Alarm General Reset Switch Alarm Reserved Thermal Capacity Alarm Overload Alarm Mechanical Jam Alarm Undercurrent Alarm Current Unbalance Alarm Ground Fault Alarm Reserved Undervoltage Alarm Overvoltage Alarm Over Frequency Alarm Under Frequency Alarm Reserved Power Factor Lead Alarm Power Factor Lag Alarm Reactive Power Positive Alarm Reactive Power Negative Alarm Underpower Alarm Reverse Power Alarm Reserved Local RTD 1 Alarm Local RTD 2 Alarm Local RTD 3 Alarm Local RTD 4 Alarm Local RTD 5 Alarm Local RTD 6 Alarm Local RTD 7 Alarm Local RTD 8 Alarm Local RTD 9 Alarm Local RTD 10 Alarm Local RTD 11 Alarm Local RTD 12 Alarm
DEFINITION
A-36

FORMAT CODE
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
TYPE
Local RTD 1 High Alarm Local RTD 2 High Alarm Local RTD 3 High Alarm Local RTD 4 High Alarm Local RTD 5 High Alarm Local RTD 6 High Alarm Local RTD 7 High Alarm Local RTD 8 High Alarm Local RTD 9 High Alarm Local RTD 10 High Alarm Local RTD 11 High Alarm Local RTD 12 High Alarm Reserved Remote RTD 1 Alarm Remote RTD 2 Alarm Remote RTD 3 Alarm Remote RTD 4 Alarm Remote RTD 5 Alarm Remote RTD 6 Alarm Remote RTD 7 Alarm Remote RTD 8 Alarm Remote RTD 9 Alarm Remote RTD 10 Alarm Remote RTD 11 Alarm Remote RTD 12 Alarm Remote RTD 1 High Alarm Remote RTD 2 High Alarm Remote RTD 3 High Alarm Remote RTD 4 High Alarm Remote RTD 5 High Alarm Remote RTD 6 High Alarm Remote RTD 7 High Alarm Remote RTD 8 High Alarm Remote RTD 9 High Alarm Remote RTD 10 High Alarm Remote RTD 11 High Alarm Remote RTD 12 High Alarm Reserved Open RTD Alarm Lost RRTD Communication Alarm Short/Low RTD Alarm Reserved Trip Counter Alarm Current Demand Alarm KW Demand Alarm kvar Demand Alarm kVA Demand Alarm Digital Counter Alarm Service Alarm Control Power Lost Cont. Power Applied Emergency Rst. Close Emergency Rst. Open Start While Blocked Reserved Starter Fail Alarm Breaker Failure Welded Contactor
DEFINITION
A-37
APPENDIX A
FORMAT CODE
162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 FC135
TYPE
Incomplete Sequence Trip Reserved Simulation Started Simulation Stopped Reserved Reserved Waveform Capture Reserved Motor Speed Low Speed (Speed 1) High Speed (Speed 2)
DEFINITION
FC136
Unsigned 16 bit integer bit 0 bit 1 bit 3 - bit 2
Option (0 = PATICULAR OPTION NOT INSTALLED) 1 = Profibus Option 1 = Fibre Optic Option 0 - 0 = No Metering or Backspin Options 0 - 1 = Metering Option 1 - 0 = Backspin Option
bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 - bit 15 FC138 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 FC139 FC141 Reserved Unsigned 16 bit integer bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 FC143 Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 1 2 3 FC 149 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 FC150 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 2 FC151 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1
1 = Internal RTD Option 1 = HI Power Supply 0 = Lo Power Supply Unused Simulation Mode Off Simulate Pre-Fault Simulate Fault Pre-Fault to Fault Reserved Output Relay Status Trip Alarm Auxiliary 1 Auxiliary 2 Single VT Selection Off AN (Wye) AB (Delta) BN (Wye) BC (Delta) CN (Wye) N/A (Delta) Channel 3 Application MODBUS RRTD Output Relay Status Forced Energized De - Energized Channel Type RS 485 Fiber Optic
A-38

FORMAT CODE
FC152 0 1 2 3 FC156 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 FC157 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FC158 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FC159 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FC160 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FC161 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 FC162 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer 0 1 2
A.1 MEMORY MAPPING
TYPE
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Number of Records 1 * 64 cycles 2 * 32 cycles 4 * 16 cycles 8 * 8 cycles Remote RRTD Communication Status RRTD Module Communication Lost RRTD Communication on Line Differential Switch Input Function OFF Differential Switch General Switch Digital Counter Waveform Capture Simulate Pre - Fault Simulate Fault Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault Speed Switch Input Function OFF Speed Switch General Switch Digital Counter Waveform Capture Simulate Pre - Fault Simulate Fault Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault Spare Switch Input Function OFF Starter Status Switch General Switch Digital Counter Waveform Capture Simulate Pre - Fault Simulate Fault Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault Reset Switch Input Function OFF Reset Switch General Switch Digital Counter Waveform Capture Simulate Pre - Fault Simulate Fault Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
DEFINITION
Output Relay Fail Safe Code (0 = Failsafe, 1 = Nonfailsafe) Failsafe Non Failsafe Access Level Read Only Read / Write Factory Service
A-39
APPENDIX A
FORMAT CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
A-40
APPENDIX B APPENDIX B REVISIONSB.1 CHANGE NOTES
B.1 CHANGE NOTES B.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table B1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N 1601-0077-B1 1601-0077-B2 1601-0077-B3 369 REVISION RELEASE DATE 07 May 1999 08 June 1999 15 June 1999 369-082 369-085 ECO
53CMB105.000 53CMB110.000 53CMB110.000
B.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B3
Table B2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B3

Page (369-B2) 1-2 2-7 to 2-9 5-6 5-7 5-50 Various Change Hi Power Supply : 50-300 VDC/ 40265 VAC From Hi Power Supply : 90-300 VDC / 70-265 VAC To (page of 369-B3) 1-2 2-7 to 2-9 5-6 5-72-7 to 2-9 5-50 Various
Various dropout levels changed to 96- Old Dropout levels 97 -98 % 98% Setpoint Access menus changed Display Preferences menu changed Backspin Detection menu changed Various ranges and memory map locations changed
GE Power Management
L90 Line Differential Relay
B-1
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C WARRANTYC.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION
C.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale.
C-1
INDEX
INDEX
Numerics
2 PHASE CT CONFIGURATION ................................. 7-25 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ...................... 3-5 369 electrical installation .................................................. 3-8 functional summary ................................................... 1-4 general overview ....................................................... 1-1 mechanical installation .............................................. 3-1 pc interface ............................................................... 4-5 typical wiring ............................................................. 3-9 typical wiring diagram ................................................ 3-8 369 POWER SUPPLY RANGES ................................... 3-9 5A ground CT installation .............................................. 3-23 input ......................................................................... 8-3 86 LOCKOUT SWITCH ................................................ 7-6
C
CLEAR/PRESET DATA ...............................................5-13 COMMUNICATIONS ..................................... 2-6, 5-8, 10-1 CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 4-7 CONTROL functions ..................................................................5-22 power ............................................................... 3-9, 3-16 COOL TIME CONSTANTS ..........................................7-18 CORE BALANCE CONNECTION .................................. 7-3 CRC-16 ALGORITHM .................................................10-3 CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE ............................4-10 CT burden ...................................................................... 7-8 circuit ....................................................................... 7-9 secondary resistance ................................................. 7-8 selection ................................................................... 7-8 size andsaturation ..................................................... 7-7 withstand .................................................................. 7-7 CT AND VT polarity ..................................................................... 7-4 CT/VT SETUP ............................................................5-16 CURRENT metering ................................................................... 6-9 unbalance ................................................................5-42 CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE ....................................5-30
A
A1 STATUS ................................................................. 6-3 A2 METERING DATA ................................................... 6-9 A3 LEARNED DATA ................................................... 6-16 A4 STATISTICAL DATA ............................................. 6-20 A5 EVENT RECORD .................................................. 6-23 A6 RELAY INFORMATION ......................................... 6-25 ACCELERATION TRIP ....................................... 5-47, 7-14 ACCESSORIES ........................................................... 1-2 ACTUAL VALUES ........................................................ 6-1 main menu ................................................................ 6-1 overview ................................................................... 6-1 page 1 menu ............................................................. 6-3 page 2 menu ............................................................. 6-9 page 3 menu ........................................................... 6-16 page 4 menu ........................................................... 6-20 page 5 menu ........................................................... 6-23 page 6 menu ........................................................... 6-25 ADDITIONAL FEATURES ............................................. 2-4 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TING .............................. 8-11 ALARM STATUS .......................................................... 6-6 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ........................................... 2-9 ANALOG inputs and outputs ..................................................... 8-8 outputs ................................................... 3-14, 3-15, 5-77 outputs (Option M) ..................................................... 2-6 APPLICATION ........................... 5-50, 5-59, 5-62, 5-63, 5-66, 5-67, 5-70 example .................................................................. 5-41 APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION ................................... 2-9 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING ................ 7-33
D
DATA frame format and data rate .......................................10-1 packet format ...........................................................10-2 DEMAND ....................................................................5-20 metering ..................................................................6-14 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................ 2-9 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ............................................5-73 DIGITAL INPUT ........................................................... 7-6 function digital counter .................................................5-76 general switch.................................................5-75 simulate fault ..................................................5-76 simulate pre-fault .............................................5-76 simulate pre-fault to fault ...................................5-76 waveform capture ............................................5-76 status ....................................................................... 6-7 trip coil supervision ................................................... 8-7 DISPLAY ..................................................................... 4-1 preferences ............................................................... 5-7 DOS AND DONTS ...................................................... 7-4 DOWNLOAD setpoint file to 369 ....................................................4-12 DUST/MOISTURE ................................................ 2-9, 2-10
B
BACK PORTS (3) ......................................................... 2-6 BACKSPIN detection ................................................................. 5-50 voltage inputs .......................................................... 3-13 BEARING RTDS ........................................................ 7-15 BSD INPUTS (OPTION B) ............................................ 2-6
INDEX
EDITING A SETPOINT FILE ........................................4-11 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ...................................... 3-8 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE ..........................................10-1 EMERGENCY RESTART ............................................5-73 EMI ............................................................................2-10 ENABLE
INDEX
RTD biasing .............................................................7-13 start inhibit ...............................................................7-14 ENVIRONMENATAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................ 2-9 ENVIRONMENT ..........................................................2-10 ERROR checking ..................................................................10-3 responses .............................................................. 10-12 EVENT RECORD ......................................................... 2-6 EVENT RECORDER ................................................. 10-14 EVENT RECORDING ..................................................4-21
I
IMPULSE TEST ............................................................2-9 INITIAL START CAPACITY ......................................... 7-23 INPUTS ........................................................................2-5 INSTALLATION ............................................................3-1 electrical ....................................................................3-8 mechanical ................................................................3-1 options and accessories ........................................... 5-14 upgrade .....................................................................4-5 INSULATION RESISTANCE ........................................ 2-10 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING ................................1-1
F
FACEPLATE ................................................................ 4-1 interface ................................................................... 4-1 FAQ ............................................................................ 7-2 FAST TRANSIENTS ....................................................2-10 FAULT SETUP ...........................................................5-81 FIBER OPTIC PORT (OPTION F) ................................. 2-6 FIRMWARE history ...................................................................... 1-3 version .....................................................................6-25 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ............................ 7-2 FRONT PORT ............................................................. 2-6 communicating .......................................................... 7-2 FUNCTION ... 5-39, 5-40, 5-41, 5-44, 5-47, 5-48, 5-50, 5-56, 5-57, 5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63, 5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69, 5-70 FUNCTION CODE 03 and 04 - read setpoints and actual values .............10-5 05 - execute operation ..............................................10-6 06 - store single setpoint ..........................................10-7 07 - read device status .............................................10-8 08 - loopback test .....................................................10-9 16 - performing commands ..................................... 10-11 16 - store multiple setpoints .................................... 10-10
K
KEYPAD ......................................................................4-3
L
LAG POWER FACTOR ............................................... 5-67 LAST TRIP DATA .........................................................6-5 LEAD POWER FACTOR ............................................. 5-66 LEARNED START CAPACITY ..................................... 7-23 LED INDICATORS ........................................................4-2 LOCAL / REMOTE RTD OPERATION .......................... 5-55 LOCAL RTD ............................................................... 6-12 maximums ............................................................... 6-18 protection ................................................................ 5-51
M
MAJOR UPDATES ....................................................... B-1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ......................................3-1 MECHANICAL JAM ............................................ 5-40, 7-14 MEMORY MAP ......................................................... 10-13 data formats .............................................................. A-1 information ............................................................. 10-13 MESSAGE format and example ... 10-5, 10-6, 10-7, 10-8, 10-9, 10-10, 10-11 scratchpad ............................................................... 5-11 METERED QUANTITIES ...............................................2-4 METERING ..................................................................2-6 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL ........................................ 10-1 MODEL INFORMATION .............................................. 6-25 MONITORING SETUP ................................................ 5-18 MOTOR cooling ..................................................................... 5-33 data ......................................................................... 6-16 FLC ......................................................................... 7-12 statistics .................................................................. 6-22 status ................................................................. 6-4, 6-6 status detection ........................................................ 7-16 thermal limits ........................................................... 7-11 MPM-369 conversion terminal list ...............................................3-6 MTM-369 conversion terminal list ...............................................3-6
G
GROUND (1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST ........................................ 8-3 accuracy test ............................................................. 8-4 bus ........................................................................... 7-4 CT .................................................................. 5-16, 7-12 current input .............................................................3-10 fault ................................................................ 5-44, 7-14 fault detection ungrounded systems ........................................7-27 filter .......................................................................... 7-4 safety ....................................................................... 7-4 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS .................................. 2-1
H
HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING .......................... 8-2 HGF GROUND CT INSTALLATION 3 and 5 window ......................................................3-24 8 window ................................................................3-25 HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO ................................ 5-35, 7-13 HUMIDITY ........................................................... 2-9, 2-10
INDEX
ii
INDEX
RELAY LABEL DEFINITION ......................................... 1-5 REMOTE RESET ........................................................5-74 REMOTE RTD ............................................................6-13 maximums ................................................................6-19 module electrical installation .....................................3-20 module mechanical installation .................................3-19 protection .................................................................5-53 RESET .......................................................................5-21 RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT CONNECTION ................ 7-3 REVERSE POWER .....................................................5-71 REVISION HISTORY ................................................... B-1 RFI ............................................................................2-10 RS232 communicating .......................................................... 7-2 program port ............................................................. 4-2 RS485 4 wire ....................................................................... 7-2 cable ........................................................................ 7-5 communication difficulties .......................................... 7-2 communications .......................................................3-17 communications port .................................................. 7-5 converter .................................................................. 7-5 distances .................................................................. 7-5 full duplex ................................................................. 7-2 interfacing master device ........................................... 7-5 repeater .................................................................... 7-5 RTD .................................................................... 3-14, 7-4 2 wire lead compensation .........................................7-32 accuracy test ............................................................. 8-4 bias .........................................................................5-36 bias maximum ..........................................................7-13 bias mid point ...........................................................7-13 bias minimum ...........................................................7-13 circuitry ....................................................................7-29 grounding .................................................................. 7-6 inputs ......................................................................3-14 inputs (Option r) ........................................................ 2-6 stator .......................................................................7-15 RUNNING COOL TIME ...............................................7-13
N
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER .................................. 5-69
O
OPEN RTD ALARM .................................................... 5-56 OPERATION .............................................................. 5-21 ORDERING ................................................................. 1-2 OUTPUT RELAYS ....................................... 2-6, 3-16, 8-10 setup ...................................................................... 5-21 OUTPUTS ................................................................... 2-6 OVERFREQUENCY ................................................... 5-63 OVERLOAD alarm ...................................................................... 5-37 curve ...................................................................... 7-13 curve test ................................................................ 8-11 curves ..................................................................... 5-25 pickup ..................................................................... 7-12 OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL ........................ 2-7 OVERVIEW ................................................................. 5-1 OVERVOLTAGE ........................................................ 5-60
P
PC PROGRAM (software) history ...................................................... 1-3 PC SOFTWARE obtaining ................................................................... 7-2 PHASE CT .................................................................. 5-16, 7-11 CT installation ......................................................... 3-22 current (CT) inputs .................................................... 3-9 current accuracy test ................................................. 8-2 line voltage input(VT) (Option M) ................................ 2-5 reversal ................................................................... 5-61 voltage (VT/PT) inputs ............................................. 3-12 VT .......................................................................... 5-16 PHASORS ......................................................... 4-19, 6-15 POLARITY CT and VT ................................................................ 7-4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ................................... 5-68 POWER measurement test .................................................... 8-11 metering .................................................................. 6-11 metering (option m) ................................................... 2-6 PRE-FAULT SETUP ................................................... 5-80 PRINTING ................................................................. 4-14 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ........................................... 2-1 PRODUCTION TESTS ............................................... 2-10 PROFIBUS PORT (OPTION P) ..................................... 2-6 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ....................................... 7-10 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ........................................... 2-7 PROTOCOL ............................................................... 10-1
S
S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS .............................................5-77 S11 369 TESTING ......................................................5-79 S2 SYSTEM SETUP ...................................................5-15 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION ....................................5-23 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ..........................................5-38 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS ....................................5-46 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ............................................5-51 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ...........................................5-58 S8 POWER ELEMENTS ..............................................5-64 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ...................................................5-72 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP ...................... 8-1 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL ........................5-22 SETPOINTS ................................................................ 5-1 access ...................................................................... 5-6 entry ......................................................................... 4-4 main menu ................................................................ 5-1 page 1 menu ............................................................. 5-5 page 10 menu ..........................................................5-77 page 11 menu ..........................................................5-79 page 2 menu ............................................................5-15 page 3 menu ............................................................5-23 page 4 menu ............................................................5-38
R
REAL TIME CLOCK ........................................5-9, 6-7, 6-8 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER ................................ 7-30 REDUCED VOLTAGE START CONTROL ............................................................................... 5-23
iii
INDEX
INDEX
page 5 menu ............................................................5-46 page 6 menu ............................................................5-51 page 7 menu ............................................................5-58 page 8 menu ............................................................5-64 page 9 menu ............................................................5-72 SHORT CIRCUIT ........................................................5-39 test ..........................................................................8-15 trip ...........................................................................7-14 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM ................................5-56 SIMULATION MODE ...................................................5-79 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-2 SPARE SWITCH .........................................................5-73 SPEED SWITCH .........................................................5-74 START INHIBIT ........................................ 5-48, 7-18, 7-23 enabled ....................................................................7-23 STARTER FAILURE ....................................................5-20 STARTS/HOUR ..........................................................7-15 STATOR RTDS ...........................................................7-15 STOPPED COOL TIME ...............................................7-13 STOPPED COOL TIME CONSTANT ............................7-18 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ..........................10-5 SUPPORTED OPERATIONS .......................................10-6 SYSTEM ....................................................................5-17 capacity used ........................................................... 7-21 limit ......................................................................... 7-18 limit curves .............................................................. 7-22 model ...................................................................... 5-24 TIME BETWEEN STARTS ........................................... 7-15 TIMING ...................................................................... 10-4 TRENDING ................................................................. 4-15 TRIP COUNTER ................................................ 5-19, 6-20 TRIP RELAY .............................................................. 3-16 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 4-23 TWO PHASE WIRING ................................................. 7-25 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION .................... 7-32 TYPE TEST STANDARDS .............................................2-9
U
UNBALANCE alarm and trip ........................................................... 7-14 bias ......................................................................... 5-31 bias k factor ............................................................. 7-12 bias of thermal capacity ............................................ 7-12 test .......................................................................... 8-12 UNDERCURRENT ............................................. 5-41, 7-14 UNDERFREQUENCY .................................................. 5-62 UNDERPOWER .......................................................... 5-70 UNDERVOLTAGE ....................................................... 5-59 UPGRADING relay firmware ............................................................4-8 setpoint file to new revision ...................................... 4-13 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA .................. 10-13 USER INTERFACE introduction ................................................................4-5
T
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................... 2-5 TEMPERATURE .........................................................2-10 TERMINAL identification ............................................................. 3-3 layout ....................................................................... 3-7 list ............................................................................ 3-3 TEST analog outputs .........................................................5-83 burn in .....................................................................2-10 calibration and functionality ......................................2-10 dielectric strength .....................................................2-10 ground accuracy ........................................................ 8-4 hardware functional ................................................... 8-2 input accuracy ........................................................... 8-2 output relays ............................................................5-82 overload curve .........................................................8-11 phase current accuracy ............................................. 8-2 power measurement .................................................8-11 production ................................................................2-10 RTD accuracy ........................................................... 8-4 secondary injection ................................................... 8-1 setup ........................................................................ 8-1 short circuit ..............................................................8-15 type test standards .................................................... 2-9 unbalance ................................................................8-12 voltage metering ........................................................6-10 phase reversal ................................................8-14 THERMAL capacity calculation ..................................................7-21
V
VIBRATION ..................................................................2-9 VOLTAGE input accuracy test .....................................................8-2 metering .................................................................. 6-10 phase reversal test ................................................... 8-14 VT SETTINGS ............................................................ 7-12
W
WARRANTY ................................................................ C-1 information ................................................................ C-1 WAVEFORM CAPTURE ....................2-6, 4-17, 5-10, 10-14 WIRING DIAGRAM .......................................................3-8
Z
ZERO SEQUENCE ground CT placement ............................................... 3-11
INDEX
iv

369 Man

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

369 Man

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

369 Man

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

369 Motor Management Relay

369 Revision: 53CMB110.000 Manual P/N: 1601-0077-B3 Copyright 1999 GE Multilin

Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098

Manufactured under an ISO9001 Registered system.

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario,

1. INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING

2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS

2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

369 Motor Management Relay

3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION

4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4.2 369PC INTERFACE

5.2 S1 369 SETUP

5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP

369 Motor Management Relay

5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION

5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS

5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS

5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE

5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS

5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS

369 Motor Management Relay

5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS

5.12 S11 369 TESTING

6.3 A2 METERING DATA

6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA

6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA

6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD

6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION

369 Motor Management Relay

7.1 269-369 COMPARISON

7.2 369 FAQs

7.3 369 DOs and DONTs

7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION

7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

8.1 TEST SETUP

8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING

369 Motor Management Relay

9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS

10.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE

10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS

10.4 ERROR RESPONSES

10.5 MEMORY MAP

A.1 MEMORY MAPPING

B.1 CHANGE NOTES

C.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

369 Motor Management Relay

369 Motor Management Relay

1.2 ORDERING 1.2 ORDERING

1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1.2.1 ORDERING

369PC Program RRTD

F485 CT HGF 515 DEMO FPC15

369 Motor Management Relay

1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING

1.2 ORDERING 1.2.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY